Office of Strategic Services Reports - Celebes Sea Area - Volume 2, May 1944

JANIS 155 Confidential Volume No. 2 of 4 Non-registered JOINT ARMY- NAVY INTELLIGENCE STUDY OF Celebes Sea Area * JOINT INTELLIGENCE STUDY PUBLISHING BOARD May . 1944 DECLASSIFIED By Authority of JCS letter, 7-25-75 By SR Date JUL 31 1975 JANIS 155 Confidential Non-registered CHAPTER V JAPAN CHINA MIDWAY 15. HAWAIIAN IS. HONOLULU WAKE L MARIANAS , IS. JOHNSTON I, PHILIPPINE FRENCH-INDO IS. GUAM CHINA PALAU MARSHALL #15. CAROLINE ISLANDS GILBERT IS, CHRISTMAS I. BORNEO CHEBES NEW GUINEA JAVA SOLOMON IS. TIMOR AUSTRALIA JOINT ARMY-NAVY INTELLIGENCE STUDY OF CELEBES SEA AREA CLIMATE AND WEATHER DECLASSIFIED By Authority of MAY 1944 JCS letter, 7-25-75 Ey SR Date JUL 31 1975 DECLASSIFIED By Authority of JCS letter, 7-25-75 By SR Date JUL 311975 List of Effective Pages, Chapter V CHANGE IN Sunjact MATTER EFFECT PAOB NUMBERS Cover Page Original unnumbered List of Effective Pages and Table of Contents, Chapter V (inside front cover) Original unnumbered Text and Figures Original pp. V-1 to V-14 Figure (insert, reverse blank) Original Figure V-13 Figure (insert, reverse blank) Original Figure V-14 Figure (insert, reverse blank) Original Figure V-15 Figure (insert, reverse blank) Original Figure V-16 Figure (insert, reverse blank) Original Figure V-17 Figure (insert, reverse blank) Original Figure V-18 Figure (insert, reverse blank) Original Figure V-19 Figure (insert, reverse blank) Original Figure V-20 Figure (insert, reverse blank) Original Figure V-21 Text and Figures Original PP. V-15 to V-20 Figure (insert, reverse blank) Original Figure V-22 Figure (insert, reverse blank) Original Figure V-23 Figure (insert, reverse blank) Original Figure V-24 Figure (insert, reverse blank) Original Figure V-25 Text and Figures Original PP. V-21 to V-24 Table of Contents, Cont'd. (inside back cover, reverse blank) Original unnumbered Table of Contents Note: This Chapter is based on material available in Washington, D.C., on 25 April 1944. Page Page 50. GENERAL DESCRIPTION V. 1 B. Weather disturbances V - 8 A. Seasonal variation V- 1 (1) Types of weather disturbances V - 8 B. Diurnal variation V - 1 C. Areal contrasts V. 1 (2) Aids in forecasting disturbances V 10 D. Day-to-day-variation V - 1 C. Effects of topography V 10 D. Synoptic situations V- 10 51. WEATHER AND OPERATIONS V- 1 (1) Type I-Pure trade air flow (November- A. Ground operations V 1 April) V 10 (1) Precipitation V 3 (2) (2) Temperature Type V 3 II-Strong polar outbreak V 11 (3) Humidity V 3 (3) Type III-Fronto-genesis off the South China (4) Wind speed V-3 Coast (October-March) V- 11 B. Air operations V 3 (4) Type IV-Sequence of polar outbreaks (1) Low-level operations V-3 (October-March) V 12 (2) High-level operations V 4 (5) Type V-Intertropic front in Celebes Sea Area (3) Incendiary bombing operations V- 5 (Spring and Fall) V-- 12 (4) Parachute operations V 5 (6) Type VI-Trough, or wave in the easterlies C. Naval operations V 5 (Fall, Winter, Spring) V 12 (1) Wind V 5 (7) Type VII-Intertropic front west of Philippines (2) Sex and swell V 5 (April-September) V 13 (3) Cloud cover V 6 (8) Type VIII-Intertropic front over or north of (4) Visibility V 6 (5) Humidity Philippines (May-October) V - 13 V 6 D. Amphibious operations V-6 53. CLIMATIC SUMMARY V - 14 (1) Wind and state of sea and swell V - 6 A. Precipitation V - 14 (2) Visibility V 6 B. Temperature V - 15 (3) Cloudiness V 6 C. Humidity V 15 E. Chemical warfare V - 6 D. Surface wind V 16 (1) Surface wind V 7 E. Sea and swell (2) Turbulence V 20 V 7 (3) Temperature F. Upper winds V 20 V 7 (4) Humidity G. Cloud V 7 V- 21 (5) Precipitation V 7 H. Turbulence and thunderstorms V 22 52. FORECASTING TECHNIQUES I. Icing V- 22 V-7 A. Nature of air masses J. Visibility, fog, haze, dust, smoke V - 22 V 7 (1) Origin of air masses K. Local names for weather elements V 7 V 23 (2) Characteristics of air masses V-8 54. PRINCIPAL SOURCES V 23 Confidential Chapter V Page V I CLIMATE AND WEATHER 50. General Description trasts among different parts of this region. Broad regional con- trasts are associated with differences between land and sea sur- In all seasons, the climate of most of the Celebes Sea area is faces, between windward and leeward slopes of the major moun- characterized by gentle winds, monotonous heat, extremely tain ranges, and between different latitudinal positions. In addi- high humidity, heavy cloudiness, and frequent intense rain tion, minor topographic differences cause large place-to-place showers. Every few years a typhoon may sweep across the north- contrasts in most weather elements; slight local differences in ern part of the area. The mountains rise into a cool zone of per- slope or exposure commonly give nearby places dissimilar wind sistent cloudbanks. Only the highest peaks have snow. Soil and rainfall regimes. Areal contrasts in critical weather ele- conditions are persistently muddy and there are occasional ments are discussed in Topic 51. floods. D. Day-to-day variation. A. Seasonal variation. In contrast to the fairly regular climatic processes described Two great air streams, known locally as the northeast and above, day-to-day weather changes are quite irregular. southwest monsoons, dominate the surface air circulation over The monsoons, although remarkably steady in comparison to the Celebes Sea region. These streams originate in the great winds in most middle latitude regions, are subject to nonperiod- middle latitude high pressure centers of the Northern and ic variations in speed and direction of flow. In like manner, the Southern Hemispheres, respectively. They converge toward the intertropic front undergoes erratic shifts in position and inten- equatorial low pressure trough, where they meet along the inter- sity. Moreover, moving pressure disturbances sometimes traverse tropic front or doldrum belt. The intertropic front migrates northward and southward with this area. Such disturbances are generally quite weak and are re- the changing seasons (FIGURE V 1). From December through flected in the weather chiefly through intensifying or weaken- March, while the intertropic front normally lies well to the ing local convective activity. Disturbances of sufficient intensity south, the northeast monsoon blows steadily over the Celebes to cause widespread bad weather appear occasionally. At very Sea region. From April through June, the front is moving rare intervals, such disturbances develop into violent tropical gradually northward over the Celebes Sea; the northeast mon- cyclones-typhoons. The Celebes Sea lies well to the south of soon and the southwest monsoon each dominates part of the the zone of greatest typhoon danger. area, with variable winds near the front. From July through Only by short-range forecasts can these irregular weather September, when the front usually lies well to the north, the changes be anticipated. They are discussed in more detail in southwest monsoon dominates the Celebes Sea; from October Topic 52 of this chapter. Because of the sparse network of synop- through November, during its southward migration, the inter- tic stations in the western Pacific before the Japanese occupa- tropic front again lies across that region. tion, the nature of day-to-day weather variations in the Celebes In spite of the complete reversal of wind flow from season to season, in most respects the climate of the Celebes Sea re- Sea area is only incompletely understood. Forecasting of such gion is monotonously uniform throughout the year. Both mon- variations is not easy, even if synoptic reports are available from soons have generally had sufficiently long journeys over tropi- the entire western Pacific. With reports from neighboring cal seas to be warm and moist by the time they arrive over this areas cut off by enemy occupation, accurate forecasting is ex- area. All seasons are characterized, over most of the area, by gen- tremely difficult. tle winds, remarkably high temperature and humidity, good visibility, much cloudiness, and frequent rainshowers. However, seasonal variation in some weather elements is sufficiently great 51. Weather and Operations to be a significant factor in planning certain operations; these elements are discussed in detail in Topic 51 of this chapter. Reference should be made to Topic 53 for detailed climatol- ogical information and to Topic 52 for detailed discussion of B. Diurnal variation. weather associated with different synoptic situations. The pres- ent section is restricted to general discussion and conclusions. There is considerable variation in most weather elements, as- sociated with daily heating and cooling of the atmosphere and of A. Ground operations. ground and water surfaces. In the case of wind velocity, temper- ature, relative humidity, visibility, and cloudiness, the magni- The chief weather factors which may restrict ground opera- tude of the regular diurnal variation is commonly greater than tions in this region are precipitation, temperature, humidity, and the seasonal variation. Diurnal variation of critical weather ele- wind speed. Precipitation is a critical factor in flooding, soil ments is discussed in Topic 51. trafficability, and erosion. Precipitation, remperature, and hu- midity affect maintenance of materiel, storage of supplies, and health and comfort of personnel. High wind speeds, approach- C. Areal contrasts. ing hurricane force in this region at rare intervals, may cause There are significant, though not extreme, climatic con- casualties and material damage. DECLASSIFIED By Authority of JCS letter, 7-25-75 By SR JUL 1975 Date Page V-2 CLIMATE AND WEATHER FEBRUARY APRIL JUNE AUGUST 0 OCTOBER DECEMBER LEGEND INTERTROPIC FRONT -- - SECONDARY FRONT AIR FLOW FIGURE V-1. Mean Wind Flow and Fronts. CLIMATE AND WEATHER Page V 3 (1) Precipitation. amounts of rainfall. For example, at Manado there is an average (a) Type of precipitation. Over the lowlands, all precipi- of 73 hours of rain a month in January and February; 9 hours a tation falls as rain. Snow occurs only on the highest mountain month during July, August, and September. peaks. (b) Intensity. Over the lowlands, rainfall is usually in (b) Amount: areal contrasts. Over the lowlands, average the form of intense showers. On an ordinary rainy day, over 1/2 precipitation is moderately heavy; most of the lowlands receive inch of rain falls. an average of between 50 and 150 inches a year. Areal contrasts Days with more than 2 inches of rainfall occur in most are irregular and are controlled largely by local relief. For ex- months, and nearly every year has one or more days with over ample, Amoerang and Bojong, located only about 10 miles 4 inches of rainfall. The highest 24-hour rainfall recorded in apart in the Northern Celebes, have average annual rainfall this area is 19 inches. On the lower slopes of the mountains, amounts of 65 and 173 inches respectively. Rainfall is undoubt- probably even greater intensities occur. Maximum intensities edly much heavier on exposed mountain slopes than over the generally occur in the months which have the greatest average lowlands, although quantitative information is lacking. amounts of rainfall. (c) Amount: seasonal variation. Over much of this area, (2) Temperature. seasonal variation is insignificant. However, many places have marked seasonal variation associated with the influence of In all seasons, over all the lowlands of this area temperature mountains on exposure to winds. Places exposed to the north- normally ranges from 70° or 75° F. in the cool of the morn- east monsoon generally have a relatively wet season in winter; ing to 85° or 90° F. in the heat of the day. Temperatures be- low 65° or above 95° F. are very infrequent. Cooler condi- places exposed to the southwest monsoon tend to have most rain in summer. At many places the wettest month has twice as tions can be expected in the highlands. The rate of decrease in much rainfall as the driest month. At a few places in northeast- temperature with increase in elevation is generally 3 or 4° F. ern Mindanao, the wettest month has 10 times as much rainfall per 1,000 feet. as the driest. (3) Humidity. (d) Amount: diurnal variation. Considerable rain falls Extremely high humidity is characteristic of this region in at all hours of the day. Over the interior, rainfall is generally all seasons. Relative humidity generally averages 80 to 90% heaviest in the afternoon. This tendency toward an afternoon throughout the year. Humidities below 50% are very infre- maximum extends to the coast when the wind is blowing off- quent. Relative humidity increases with higher elevation, aver- shore. When the wind is onshore, this tendency is less marked, aging more than 90% at medium elevations on the mountains. being partially offset by an increase in night and early morning Diurnal variation is much greater than seasonal variation. rainfall. Following are the mean monthly amounts of rainfall There is usually a difference of 20 or 30% between the early in inches at Manado (Northern Celebes) during different parts morning maximum and the midday minimum in relative hu- of the day: midity. NORTHEAST SOUTHWEST MONSOON MONSOON TRANSITION (4) Wind speed. HOURS (local time) SEASON SEASON SEASON Strong winds and gales are very rare in this area. However, 0000-0400 3.3 0.5 0.9 occasional typhoons, following a track far to the south of their 0400-0800 2.2 0.5 0.7 usual course, cause destructive winds over this area. Such de- 0800-1200 2.3 0.3 1.0 structive typhoons can be expected every few years in the far 1200-1600 4.0 2.0 3.2 1600-2000 2.2 0.5 1.3 north of this area; in the far south, destructive winds are prac- 2000-2400 2.4 0.2 1.0 tically unknown. During the 16 years from 1903 to 1918, Suri- Total 16.3 4.0 8.1 gao Province on Mindanao had 4 destructive typhoons; other provinces on Mindanao had 1 or none; the Sulu Archipelago It is evident that the largest proportion of night and early morn- had one. Typhoons may occur in any season, but are most likely ing rainfall occurs when northeast (onshore) winds prevail. to occur in this area in winter. (e) Amount: year-to-year variation. In individual years, significant departures from average rainfall conditions occur. B. Air operations. However, rainfall is seldom more than twice the normal in any month. Rainless or nearly rainless months are possible at most (1) Low-level operations. places in this region, but are quite rare. The chief weather factors which may restrict low-level air (f) Frequency. Over most of the lowlands, rain normally operations over this area are low ceilings, restricted visibility, falls on 100 to 200 days a year. However, some lowland places, and turbulence. Surface winds and upper winds, although including most of the stations in northeastern Mindanao, have seldom restrictive except during passage of a tropical cyclone, rain on more than 200 days a year. On exposed mountain slopes, are of interest in planning operations. rain falls almost every day. Rainfall frequencies resemble rain- (a) Ceilings. Although cloud formation is heavy through- fall amounts in areal, seasonal, diurnal, and year-to-year varia- out this area in all seasons, the bases of the lower clouds gen- tions. erally lie well above 1,000 feet elevation. Therefore, low-level (g) Duration. Over the lowlands, rain is usually in the operations over the lowlands will rarely encounter widespread form of brief showers. At Manado, rain lasts for an average low ceilings. However, bases of isolated cumulonimbus clouds of 434 hours a year. In the mountains, rain is more persistent, often lie below 1,000 feet, or even below 500 feet in rain. Over sometimes lasting for days with only short letups. Rain gener- hilly and mountainous areas, low ceilings are frequent; there ally lasts longest in the months that have the greatest average is great local variation, depending on site and exposure. Page V CLIMATE AND WEATHER (b) Visibility. Horizontal visibility is generally good in The sea breeze is generally deeper and may exceed 1,000 or this area, but is occasionally limited by fog, cloud, mist, haze, even 3,000 feet in depth. The land breeze is perceptible only or rain. within a few miles of the coast; the sea breeze is sometimes per- Fog. reducing visibility to less than 1/2 mile, is rare over the ceptible for a distance of 50 miles or more on both sides of the sea and along the coasts. In the interior, dense morning fogs coast line, but is usually strongly developed only within 20 are frequent in all seasons over many river valleys, lakes, and miles of the coast. Many interior valleys experience a similar marshes. Fog rarely persists long after sunrise. daily variation in wind direction. Mountain (downslope) Clouds cause very bad visibility conditions on mountain breezes are common at night, valley (upslope) breezes in the slopes in all seasons. Above the condensation level, which usual- daytime. ly lies at 1,000 to 3,000 feet elevation on windward slopes, the Wind speeds are moderate over most of the area. Through- frequent thick cloudbanks have the same effect as fog. out the area, speeds occasionally exceed 30 m.p.h. in thunder- Mist and haze, reducing visibility to less than 6 miles, are en- squalls. Gales can be expected only during passage of one of countered occasionally in all seasons. Haze occurs in stable air the rare typhoons. streams and is apparently the result of strong winds, whipping (e) Upper winds. In the lower levels, upper air winds condensation nuclei into the air. Haze is intensified by dust, vol- closely resemble the surface circulation. From December, canic ash, or smoke from brush fires. The maximum haze fre- through March, winds below 5,000 feet are predominantly quency occurs in September and October, at the end of the northeasterly over the northern Philippines, shifting to norther- southwest monsoon season, when haze can be expected 5 to ly near the Equator, and northwesterly south of the Equator. 10% of the time over the southern Celebes Sea, though not so From July through September, winds below 5,000 feet are pre- frequently over the northern part. dominantly southeasterly south of the Equator, shifting to south- Rain generally reduces visibility to less than 4 miles. In tor- erly near the Equator, and southwesterly over the Philippines. In rential downpours, visibility may be practically nil. Rain occurs the transition months, upper winds over the Celebes Sea area ordinarily in the form of brief local showers, which can gen- are quite variable even in the lower levels. erally be avoided by planes in flight. However, the rain asso- In the upper levels, there is a tendency for circulation to ciated with fronts or tropical cyclones is steady and must be ap- parallel- the Equator, with westerly and easterly winds fre- proached with care. quent, northerly and southerly winds infrequent in all months. (c) Turbulence. Turbulence is severe in cumulonimbus At all levels, wind speeds are normally moderate. Speeds clouds and thunderstorms, and is extremely violent in well-de- greater than 30 knots are encountered only a small percentage veloped tropical cyclones. of the time. Cumulonimbus clouds are reported in about 10% of the ship observations in the Celebes Sea during all seasons, and are (2) High-level operations. even more frequent over the land, especially over hills and High-level operations may be restricted by the same weather mountains. They may extend from below 1,000 feet to above factors which affect low-level operations. In addition, high-level 40,000 feet. The violent turbulence in cumulonimbus clouds operations are restricted by cloudiness at intermediate and low can best be avoided by either flying beneath the cloud base or levels and by icing. by approaching the cloud at an altitude of more than 20,000 (a) Intermediate and low cloudiness. Although cloud feet. The decision depends upon whether or not the plane can formation seldom interferes with low-level operations in this fly at high altitudes and upon the nature of the terrain. area, it severely restricts high-level operations. Frequent heavy Thunderstorms may be encountered over any part of this area cumulus and stratocumulus cloud, with bases at about 1,500 in any season. They are least frequent during the northeast mon- feet elevation, are characteristic of the entire area in all seasons. soon season, from December through March. Well-developed tropical cyclones are very rare in the Celebes Available cloudiness data refer to total sky cover by clouds Sea area. at all levels. Such data include observations of cirrus clouds, (d) Surface winds. Over this area in general, northeast sometimes so high that they do not affect even high-level opera- tions. However, since the bulk of the cloud formation in this winds prevail from December through March, southwest winds from July through September. In the transition months, winds area is at intermediate levels, data on total sky cover provide a are more variable, but northeast winds prevail over the northern fair approximation of the amount of cloud to be expected within parts of the area, southwest winds over the southern parts. the normal altitude zone of high-level operations. Topography causes great local variation in wind direction. In The seasonal variation of rainfall at a given station is usually the mountains, winds are funneled through valleys and passes. a reliable indication of the seasonal variation of cloud. Even minor topographic features produce local variations in the Over most of the area, mean annual cloudiness is about 50% characteristically weak air flow. or more. Clear sky (less than 25% cloud cover) can be ex- Along the coasts and in interior valleys, there is a tendency pected less than 1/3 of the time in all seasons, and rarely lasts toward regular daily variation in wind direction. On exposed more than a few hours. Cloudy sky (more than 65% cover) portions of the coast, this tendency causes only a slight deflec- can be expected more than 1/3 of the time in all seasons. tion of the prevailing monsoon. However, in sheltered bays, There are moderate areal differences in cloudiness. Over the local breezes often completely obliterate the monsoons. The sea, an average of approximately half of the sky is cloud cov- land (offshore) breeze sets in during the evening and usually ered. Over the lowlands, an average of about two-thirds of the abates at about 0900. The sea (onshore) breeze sets in around sky is covered. Over many hill and mountain regions, cloud midday and abates after sunset. The land breeze normally occu- formation is even heavier. pies a shallow layer which seldom exceeds 500 feet in depth. Seasonal variation is not great. Over the sea there is a slight CLIMATE AND WEATHER Page V.5 summer maximum in cloudiness in the northern part of the C. Naval operations. area, a slight winter maximum in the south. Over the land, sea- sonal variation is largely controlled by topography. Over slopes Normally, good weather conditions are desired for combined facing north and east, cloudiness tends to reach a maximum in naval operations, however, it may occasionally be more desir- able to use bad weather as a cover to conceal fleet movements. winter, during the northeast monsoon. Over slopes facing south and west, cloudiness tends to reach a maximum in summer, Consequently, the chief weather factors to be considered in during the southwest monsoon. Following are the mean cloud- planning naval operations are wind, sea and swell, cloud cover, iness values, in percentage of sky covered by cloud, at stations and visibility. It has been shown that in the Celebes Sea area, with northeast and southwest exposures. all seasons are characterized by light winds, good visibility, much cloudiness, and frequent precipitation. Still, the seasonal NORTHEAST SOUTHWEST variation is sufficient to be of interest for planning. MONSOON MONSOON Dec-MAR (1) Wind. JUL-SEP Northeast Exposure (a) December through March. During this season the (Mean of 3 Stations) 75 67 intertropic front is well to the south of the Celebes Sea so that Southwest Exposure northeast winds prevail throughout the area. These winds, which (Mean of 3 Stations) 62 71 are remarkably steady, blow with an average velocity of about Cloudiness is usually greater from 0600 to 1800 than at 8 m.p.h. Strongest mean velocities, 9 to 12 m.p.h., are observed night. off the northwest coast of Borneo and eastern Mindanso. (b) leing. The freezing level is normally close to 15,000 (b) April through June. During these months the inter- feet and rarely descends as low as 12,000 feet. Icing conditions tropic front moves slowly northward over the Celebes Sea can generally be avoided by descending to lower levels when and as a result, both northeast and southeast winds dominate a clouds are encountered in which icing conditions exist. The portion of the area, except near the front where directions become greatest danger occurs when it is necessary to fly through more variable. Velocities decrease slightly, averaging 6 to 7 cumulonimbus clouds at high levels. m.p.h. (c) July through September. Throughout these months (3) Incendiary bombing operations. the intertropic front lies to the north of the Celebes Sea. The Incendiary bombing may be restricted by the same weather southwest monsoon dominates the entire area during this period. factors which affect high- and low-level operations. In addition, Mean velocities are highest during this period, 8 to 9 m.p.h. incendiary burning is limited by rainfall, humidity, and wind (d) October through November. In October, the inter- speed. tropic front reenters the northern Celebes Sea and migrates (4) Rainfall. Over most of the area, rain falls on 10 to towards the south during the period. The southeast trades give 20 days a month in all seasons. Some places expect as few as way in advance of the retreating front so that northeast winds 5 rainy days in individual months. Rainfall is heavy, with over again dominate the entire area by the end of November. Over 1/2 inch falling on an average rainy day. Long drought periods the area as a whole, velocities average 7 m.p.h. are rare. (2) Sea and swell. (b) Humidity. Extremely high humidity is characteristic of all of this region in all seasons. Relative humidity generally Data on sea and swell are of special interest in the planning averages 80 or 90%. Humidities below 50% are very infre- of operations involving the use of aircraft carriers or small craft. quent. The prevailing low wind velocities are reflected in the low (c) Wind speed. Wind speeds are generally too low to frequency of heavy sea and swell. Within the Celebes Sea both produce satisfactory incendiary burning conditions. Except at a sea and swell are predominantly low throughout the year. Avail- few exposed highland places, wind speeds over 30 m.p.h. are able data show that 90% of all observations report calm or low rare. Along the coasts, calms are frequent and winds do not seas, and over 90% of all observations report low or no swell. often exceed 10 m.p.h. except in the early afternoon, when the Almost all occurrences of medium and high sea and swell have sea breeze is strongest. been observed on the extreme edges or outside the Celebes Sea (4) Parachute operations. proper. Parachute operations are endangered by high surface wind (a) November through April. During these months, which represent the northeast monsoon season, sea is predomi- speeds and by good visibility. nantly from the northeast. Sea conditions are most disturbed (a) Surface wind speed. In all seasons and in all parts of during this period, especially in December and January. Within the area, surface wind speeds are frequently low enough for the Celebes Sea, high seas (over 9 feet) have not been observed safe parachute landings. On the coasts, low wind speeds are and medium seas (2 to 9 feet) show a frequency of only 13%. most probable around sunrise and sunset, when there is a period These values, however, increase rapidly to the north and east. of calm between the daily breezes. Dangerous wind speeds are Off the south coast of Borneo and off the west and east coasts most probable in the early afternoon. of Mindanao, medium sea reaches a frequency of 30 to 40%, (b) Visibility. Visibility low enough to mask parachute and high seas a frequency of 2 to 5%. landings effectively, is infrequent in most of this area. Fog can Swell, which is also predominantly from the northeast, is be expected over restricted portions of the interior lowlands on lowest during this period. High swell (over 12 feet) has a fre- calm mornings. Haze would occasionally produce effective con- quency of 1%, while moderate swell (6 to 12 feet) shows a cealment. Haze is most frequent in September and October. frequency of only 2%. As in the case of sea conditions, these Page V.6 CLIMATE AND WEATHER percentages increase noticeably to the north and east. To the Throughout the year and particularly during the winter sea- east and west of Mindanao and off the north coast of Borneo son, moving pressure systems traverse this area, occasionally ac- moderate swell occurs from 24 to 26% of the time, and high companied by frontal systems. They are normally weak, how- swell 2 to 4% of the time. ever, and are usually only reflected in the weather by intensify- (b) May through October. The sea is least disturbed dur- ing or weakening the local convective activity. Disturbances of ing these months, especially in May and June. The Celebes Sea sufficient intensity to cause wide spread bad weather are very has medium seas only 10% of the time and high seas have not rare. been observed. To the east and west of Mindanao medium seas (4) Visibility. maintain a frequency of 20% and high seas a frequency of 2%. Visibility is most often reduced by precipitation. Rain showers Most disturbed conditions for the area are reported off the north- of short duration ordinarily lower visibility to less than 4 miles, west coast of Borneo. In this portion of the area medium seas are observed on 37% of all observations and high seas on 5% of or in heavy showers to less than 1/2 mile. However, rain asso- ciated with the zone of convergence, fronts, or tropical disturb- the observations. Since this is the southwest monsoon season, ances is often of a steady character and will restrict visibility to direction of sea is predominantly south or southwest. less than 6 miles for long periods. Within the Celebes Sea, the frequency of moderate swell in- creases from 2 to 3%, while the frequency of high swell re- Fog is very rare over the sea and never persists for more than an hour or so after sunrise. Visibility may occasionally be re- mains at 1%. Off eastern Mindanao the occurrence of moderate duced below 6 miles by haze. Haze is most often found in stable and high swell drops off over 50%, to 10% and 1% respec- air streams which are most frequent (5 to 10% of the time) tively. In the Sulu Sea area, off the west coast of Mindanao, no at the end of the southwest monsoon season, September and swell and low swell predominate, since the amount of moderate swell decreases to only 2% and the frequency of high swell to October. 1%. Roughese conditions still persist off the northwest coast (5) Humidity. of Borneo. In this portion of the area, moderate swell fall off Relative humidity is very high throughout the year. Humidi- to 18%, but high swell increases to a frequency of 7%. Direc- ties of 90% or more may be expected almost every day. tions of swell are somewhat more variable during this month, but south and southwest directions apparently prevail through- out the entire area. D. Amphibious operations. More detailed information on sea and swell may be found The weather factors limiting amphibious operations are the in Chapter III. same as those affecting naval operations, namely: wind, sea and swell, visibility, and cloudiness. (3) Cloud cover. Over the sea, mean cloudiness averages about 5 tenths with a (1) Wind and state of sea and swell. slight summer maximum in the northern part, and a slight On shores exposed toward the north and east, swell is fre- winter maximum in the southern part. Clear skies may be ex- quent only from November through April, when northeast pected between 15 and 20% of the time, but rarely last for winds are frequent. On shores exposed toward the south and more than a few hours. Overcast skies (7 tenths cloud cover) west, swell is frequent only from June through September, when can be expected 35 to 40% of the time in all seasons. southwest winds are frequent. The low speeds of the prevailing All months are characterized by broken skies with instability winds are reflected in the low frequency of heavy swell. Occa- clouds, cumulus, predominating. Ceilings normally are well sional distant hurricanes are the chief cause of heavy swell. above 1,000 feet, however, bases of isolated cumulonimbus Disturbed sea conditions are possible in any season during a often lie below 1,000 feet. thundersquall, when wind velocities sometimes exceed 30 m.p.h. Should cloud cover be desired to conceal fleet movements, it The prevailing winds, averaging only 5 or 10 m.p.h., are usual- is expected that most suitable conditions would be found dur- ly too gentle to cause disturbed sea conditions. Disturbed sea is ing the times when the intertropic front lies over the Celebes most frequent when the prevailing winds are onshore and are Sea. From April through June the front moves northward over intensified by the daily afternoon sea breeze. the area and should offer ample opportunities for a complete overcast cloud cover. The intertropic front, being formed as a (2) Visibility. result of the converging trades, undergoes irregular movements Visibility low enough to conceal landing operations effective- and can change in intensity very rapidly. Present knowledge of ly is infrequent in this area, Sea fog and coastal fog are rare. its behavior is rather limited, but its daily variations can be fore- Haze occasionally reduces visibility below 5 miles, most fre- cast if sufficient data are available. Winds aloft soundings have quently in September and October. proven to be a very valuable tool in this respect. (3) Cloudiness. Along the edges of the intertropic front may be found frequent shower and thunderstorm activity, as well as low ceilings and Cloud cover is often sufficiently heavy to conceal landing reduced visibilities. Most rain showers and thunderstorms are of operations from high-flying planes. However, ceilings below short duration, but occasionally intermittent moderate or heavy 1,000 feet are unusual, so that clouds cannot be expected to rain may persist for several days. provide protection against low-level attacks. The intertropic front also lies over the Celebes Sea in Octo- ber and November, during its retreat toward the south. Cloud E. Chemical warfare. conditions similar to that experienced in April, May, and June The chief weather factors which may limit chemical opera- may also be expected in these months. tions are: surface wind direction and speed, turbulence near the CLIMATE AND WEATHER Page V-7 ground, temperature, humidity, and precipitation. Wind direc- tion. Following are mean relative humidities at different hours tion is not only of prime importance in use of cloud gas, but it is (local time): also significant when high concentrations of persistent agents 0200 0400 0600 0800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 are placed on targets close to friendly troops. Wind speed and TARAKAN (Northeast Borneo) degree of turbulence in the surface air are important in con- 95 96 96 92 85 77 73 76 89 94 94 95 trolling the concentration of cloud gases as well as the persis- MANADO (Northern Celebes) tency of persistent agents. Temperature affects the rate of evap- 92 93 94 86 76 74 75 78 83 89 90 91 oration of persistent agents, thereby controlling their effective period. Humidity and precipitation affect the rate of hydrolysis (5) Precipitation. of many chemical agents. Over most of the area, rain falls on 10 to 20 days a month in all seasons. Some places expect as few as 5 rainy days in in- (1) Surface wind. dividual months. Rainfall is heavy, with over 1/2 inch falling From December through March, winds are generally from on an average rainy day. the quarter north to east; from July through September, winds are generally from the quarter south to west. In the transition months, winds are more variable, but northeast winds prevail 52. Forecasting Techniques over the northern parts, southwest winds over the southern parts. However, even minor topographic features produce local The Celebes Sea and surrounding islands are comparatively variations in the characteristically weak air flow. uncharted from a meteorological standpoint. Many of the Along the coasts and in interior valleys, there is a tendency weather elements which are most significant in military opera- toward regular daily variation in wind direction. On exposed tions have been observed at very few places in this area, and in portions of the coast, this tendency produces only a slight deflec- these places for just a short period before the present war. tion of the prevailing monsoon. However, in sheltered bays, Thus, much of our knowledge of this area must be inferred from local breezes often completely obliterate the monsoon. The experiences in nearby regions. A meteorologist called upon to land (offshore) breeze sets in during the evening and continues forecast for the Celebes Sea area will be pioneering in the ap- until about 0900; the sea (onshore) breeze sets in around mid- plication of techniques found successful in other tropical areas. It is possible to derive only a general picture of the nature of day and often continues until sunset. The land breeze is per- air masses, weather disturbances, effects of topography, and types ceptible only within a few miles of the coast; the sea breeze is of synoptic situations which the forecaster will encounter. An sometimes perceptible for a distance of 50 miles on both sides outline of these phenomena is presented in this section. of the coast line. Many interior valleys experience a similar daily variation in wind direction. Mountain (downslope) breez- A. Nature of air masses. es are common at night, valley (upslope) breezes in the day- time. (1) Origin of air masses. Wind speeds are usually low in this area. Along the coasts, In the northern winter a tremendous anticyclone builds up calms are frequent, and winds do not often exceed 10 m.p.h. over continental Siberia, At the same time a thermal low pres- except in the early afternoon, when the sea breeze is strongest. sure area is formed over the desert area of western Australia. The combined push and pull results in a broad sweep of air out (2) Turbulence. into the Pacific from the Asiatic mainland, which swings into a Turbulence and instability of the surface air, prevalent over northeast flow over the Celebes Sea region. This air stream of the whole area in all seasons, would greatly restrict chemical Asiatic origin is termed northeast monsoon or norther air. Feb- operations. Relatively stable conditions prevail in the early ruary is normally the month when the northers are most fully morning hours, usually from 0000 to 0600. Lapse rates are developed. This flow may extend as far eastward as the Inter- usually steepest between 1000 and 1800. national Date Line. It is bounded on the east by the trade winds of the eastern Pacific anticyclone. (3) Temperature. However, even in the middle of winter, during periods when in the lowlands, the air is constantly warm, with very little the northers are weak, the northeast trade air may invade the seasonal temperature variation. In all months temperatures Celebes Sea area from the east. By March the northeast trades normally range from 70° or 75° F. in the early morning to are almost as frequent in the Celebes Sea area as the northers. 85° or 90° F. at midday. Following are mean temperatures at During April there is usually some incursion of Southern different hours (local time): Hemisphere air into this area, either in the form of southwest 0200 0400 0600 0800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 monsoon air, from the Indian Ocean high, or as southeast trade TARAKAN (Northeast Borneo) air from the South Pacific or Australian bighs. During May and 74 74 74 78 81 83 85 84 80 77 75 74 June the Celebes Sea area is a bartleground between Northern MANADO (Northern Celebs) 74 73 73 77 82 85 84 83 81 78 77 75 and Southern Hemisphere air masses. Lower temperatures can be expected in the highlands. In the northern summer the Asiatic anticyclone is replaced by a weak low pressure area, while the anticyclone of the south (4) Humidity. Indian Ocean has moved northward, and more or less persistent The extremely high humidity characteristic of this area causes anticyclones occupy the Australian continent and the South rapid hydrolysis of some chemical agents. Specific humidity Pacific. From July through September, the Celebes Sea area is probably averages between 15 and 20 grams per kilogram. dominated by a strong flow from the Southern Hemisphere. Relative humidity generally averages 80 to 90% in all This flow is called the southwest monsoon or southeast trade, seasons. Diurnal variation is much greater than seasonal varia- depending on its source and trajectory. Page V 8 CLIMATE AND WEATHER In September, northease trade air may occasionally enter the mally such conditions persist for only a few days, but in this surface picture from the east. In October and November, North- case they lasted for several weeks. ern Hemisphere air becomes more and more frequent in this (d) Southwest monsoon. The southwest monsoon has had area, and by December is usually in full possession. an extremely long path over warm water before reaching the Thus the forecaster in the Celebes Sea area will have 4 air Celebes Sea. It is moist to high levels. Following are the mean masses to deal with at the surface: northeast monsoon and equivalent potential temperatures (in degrees Absolute) of the northeast trade in winter, the southwest monsoon and southeast southwest monsoon according to meteorograph soundings at trade in summer, with combinations of all 4 during the tran- Manila: sition seasons. SURFACE 1,600 Ft. 3,300 Ft. 6,600 Ft. 9,800 Ft. SW Monsoon 345 343 340 339 340 (2) Characteristics of air masses. The southwest monsoon lacks the inversion which is typical of (a) Northeast monsoon. The northeast monsoon, although other air masses in this area, and is therefore very squally and, of polar continental origin, has had a long trajectory over the warm waters of the tropical North Pacific before arriving over stormy. It is not a steady flow, but comes in surges, with which the Celebes Sea. The norther air stream is shallow south of 20° are associated very heavy rains at exposed stations. The low to 25° N., rarely being over 4,000 feet deep even in the vicinity clouds are very dark and heavy, being frequently classified as of Hong Kong. Near the south China coast, the norther stream nimbus or nimbostratus. Visibility is good except in heavy rain. is overrun at about that level by warm, dry, westerly winds, and B. Weather disturbances. further to the east by an easterly extension of the northeast trades. (1) Types of weather disturbances. Over the ocean, there is little rainfall or cloud formation in The basic cause of disturbances in the weather is convergence, norther air. However, since the air mass is conditionally un- accompanied by instability and low pressure. Convergence OC- stable, any kind of lifting produces cumulus formation and rain curs along fronts between air masses and also occurs within air showers. Low cloud forms are characteristically small, sharply masses. Tropical cyclones, the severest weather disturbances in defined cumuli, with a uniform level of cloud tops at the in- this area, may develop out of either frontal or air mass dis- version level, usually about 4,000 feet. turbances. (b) Northeast trade. Unlike the northeast monsoon, the (a) Frontal disturbances. The intertropic front, or equato- northeast trade is of tropical maritime origin. However, the rial front, forms the boundary between the convergent air surface temperatures and humidities of the 2 air streams are streams from the Northern and Southern Hemispheres. It is almost identical by the time they reach the Celebes Sea. Fol- usually found in the equatorial pressure trough, which follows lowing are the mean equivalent potential temperatures (in de- the seasonal migrations of the thermal Equator. The position of grees Absolute) of the 2 air masses, according to meteorograph the front is subject to irregular day to day oscillations. In ex- soundings at Manila: treme cases the daily movement may exceed 200 miles. Since the Northern and Southern Hemisphere air masses have almost SURFACE 1,600 Ft. 3,300 Ft. 6,600 Ft. 9,800 Ft. NE Monsoon 337 334 334 333 identical temperatures and humidities in the Celebes Sea region, 329 NE Trade 338 337 338 332 330 this front is not a strong density discontinuity, as in extratropical disturbances, but rather a pressure trough and wind discon- The trade air in this region ordinarily retains the temperature tinuity. inversion at 6,000 to 8,000 feet which is characteristic of its The intensity of the intertropic front varies greatly according source region, but is warmer and moister below that level than to the intensity and orientation of the converging air flows. it was when it left the North Pacific bigh. With weak, nearly parallel flows, the front deteriorates to a When the northeast trade air flow is smooth and undisturbed, doldrum zone, with only local cumulus formation and rain fair weather conditions prevail, with only scattered light showers. With strongly convergent air streams, the front be- showers. However, like the northeast monsoon, the northeast trade air is conditionally unstable, and any lifting produces comes more sharply defined, with a belt of turbulence, heavy cumulonimbus cloud, and rain. cumulus formation and rainshowers. As in the northeast mon- The front between the northeast monsoon and the northeast soon, low cloud forms are predominantly cumulus. However, in trades is usually not very active in this region, as the 2 air the trade air the cumuli are less sharply defined, rise to higher streams are almost identical in characteristics and direction of levels, and are sometimes accompanied by altostratus in several flow. The norther-trade front usually advances southward over layers. the Philippines in an east-west alignment. Near the Asiatic con- (c) Southeast trade. Like its Northern Hemisphere coun- tinent, fresh outbreaks of norther air retain a temperature dif- terpart, the southeast trade is characterized by a temperature ferential across the front as far south as Singapore. However, on inversion at 6,000 to 8,000 feet. Above the first few thousand reaching the Celebes Sea, these norther air outbreaks have been feet, it is usually very dry and stable. This air mass has less cloud than any other in this area. There modified greatly by passing over the warm water of the Jap- anese current and temperature contrasts along the front are is some fair weather cumulus formation over land areas in the afrernoon. Heavy cloud and rainfall occur only at places oro- slight. Nevertheless, strong surges in the form of a freshening of the monsoon, are felt even below the Equator, with resultant graphically exposed to its strong, steady flow. This stream is increased convective activity and precipitation. often hazy; however, haze is confined to the levels below the The front, between the southease trades and the southwest inversion. Grimes cites a case in September 1941 when haze was so bad over the entire Netherlands East Indies that it was monsoon, is rarely very active in the Celebes Sea region. impossible to see objects on the ground from 2,000 feet. Nor- (b) Convergence within air masses. The forecaster must watch for the development of convergent flow within any one CLIMATE AND WEATHER Page V.9 of the major air streams. In some cases, such convergence is as- Near the source region in the central or eastern Pacific, this sociated with a trough or frontal boundary moving into this flow is characterized by marked stability and a sharp decrease in region from higher latitudes. In other cases, convergence de- moisture above 6,000 to 8,000 feet, but on the western equato- velops locally. rial side of the high pressure cell this inversion is greatly weak- Caribbean meteorologists have noted that a deep easterly ened, permitting increased convective activity. Meteorologists stream over that area often had disturbances moving from east working on the area in the Pacific which corresponds to the to west within the stream in the form of traveling isallobaric Caribbean in the Atlantic have always been plagued by a lack waves. FIGURES V-2 and V-3 illustrate conditions during pas- of data, but it is probable that similar disturbances move from sage of one of these waves, according to the analysis of the In- the Carolines across the Celebes Sea, and during certain seasons stitute of Tropical Meteorology at San Juan, Puerto Rico. may even enter the Asiatic continent. In the Caribbean, one or During any season except the height of the southwest monsoon, two waves are expected to pass a station each week, but they are the Celebes Sea area can be flooded with a deep easterly flow, probably less frequent in the Celebes Sea region. Convergence is found to the rear of the wave and divergence to the front. Large cumulonimbi and squall lines are usually found in the zone of most active convergence, while well ahead of the wave, the moist layer is very shallow and fine weather usually prevails. These waves vary, not only in intensity, but also in becoming stronger or weaker. Deepening often occurs when such a wave becomes a part of the circulation at the intertropic front. (c) Tropical cyclones. The tropical cyclones of the South- ern Hemisphere remain far to the south of the Celebes Sea area, coming closest during the month of April. In this area, such a storm could do no more than influence, very indirectly, the sta- bility of the air and the direction of stream flow. On the other hand, a considerable proportion of the tropical cyclones of the North Pacific pass over the Philippines and have a bearing on the weather in the Celebes Sea. The storms which are significant in the weather of this area originate either just east of the northern Philippines or in the vicinity of the Caroline Islands. Most typhoons originate on the intertropic front at a time when the degree of convergence is unusually great, particularly when the southwest monsoon is ac- tively surging. Some typhoons develop from deepening of pres- sure waves in the easterlies. This latter type of typhoon, although much less frequent than the intertropic front type, is more likely 40° to affect the Celebes Sea region. It is most frequent in winter. There is tremendous variation in the morphology, trajectory, FIGURE V 2. Model of a Wave in the Easterlies: and rate of movement of tropical cyclones. However, a cyclone Streamlines at 15,000 feet. of hurricane intensity usually moves westward from its point of origin, at an average speed of about 12 m.p.h. It may recurve to 11,000 the northward anywhere along its trajectory, or may continue westward into the Asiatic continent. Cirrus clouds are usually encountered 500 miles from the storm center, cyclonic wind circulation at 300 to 400 miles, low fractocumulus cloud with $0,000 intermittent squalls and showers at 200 or more miles, with heavy nimbostratus and continuous torrential rain at 100 to 150 miles from the center. Wind speeds of over 25 m.p.h. may be 15,000 expected at 150 to 200 miles from the storm center, and of over 75 m.p.h. at 35 miles from the center. In the center of the storm there is an area, averaging about 8 miles in diameter, with 10,000 clearing sky and light winds or absolute calm. Except in very rare cases, typhoon centers pass too far north to cause hurricane winds in the Celebes Sea area. Typhoons or 1,000 n depressions which enter Luzon or pass to the north of the Philip- pines do not directly affect this area except that the southwest wind flow is strengthened, with increased low cloud and air o 24 hours 12 24 56 mass weather. Heavy rains may occur in Mindanao, particularly 300mies ISO 0 ISO 500 450 on the eastern side, with the approach of a typhoon whose cir- FIGURE V 3. culation extends far enough south to produce strong northeast Model of a Wave in the Easterlies: Vertical Cross- Section along Line A-B of Figure V-2 winds. If the center of the storm passes through or south of Page y 10 CLIMATE AND WEATHER the central Philippines, increased rainfall may be expected over curacies at isolated stations may greatly influence the analysis. the entire Celebes Sea area during the passage of the storm. The diurnal variation of pressure is often more than 4 mb., which is greater than the ordinary synoptic variations of the (2) Aids in forecasting disturbances. region. The amplitude of the diurnal pressure curve varies with (a) Cloud sequences. Prefrontal cloud sequences, which the amount of insolation. These facts unite to make the custom- the forecaster of middle latitudes, finds so dependable, are of ary three-hourly tendencies almost useless. A solution for this very limited value in this area. The cloud sequence associated difficulty is to compute 24-hour pressure changes, either for with a typhoon (TOPIC 52, B, (1) (c)) has some prognostic each synoptic time, or, as Deppermann suggests, for the morn- value. However, cirriform clouds are nearly always present to ing observation, when insolation is least important. These values some extent and are not as trustworthy indicators of storm ac- assist both in analysis and in the critical evaluation of the sur- tivity as in middle latitudes. The presence of altostratus or alto- face pressure report. An isobaric interval of 1 to 2-mb. is usually cumulus clouds is often symptomatic of frontal or convergent necessary. activity. During the presence of easterly waves in the trades or In forecasting disturbances in the easterly flow, the analyst the formation of depressions on the intertropic front, several should be alert to 24-hour pressure changes of more than 2 mb. layers of very thick altocumulus may develop over a wide area. in the islands to the east of the Philippines, as well as to heavy Altostratus occurring below 10,000 feet, instead of at the usual rainfall associated with veering winds. In forecasting typhoon level of 12,000 to 14,000 feet, is often a sign of a nearby front. development, a 24-hour pressure decrease at Guam or Yap in (b) Streamline analysis. A useful method for discovering excess of 3 to 4 mb. should be watched carefully, especially if areas of convergence and divergence is streamline analysis, as it is associated with a cyclonic wind shift indicating a low to the illustrated in FIGURE V-4. Lines are drawn parallel to the wind west or northwest. flow at the desired level, and closeness of spacing of streamlines (d) "Canned" maps. Changes in the streamflow pattern is roughly proportional to the force of the wind. Such lines dis- and incursions of new or less modified air masses into this region appear in a region of convergence and reappear in a region of can often be anticipated days in advance, if the forecaster is divergence. Experienced forecasters have found such charts, informed of developments in the higher latitudes on both sides drawn regularly and for several levels, to be almost indispensable of the Equator. As the forecaster often has neither the time nor in forecasting new developments and in evaluating weather over the facilities to plot and analyze the necessary areas, it is to his regions where only flight reports and scattered pilot balloon ob- advantage to utilize the weather analyses available from those servations are available. regions in order to prognosticate the movement of formations, (c) Pressure changes. Zones of convergence usually lie in or their influences, into the area in question. pressure troughs or lows. However, lows are difficult to spot on ordinary synoptic charts of this area. The pressure fields are very C. Effects of topography. flat, except in the case of tropical cyclones. Barometers have often gone for long periods unchecked, and even small inac- A basic requirement for successful forecasting in this area is a thorough knowledge of the climatology of the individual sta- tions within the forecast area. To a great extent, topography con- trols distribution of convective phenomena within the major air streams. Topography modifies the movements and morphology of fronts of all types. It is also important in land- and sea-breeze effects, which often produce local circulations that completely mask the effects of large scale synoptic changes. These effects are exceedingly complex. Slight contrasts in DIVERGENCE slope or exposure may produce quite different weather at nearby stations under identical synoptic situations. For this reason, fore- casting requires intensive knowledge of local peculiarities. Ac- quaintance with local topographic effects is essential even in forecasting for patrol areas over the sea, since orographic effects may extend far out to sea. D. Synoptic situations. GONVERGENCE Various synoptic types which may be expected over the Cele- bes Sea region are presented below. The situations are based in part upon the daily classifications used by Deppermann, in part upon a study of daily precipitation at Surigao and Zamboanga over a period of several years as related to the synoptic situation in the Northern Hemisphere. (No charts were available for the corresponding period in the Southern Hemisphere.) As the 2 stations are of roughly opposite rainfall regimes, their precipita- tion is believed to be indicative of the relative distribution of weather between orographically exposed and protected places. FIGURE V - 4. (1) Type I-Pure trade air flow (November to April.) Example of Use of Streamlines in Synoptic Analysis. This type is particularly common during the spring months, CLIMATE AND WEATHER Page V 11 when the cold flow of norther air from Siberia weakens, and a deep flow of trade air invades the Celebes Sea from the east. However, it may occur any time during the fall and winter when a new front, moving off the Asiatic continent, limits the southern HIGH extent of the cold air, if the air south of this front is true trade air. NPI To FIGURE V - 6. Type II Synoptic Pattern: Strong Polar Ourbreak (Oct. to Mar.) convergent activity at the front. In heavy rain, visibility may be temporarily reduced below contact limits for short intervals. Near and north of the front, the cloud forms are altocumulus or altostratus and stratocumulus, with some cirrus from the over- FIGURE V-5. running trade air. Cumulonimbus formations may build up over Type I Synoptic Pattern: Pure Trade Air Flow (Nov. to Apr.) the hills. Temperatures behind the front may drop to around 75° F., and the decrease in humidity is sometimes marked. The weather associated with this situation is generally fair, As the front moves farther southward and eastward, the with rainfall of the afternoon shower type falling mainly on weacher improves; and the norther air, taking longer and longer windward coasts and slopes. Aside from these rainshowers, SCAC- tered clouds and good visibilities prevail. As a general rule, the trips over the Pacific, turns to a more easterly direction, and at- tains trade characteristics. On rare occasions, the trade flow may greater the tendency of the air to recurve northward, the finer the strengthen, and the front may return over the area as a warm weather. front with drizzle type precipitation. The NPc-Tm front, surging or stationary, may be anywhere from Japan to the northern Philippines. Its position or activity (3) Type III-Frontogenesis off the South China Coast will not materially affect the weather in the Celebes Sea area as (October-March.) long as a deep, undisturbed trade flow occupies the area. During If the strong norther flow of Types I and II continues, the November, December, and April the intertropic front may be dissimilar trajectories within the polar air mass tend to induce near the Equator, bringing greatly increased cloudiness and frontogenesis near the latitude of Formosa. The formation of a more frequent and violent rainshowers to the southern portions. new front here reduces the southerly penetration of the old Also, the Type I synoptic pattern may often be conplicated by a front to the south, often causing it to become stationary. As the Type VI "easterly disturbance." air flow to the north of the front is increasingly modified, the (2) Type II-Strong polar outbreak. front may be reduced to a mere wind shear line and finally When a strong outbreak of cold NPc air from the Asiatic disappear. continent occurs, it may reach the Philippine Islands a few days This type is important in the southern Philippines only in that after it leaves the latitude of Japan. In the case of very strong the rapid development of the northern front must be anticipated pushes, this strong flow may penetrate south of the Equator even in order to forecast its effect upon the front to the south. This as far east as the Caroline Islands. produces improving weather in the Philippines, as the northern As the front surges southward, the weather is generally fair, front usually deepens and moves eastward, going into a Type I with scattered cumulus ahead of the front with its passage, how- situation. ever, cloudiness increases to broken or overcast, and very heavy Deppermann mentions that a veering of the wind at Basco rains may fall in regions which are exposed to the strong north- from NE to SE or S gives advance warning of such a develop- east flow. Even protected stations may get showers from the ment. Page V 12 CLIMATE AND WEATHER become weaker and disappear as the cell moves farther eastward and warms up from subsidence. The weather encountered may be anywhere from the fair weather of Type I to the strong frontal weather of Type II, ac- cording to the strength of the successive outbreaks. (5) Type V-Intertropic front in Celebes Sea Area (Spring and Fall.) During the transition months between the monsoons, the in- tertropic front is frequently found lying east-west between the hipe - with Equator and the Philippines. It may vary from an inactive "doldrum" situation with a rather large area of calm to a narrow definite zone of convergence, which may be stationary a or surging in either direction. WITH TALESTORY The doldrum situation is typified by variable cloudiness and afternoon thunderstorms over land masses. The weather is op- pressively humid, with very little wind to bring relief. Rainfall is localized and, although it may be very heavy, is chiefly of the TM shower type. When the air flow on either or both sides of the front strengthens, convergence increases at the front and may occupy a zone 50-100 miles across of thick altostratus, associated with violent cumulonimbus clouds along the front and over moun- tain areas. At these times, violent turbulence may be experienced in clouds which penetrate the icing level of 14,000 to 16,000 feet. FIGURE V - 7. Type III Synoptic Pattern: Frontogenesis off South China Coast (Oct. to Mar.) (4) Type IV-Sequence of polar outbreaks (October- March.) This type produces a sequence very similar to alternating LOW Type I and Type II situations. A high cell breaks off the Siberian cell and moves eastward, both preceded and followed by an out- break of polar air. Here, as in Type III, the southern front may HIGH NPs LOW HIGH 2 HIGH Ex - FIGURE V.9. Type V Synoptic Pattern: Intertropic Front in Celebes Sea area Ta (Spring and Fall) (6) Type VI-Trough or wave in the easterlies (Fall, Winter, Spring.) Situations which have a deep flow of easterlies in the Philip- pines normally bring fair weather, but may be complicated by the passage from east to west of isallobaric waves which may FIGURE V.8. show up on the surface isobaric pattern as a slight trough or a Type IV Synoptic Pattern: Sequence of Polar Outbreaks (Oct. to Mar.) closed low, according to the amplitude of the wave. CLIMATE AND WEATHER Page V 13 LOW (ROUGH FIGURE V 10. FIGURE V 11. Type VI Synoptic Pattern: Trough or Wave in Easterlies Type VII Synoptic Pattern: Intertropic Front West of Philippines (Fall, Winter, and Spring) (Apt. to Sept.) (8) Type VIII-Intertropic front over or north of the The circulation in such a trough produces convergence on the Philippines (May-Oct.) eastern side behind the trough, and divergence ahead of the Although the illustration represents a situation at the height trough to the west. Thus, several hundred miles ahead of the of the southwest monsoon penetration, it is intended to include trough the weather may be unusually fine, deteriorating with other cases when the SW air dominates the Celebes Sea area. As the approach of the trough, and heavy rains with intense con- the southwest monsoon is not a steady flow, but comes in surges, vective activity are frequently experienced during the day fol- lowing its passage. Lines of cumulonimbi oriented with the wind may be found in the area of maximum convergence, with low nimbostratus ceilings and limited visibilities associated with the heavy rain. NPs A careful check should be kept on the stations in the Mar- shalls and Carolines for abnormal 24-hour pressure changes and for heavy rains which cannot be associated with frontal activity. Unusually heavy rains at Palau are an indication of bad weather in the southern Philippines 24-48 hours later. (7) Type VII-Intertropic front west of Philippines (April-September.) During the summer, the Celebes Sea is a battleground be- tween the southwest and the northeast air flows. Near the Equator, the flow from the Southern Hemisphere in the longi- tude of the Celebes Sea may be a continuation of the southeast trades. Thus, as long as the intertropic front lies south and west of the Philippines, mild weather will be experienced except in the vicinity of the front itself. Near the front, the weather is generally broken to overcast middle cloud, with showers from swelling cumulus and cumu- lonimbus clouds in the afternoon over land areas, and in the early morning over the ocean and coastal regions. This type is most frequent in the early summer and fall, but may occur in midsummer when the southwest flow is cut off, FIGURE V 12. permitting the trades to push westward. Type VIII Synoptic Pattern: Intertropic Front Over or North of Philippines (May to Oct.) Page V. 14 CLIMATE AND WEATHER the summer situation varies berween Type VII and Type VIII, trade stream, which crosses the Equator east of 120-125°, may with occasional tropical storms to complicate the situation. contain little cloud and a characteristic haze in the lower levels. Because of the potency of southwest monsoon air, rainfall is It can be readily distinguished from southwest air by its lower more frequent and cloudiness greater than in other air masses. relative humidities as well as the lack of cloud. Any slight convergence will produce squally weather. Wide- spread areas of rain are usually associated with the presence of the intertropic front. Sometimes during August, a week or so of fine weather OC- 53. Climatic Summary curs in the Philippines when the intertropic front is far to the A. Precipitation. north. Deppermann ascribes this to the intrusion of a westerly flow of dry continental air into this area. Precipitation data for the Celebes Sea area and locations of During exceptionally dry years in Australia, the southeast meteorological stations are shown on Figures V. 13 to V. 17. TABLE V . 1 MAXIMUM DAILY RAINFALL Maximum recorded 24-hour rainfall, in inches. Ys STATION JAM Fax Man Are Mar Juw Jes Avo Sap Ocr Nov Dac YEAR Rsc HALMAHERA Akelamo - - - - - - - - - - 5 10 Boeli-serani - - - - - - - - - - 6 10 Djailolo - - - - - - - - - 7 16 Ganedidalem - - - - - - - - 8 10 Inggelang - - - - - - - - - - 7 6 Kaoe - - - - - - - - - 5 7 Laboeha - - - - - - - - - 9 42 Loloda - - - - - - - - - - 8 10 Ternate - - - - - - - - - 10 50 Tobelo - - - - - - - - - 4 21 Wajaboela - - - - - - 5 10 Weda - - - - - - - - - 6 10 SANGIHE-TALAUD Beo - - - - - - - - - 8 12 Liroeng - - - - - - - - 9 31 Tahoena - - - - I - - - 14 33 MINDANAO Butuan 6 6 4 3 3 2 3 3 5 5 19 13 19 16 Cagayan 2. 1 2 1 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 5 5 16 Caraga 5 6 5 3 5 2 4 2 2 5 3 7 7 5 Cotabato 2 3 2 2 4 5 3 3 3 4 4 3 5 16 Dapitan 4 5 2 8 4. 5 3 3 2 6 5 5 8 16 Davao 3 3 5 4 4 4 3 4 5 5 3 6 6 16 Surigao 7 8 9 3 5 3 3 3 3 5 9 12 12 16 Zamboanga 5 3 1 1 2 2 2 2 5 5 3 6 6 16 SULU ARCHIPELAGO Jolo 6 9 2 3 9 3 5 4 5 4 5 3 9 16 NORTHEAST BORNEO Antjaloeng - - - - - - - - - - 7 6 Bloege - - - - 8 24 Jesselton 4 3 2 4 5 6 4 12 6 7 6 6 12 13 Laham - - - 6 14 Lg. Nawan - — - - - - - - - 6 11 Malinau - - - - - - - 7 6 Sandakan 15 8 7 5 6 5 4 4 5 6 5 13 15 28 Sangkoelirang 8 6 Tg. Redeb - - - - - - - - - - - - 6 16 Tg. Selor - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 35 Tarakan - - - - - - - - - - - - 9 18 NORTHERN CELEBES Boeol - - - - - - - - - - 6 11 Bojong - I - - - - - - - - - - 11 35 Bolaängoeki - - - - - - - - - - - 9 7 Gorontalo - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 47 Kampoengbaroe - - - - - - - - - - - - 10 47 Koeandang - - - - - - - - 9 47 Manado 10 6 7 4 6 5 8 8 4 3 6 8 10 41 Modajag - - 5 15 Molobagoe - - - - - - - - - - - 10 12 Paleleh - - - - - - - - - - 11 27 Soedimampir - - - - - - - - - - 4 10 Talise - - I - - - - - - - - 8 14 Tilamoeta - - - - - I - - - 4 13 Tinombo - I - - - - - 7 12 Tomohon - - - - - - - - 6 30 *Blank columns indicate that data are lacking. FIGURE y 15 JANIS NO. 155 Locations in Meteorological Stations and Ocean Areas Used in Tables OCEAN AREA OFF WESTERN TALACORDS MINDANAO BOW - I - STROCEN BOTTL MINDA NAO OCEAN AREA COLORY BOARDA OFF - EASTERN - sua OCEAN AREA - MMON MINDANAO OFF NORTHEASTERN BORNEO PLEASE LICENSELTON - - 4 REAUTOR'S d KENINGAL TERMIN BLAND DATE MUNDUM BORN EO MORNS SHOPM OCEAN AREA OCEAN AREA OFF OFF OCEAN AREA EASTERN NORTHERN OFF : BORNEO CELEBES & HALMAHERA - ? $ LOLDON @TOMILE I #TOMOHÓW HALMAHERA NACE ISSUONS КАМРОСНОВАНОЙ ROCARDANG Bux CELEBES - BTRONGO TILANGETH SIGNTALE FIGURE V-13. Locations of Meteorological Sescions And Ocean Areas Used in Tables. FIGURE y 14 - ANIS NO. 155 Mean Rainfall. Values in inches LEGEND YEARS REDORD YEAR DEC JAN FEB DEC - PER MAR APR MAY MAR-MAY AM - AUS JUN-AUS SEP OCT NOV SEP - WOV N D A N AO B o R N E C E L E B E S HALMAHERA and FIGURE V 14. Mess Rainfall FIGURE V-14 JANIS NO. 155 Mean Rainfall. Values in inches LEGEND YEARS RECORD YEAR DEC JAN FEB DEC - FEB MAR APR il MAR-MAY -- JVL AUG JUN AUG SEP OCT NOV SEP NOW MINDANAO B o R Z E B C ENL E B E S HALMAHERA 100 o FACTIRE V-H y Mean Rainfall FIGURE V-15 JANIS NO. 155 Maximum Rainfall. Values in inches LEGEND YEARS RECORD HEAR DEC JAN FEB DEC FEB MAR APR in MAR - WAY JUN JUL AUG JUN AUG SEP OCT NOV ID NOV / BORNEO HALMAHERA C E L E B E S 0 0 FIGURE V 15 Maximum Rainfall FIGURE y 16 JANIS NO. ISS Minimum Rainfall. Values in inches LEGEND ! ------------------------- YEARS RECORD FEAR LEC JAN FEB DEC FEB FL --- - war --- was - - AUG on AUG SEP EST $ SEP NOV M I Z D A / A o - VERGELA BLOTES COLDRIF# - - I NUM - : ! 9 B R N E o HALMAHERA E B C E E S V 16. Minimum Rainfall FIGURE V-17 JANIS NO 155 Rainy Days Mean number of days with over. 004 inch of rainfall in Mindango and Sulu Archipelogo, over 04 inch of rainfall in Borneo, Celebes, Halmahera LEGEND YEARS RECORD YEAR DEC JAN FCB DEC FEB MAR APR MAY --- MAY -- - aus JUN AUG SEP oct I SEP NOV M 1 Z D A N A o B R z E CELEBES HALMAHERA 0 Figure V 17 Rainy Days FIGURE y 19 JANIS NO. 155 / Mean Daily Maximum Temperature Values in degrees Fahrenheit LEGEND "1 1485 RECORD MG JAN FEB DEL FEB MAN AFR i --- - JUN IVL RUS JUN AUG SEP OCT à SEP NOV M I N D A N A e B o R N E 0 HALMAHERA E B L E S E e FIGURE y IN Mean Daly Maumum Temperature FIGURE V-19 JANIS NO 195 Mean Daily Minimum Temperature Values in degrees Fahrenheit LEGEND YEARS RECORD YEAR SEC AN FEB DEC YES was --- MAY MAS MAT - - AUG JUN AUG SEP OCT NOV SEP NOV M I N D A N A - & B o R z E B HALMAHERA 1. E E, E S C y 19 Mean Daily Minimum Temperature FIGURE y 20 LANIS NO. 155 1 Extreme Maximum Temperature Values in degrees Fahrenheit LEGEND YEARS RECORD HAM sec - FEB DEC FEB MAIN SPR MAY was ⑉ AR an AUG - AUG SEP DIET NOV LEF NOV M I Z D A N A B o R N E o HALMAHERA E L. E B E S C CF FIGURE V 20 Extreme Maximum Temperature FIGURE y 21 1. - 29 JANIS NO. 155 Extreme Minimum Temperature Values in degrees Fahrenheit LEGEND YEARS RECORD TEAM ML JAN FEB DEL FEB MAN APR MAY NAR MAY - - - JUN 400 SEP DET NOV MP NOV M I N D A Z A el BORNEO & HALMAHERA C E L E B E S o 4 / home V - 21 V Excesse Minimum Temperature CLIMATE AND WEATHER Page V - 15 TABLE V - 2 WET SPELLS Mean number of incurrences of wer spells of specified durations The duration of a wer spell is determined by the number of consecutive days with over 001 inch of rainfall. Yes IND Dan DURATION JAN Fee Mas Are Mo JUN Jue Ave Sar Oct Nov Da You Rx MINDANAO Davao I to 2 4.2 3.9 4.4 4.7 4.9 5.0 4.6 5.3 48 4.8 4.4 4.9 55.7 20 3 to 6 0.9 0.6 0.8 0.9 1.7 1.3 1.1 0.7 1.0 1.4 10 0.8 12.4 20 Over 6 0.1 01 0.0 0.0 0.2 03 0.1 0.0 01 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.9 20 Surigao 1 to 2 0.9 12 1.6 1.7 3.0 4.1 3.8 3.3 3.3 2.8 1.7 1.2 28.4 20 3106 0.8 1.7 1.7 1.3 1.0 1.4 2.1 1.7 16 2.0 1.7 0.8 17.4 20 Over 6 14 1.4 1.1 11 0.7 0.4 0.2 0.3 0.4 10 12 1.5 10.4 20 B. Temperature. C. Humidity. Temperature data at various stations in the Celebes Sea area Humidity data for various stations in the Celebes Sea area are shown below, in FIGURES V. 18 to V. 21. are shown below in Tables V-3,V-4, and V.S. TABLE V-3 MEAN RELATIVE HUMIDITY Mean relative humidity at the hours specified (L.C.T.). Yx: STATION AND Hous JAN Fax MAR Are Mar JUN Jes. Avo Sex Oct Nov Das YEAR Rec MINDANAO Cotabato 0600 93 93 93 94 95 95 95 96 95 96 95 94 94 5 1400 66 65 64 64 67 69 70 68 68 70 70 67 67 5 Davao 0600 95 95 95 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 5 1400 70 70 67 64 69 71 71 71 70 69 71 72 70 5 Surigao | - - I - 1 - I - 1 - - 0200, 0600, - | 1 I - I - - - - - - - I - 1000, 1400, 1800, 2200 88 86 86 86 84 84 80 78 81 84 87 88 84 34 Zamboanga 0600 89 89 88 ss 89 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 8 1400 75 74 74 77 78 77 78 77 77 79 78 74 76 8 - I - - - - - - I - | - - 0200, 0600, I 1000, 1400, 1 I | - I I - - I - I - - - 1800, 2200 83 83 82 84 85 85 86 84 86 86 86 84 84 15 SULU ARCHIPELAGO Jolo 0600 92 93 94 94 94 93 92 92 92 94 94 93 93 8 1400 78 78 77 77 77 76 74 72 74 77 78 77 76 8 NORTHEAST BORNEO Sandakan 1 I I - - I - I - - - - 0600, 0900, - - 1400, 2000 (7) 82 81 79 77 78 79 78 78 78 79 81 82 79 24 Tarakan 0600 96 96 98 96 95 96 96 97 96 96 96 96 96 6 1400 76 74 75 74 75 73 72 R 70 71 74 75 73 6 2000 94 94 95 94 93 94 94 94 93 94 94 94 94 6 Bihourly 89 88 90 89 ss 88 88 88 87 88 89 89 89 6 NORTHERN CELEBES Manado 0600 97 96 96 96 96 94 89 88 29 93 96 97 94 7 1400 82 79 77 80 79 75 68 65 66 71 78 81 75 7 2000 95 92 92 93 92 89 82 79 81 85 93 94 89 7 Bibourly 91 89 88 89 88 85 79 76 78 81 88 90 85 7 Page V. 16 CLIMATE AND WEATHER tial TABLE V - 4 MEAN DAILY MAXIMUM AND MINIMUM RELATIVE HUMIDITY You STATION JAN Fax MAR Are MAY JUN JUL Auo Sap Oct Nov Dac YEAR Rac NORTHEAST BORNEO Tarakan Maximum 98 98 99 97 97 97 97 98 97 97 97 98 97 6 Minimum 69 67 69 69 69 68 69 64 64 65 68 69 68 6 NORTHERN CELEBES Manado Maximum 98 97 97 97 97 96 91 91 91 94 97 98 95 7 Minimum 75 72 71 72 71 68 62 58 59 62 69 74 68 7 TABLE V - 5 EXTREME MAXIMUM AND MINIMUM RELATIVE HUMIDITY You STATION JAN Fax MAR Are MAY JUN JUL Avo Ser Ocr Nov Dac Year Rac NORTHEAST BORNEO Tarakan Maximum 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 6 Minimum 47 42 51 52 45 47 50 47 38 44 44 45 38 6 NORTHERN CELEBES Manado Minimum 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 7 Minimum 54 43 51 46 47 45 43 37 33 34 48 48 33 7 D. Surface Wind. Surface wind data at various stations in the Celebes Sea area are shown below, in Tables V. 6 to V - 9. TABLE V - 6 FREQUENCY OF SURFACE WIND DIRECTIONS Mean percentage frequency of surface winds from specified directions at specified hours (L.C.T.). STATION, HOURS DIRECTION Yes JAN For MAR APR MAY JUN JUL Aug Sap Oct Nov Dec YEAR Rac MINDANAO Cotabato-0600, 1400 N 1 0 1 1 . o o 1 - I o 1 1 NE 5 2 3 3 3 1 1 1 2 I 1 2 I 2 E 5 16 16 13 5 12 14 12 13 13 14 8 12 12 SE 5 5 4 6 7 5 3 3 5 5 7 5 9 S. 5 5 3 o 1 1 1 1 o o | I 1 3 SW 1 5 3 1 2 5 7 5 7 6 5 5 7 W 5 5 5 15 15 14 23 23 20 24 24 28 26 25 26 NW 22 5 6 7 11 8 7 12 12 13 12 11 8 4 Calm 9 5 49 54 49 47 44 44 41 36 36 35 44 39 43 5 Davao-0600, 1400 N 72 of 60 50 43 42 36 38 36 41 NE 50 63 49 8 11 13 14 13 8 3 1 2 1 5 7 E 9 7 8 6 11 12 13 9 6 3 2 1 2 10 6 SE 7 8 2 1 2 4 6 4 9 7 8 8 6 S. 3 5 8 5 9 9 16 28 35 37 39 39 34 17 12 SW 23 8 I - - - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 - W 1 8 | - - 1 - 1 2 1 2 1 1 - NW 1 8 4 5 3 3 5 8 11 10 12 8 8 Calm (<1 m.p.h.) 7 7 8 o - - o o o 0 0 0 o o o - 8 *Surigao-0200, 0600, 1000, 1400, 1800, 2200 N. 11 11 6 6 6 4 2 2 2 NE 4 5 7 6 16 32 29 31 22 14 8 3 3 E. 3 7 16 24 16 16 14 16 20 20 15 11 4 3 3 6 SE 9 15 11 16 3 3 5 6 $ 5 1 1 2 S. 3 3 4 3 16 2 2 3 3 6 8 9 10 8 SW 6 6 3 6 16 2 2 2 3 6 12 26 36 W 30 19 11 4 13 16 1 2 1 2 4 6 13 12 NW 12 9 4 2 6 16 6 4 3 3 4 5 5 4 Calm 5 5 8 6 29 5 16 31 29 35 40 41 37 29 35 41 38 35 34 16 CLIMATE AND WEATHER Page V. - 17 TABLE V-6 (cont.) FREQUENCY OF SURFACE WIND DIRECTIONS Mean percentage frequency of surface winds from specified directions at specified hours (L.C.T.). OCRAN AREA, Hous, DIRECTION JAN Fax MAR Are MAY JUN Jus Auo Sap Oct Nov Dac Year Zamboanga-0200, 0600, 1000, 1400, 1800, 2200 N 15 14 15 16 20 18 NE 18 18 16 14 16 17 16 10 14 9 10 7 E 9 9 8 6 6 10 9 12 9 10 7 6 4 3 4 SE 3 4 4 4 2 4 9 4 10 8 10 12 10 11 11 S 9 11 9 8 7 8 9 10 3 4 1 2 2 2 2 SW 2 2 5 3 3 3 10 13 14 14 14 16 16 21 w 18 18 18 15 13 16 10 18 16 16 19 16 18 18 21 NW 20 18 18 14 18 10 4 4 5 7 7 8 7 7 6 Calm 6 4 3 6 10 18 23 23 22 15 15 13 13 19 19 26 21 19 10 *Data apparently derived from observations of 16 directions, by adding NNE to N., ENE. to NE, etc. SULU ARCHIPELAGO Jolo-0600, 1400 N 24 22 17 10 7 5 5 4 6 8 15 19 12 10 NE 26 25 24 12 4 4 2 3 2 3 6 18 11 10 E. 4 2 3 3 2 3 1 2 4 4 2 2 2 10 SE 6 5 5 6 6 8 5 6 8 10 9 9 7 10 S 9 9 9 14 24 22 38 39 31 24 17 12 21 10 SW 1 2 2 4 9 13 13 9 6 10 9 3 7 10 W 5 4 7 9 12 13 10 11 15 17 16 10 11 10 NW 4 3 3 4 3 4 3 3 2 2 4 6 3 10 Calm 21 28 30 38 33 28 23 23 26 22 22 21 26 10 NORTHEAST BORNEO Sandakan-0600, 0900, 1400, 2000 (7) N. 21 12 12 13 3 2 2 2 4 7 9 13 8 4 NE 20 18 19 20 10 7 6 6 4 8 9 14 12 4 E 5 5 5 3 6 5 3 5 2 3 3 4 4 4 SE 1 4 2 5 13 13 13 9 7 6 3 4 7 4 S 3 5 5 7 12 15 20 16 19 14 7 5 11 4 SW 6 5 8 12 25 25 27 25 24 16 12 10 16 4 W 5 3 4 6 11 9 7 10 11 7 11 9 8 4 NW 14 9 7 8 4 4 2 3 2 4 9 8 6 4 Calm 25 39 38 26 16 20 20 24 27 35 37 33 28 4 OFF HALMAHERA-2000 N 35 28 28 30 o 3 o o o 3 8 29 14 NE 28 30 42 19 14 8 3 2 3 12 o 13 14 E. 4 3 6 8 20 13 8 0 o 3 4 4 6 SE 0 3 o 11 14 29 21 27 0 18 6 2 11 S. 4 3 6 0 12 18 45 40 31 22 10 4 16 SW o o 4 4 11 16 8 24 36 18 24 6 13 W 2 11 0 11 6 6 11 7 14 9 30 11 10 NW 13 22 6 15 8 5 3 o 8 3 8 27 10 Calm (<1m.p.h.) 12 3 6 4 17 3 3 o 8 9 12 2 6 No. of obs. 44 38 48 27 42 39 40 47 38 36 50 49 498 OFF EASTERN MINDANAO-2000 N 27 13 28 17 3 4 6 4 o 5 10 19 11 NE 69 75 54 43 13 17 6 4 6 7 34 29 30 E 4 3 3 13 17 23 6 4 3 4 3 10 8 SE o 0 3 0 17 13 15 8 13 12 0 0 7 S. 0 3 3 4 20 25 22 38 29 18 10 6 15 SW o 0 3 4 3 6 34 27 22 27 24 6 13 w o o o 0 13 2 0 4 10 2 13 10 4 NW o 6 6 9 3 4 0 4 6 12 o 12 5 Calm (<1 m.p.h.) o o 0 9 10 4 9 8 10 10 3 6 6 No. of obs 26 31 33 23 34 49 35 27 36 42 32 32 400 OFF WESTERN MINDANAO-2000 N 30 29 17 17 9 8 8 3 6 14 22 24 16 NE 33 22 29 23 4 5 2 4 8 10 25 22 16 E. 8 10 4 13 7 8 8 4 7 9 4 9 8 SE 6 9 7 6 11 14 8 9 7 9 3 10 8 S. 8 5 2 6 15 20 22 23 15 11 7 4 12 SW o 4 7 13 18 16 26 32 18 16 9 7 14 W 4 4 12 9 14 14 16 10 15 10 7 8 10 NW 6 11 7 8 10 4 6 6 8 12 10 10 8 Calm (<1 m.p.h.) 6 6 13 8 16 12 6 9 18 10 11 7 10 No. of obs 55 106 99 108 132 107 107 110 133 108 94 128 1287 Page V. 18 CLIMATE AND WEATHER tial TABLE V. 6 (cont.) FREQUENCY OF SURFACE WIND DIRECTIONS Mean percentage frequency of surface winds from specified directions at specified hours (LCT.).). OCEAN AREA, Hous, DIRECTION JAM Fas Man Are MAY Jun JuL Ave Sap Ocr Nov Dec Year OFF NORTHERN BORNEO-2000 N 21 30 22 17 6 4 3 3 11 10 15 19 13 NE 65 59 59 29 12 14 7 4 6 15 31 52 29 E. 4 4 9 12 14 14 o 8 3 11 3 3 7 SE 4 1 1 10 8 16 12 5 3 7 o 2 6 S. o 1 o 2 12 18 16 24 8 12 11 7 9 SW 1 1 2 12 21 18 44 38 35 22 10 5 17 W o 3 3 9 12 10 8 8 27 13 6 4 9 NW 3 o 1 0 2 2. o 5 8 5 16 5 4 Calm (<1 m.p.h.) 1 o 1 7 15 6 9 5 0 4 7 3 5 No. of obs 74 88 71 44 51 53 68 60 40 79 91 59 778 OFF NORTHEASTERN BORNEO-2000 N. 18 32 12 20 o 6 3 4 4 18 21 24 14 NE 9 23 40 24 18 6 6 4 0 16 17 24 16 E. 4 10 4 8 14 28 3 4 4 6 4 4 8 SE 13 14 4 8 5 24 10 12 15 2 5 4 10 S. 4 o 8 16 14 12 48 39 23 6 21 4 16 SW 4 9 8 8 18 6 18 31 41 22. 5 8 15 w 30 0 4 0 5 6 3 o 4 12 5 8 6 NW 8 9 12 4 0 o o 4 4 6 10 24 7 Calm (<1 m.p.h.) 9 5 8 12 27 9 10 4 7 14 14 0 10 No. of obs 25 23 28 33 26 32 42 26 28 51 47 27 388 OFF NORTHERN CELEBES-2000 N 24 14 11 6 4 6 10 9 5 13 6 8 10 NE 28 39 53 29 18 4 2 3 13 4 8 22 19 E. 4 4 9 29 15 6 8 15 5 12 3 11 10 SE 4 o 3 6 15 12 16 21 11 10 o 4 8 S. 0 2 o 2 17 25 18 21 17 4 3 o 9 SW 4 12 6 13 12 19 22 15 24 16 11 22 W 15 16 2 6 2 4 12 6 9 8 21 33 11 11 NW 12 17 8 9 6 4 6 6 12 14 29 14 11 Calm (<1 m.p.h.) 8 7 6 3 9 10 12 3 6 8 10 7 7 No. of obs 29 42 41 61 49 50 51 36 65 59 40 49 572 TABLE V-7 PREVAILING SURFACE WIND DIRECTION Most frequent surface wind direction at specified hours (L.C.T.). STATION AND Hours JAM Yes Fax MAR Are MAY Jun Jet Avo Sex Oct Nov Dac Year Rec SANGIHE-TALAUD Tahoena - N N N N SW. S SW S S S NW N - - MINDANAO Cotabato 0600, 1400 E E W W W W W W W W W Davao W W 5 0600, 1400 N N N N N N S S S N N Surigao N N 8 0200, 0600, 1000, 1400, 1800, 2200 NE NE NE NE NE SW SW SW SW SW NE NE NE 16 Zamboanga 0200, 0600, 1000, 1400, 1800, 2200 W W W W N W SW W W W W N W 10 SULU ARCHIPELAGO Jolo 0600, 1400 NE NE NE S S S S S S S S N S 10 NORTHEAST BORNEO Sandakan 0600, 0900, 1400, 2000 (?) N NE NE NE SW SW SW SW Tarakan SW SW SW NE SW 4 N N N N NW W S S S S W NW - - CLIMATE AND WEATHER Page V. 19 TABLE V. 7 PREVAILING SURFACE WIND DIRECTION Most frequent surface wind direction at specified hours (LCT.). STATION AND House Yes JAN Fax Mas Are MAY Juw Jus. Ave Ser Oct Nov Dec Year Rsc NORTHERN CELEBES Gorontalo - - N NW N NE $ $ S S S S N N - - Manado 0800 SE S E E E E E SE E E E SW - 2 1400 W w NW W NW W W W W NW w w - 2 2100 S SE E E E E E E SE E E SE - 2 Talise 0600 NW N N NE S S SE SE S S W w - 7 1200 NW N N N S S SE S S $ W W - 7 Toegoean 0600 NE NE NE E SE S S S SE SE SE SE - 7 1200 N N N W SW SW SW SW SW SW W SW - 7 1800 N NE NE NE S S S S SW SW S SW - 7 2400 NE NE NE E SE SE S S SE SE E SE - 7 Tomohon 0600 NW NW NW NW SE SE S S SE SE W NW - 13 1200 NW NW NW NW W SE S S $ S W NW - 13 1800 NW NW NW NW SW SE S S SE S W NW - 13 No OCRAM AREA AND Hous JAM Fax Mas Are Mar Jun Jus Ave Ser Oct Nov Dac Your One OFF HALMAHERA 2000 N NE NE N E SE S S SW S W N S 498 OFF EASTERN MINDANAO 2000 NE NE NE NE S S SW $ S SW NE NE NE 400 OFF WESTERN MINDANAO 2000 NE N NE NE SW S SW SW SW SW NE N N 1287 OFF NORTHERN BORNEO 2000 NE NE NE NE SW SW SW SW SW SW NE NE NE 778 OFF NORTHEASTERN BORNEO 2000 W N NE NE NE E S S SW SW N NE S 388 OFF NORTHERN CELEBES 2000 NE NE NE NE NE S SW S SW W W NE NE 572 TABLE V-8 FREQUENCY OF SURFACE WIND SPEEDS Mean percentage frequency of surface winds of specified speed (m.p.h.) at specified hours (L.C.T.). Yes STATION, House, Seeso JAN Fan Mar Are MAY Jun JuL Avo Sex Oct Nov Dac YEAR Rac MINDANAO Davao-0600, 1400 <1 o - - o o o o o o o o 0 - 8 1-7 74 76 81 85 92 93 92 91 89 88 90 76 86 8 8-18 25 23 18 15 8 7 8 9 11 12 9 23 14 8 19-31 1 1 1 o 0 0 o - 0 o 1 1 - 8 >31 o 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o o 0 8 Surigao-0600, 1400 <1 31 33 31 33 42 36 35 55 35 46 35 34 37 7 1-7 54 53 52 57 51 53 48 28 53 46 53 52 50 7 8-18 14 13 16 10 7 10 15 15 11 8 9 13 12 7 19-31 1 1 1 - - 1 2 2 1 - 3 - 1 7 >31 o o 0 o o 0 - o o o - 1 - 7 Page V. 20 CLIMATE AND WEATHER TABLE V 9 MEAN SURFACE WIND SPEED Mean surface wind speed (m.p.h.) at specified hours (L.C.T.). You STATION AND Hous JAN Fax Mas Are MAY Jun Jus Ave Sex Oct Nov Dac Year Rx: SANGIHE-TALAUD Tahoena - - 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 9 6 6 6 6 6 MINDANAO Cotabato 0600, 1400 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 5 Davao 0600, 1400 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2. 2 2 2 2 5 - Surigao 0200, 0600, 1000, - - I - - - - - I - - - - 1400, 1800, 2200 (7) 7 7 6 5 4 4 6 6 6 5 5 5 5 7 Zamboanga 0200, 0600, 1000, - - I I - - - - - - - I - : 1400, 1800, 2200 (?) 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 5 4 5 5 SULU ARCHIPELAGO Jolo 0600, 1400 7 6 6 5 6 6 8 7 7 7 7 7 6 5 NORTHEAST BORNEO Sandakan - - 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 4 5 6 - Tarakan - I 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 5 3 5 6 - NORTHERN CELEBES Gorontalo - - 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 - Manado 0800 6 7 5 5 5 5 5 6 5 6 6 8 - 2 1400 12 13 11 11 8 8 10 10 10 10 10 13 - 2 2100 7 6 4 4 4 5 6 6 6 5 4 6 - 2 OFF HALMAHERA 2000 7 8 7 8 7 6 8 14 10 8 7 8 8 498 OFF EASTERN MINDANAO 2000 9 12 11 10 7 6 8 10 9 7 8 10 9 400 OFF WESTERN MINDANAO 2000 7 7 6 6 5 6 7 8 7 7 7 9 7 1287 OFF NORTHERN BORNEO 2000 12 12 9 7 6 7 9 10 9 8 7 10 9 778 OFF NORTHEASTERN BORNEO 2000 6 7 7 6 5 6 8 8 10 6 6 8 7 388 OFF NORTHERN CELEBES 2000 8 7 9 7 6 7 5 & 7 6 7 7 7 572 E. Sea and swell. Data on sea and swell are presented in Chapter III. F. Upper winds. Upper wind data for the Celebes Sea area are shown on FIGURES V - 22 to V - 25. UPPER WINDS - DECEMBER, JANUARY, FEBRUARY Avent Avenue N # - 4d # MEAN PERCENTAGE FREQUENCY OF UPPER WINDS I of OF SPECIFIED DIRECTIONS AND SPEEDS AT VARIOUS ELEVATIONS - - a-m - FIGURES BELOW THE ROSES INDICATE THE NUMBER OF OBSERVATIONS o - LABUAN TARAKAN BALIKPAPAN BANDJERMASIN CAVITE LADANG MANADO MAKASSAR NAMLEA HEIGHT (FT) ABOVE M.S.L. 16, 400 FT o O INSUFFICIENT INSUFFICIENT INSUFFICIENT OBSERVATIONS OBSERVATIONS OBSERVATIONS 40 60 as 44 . 153 13,100 FT o INSUFFICIENT INSUFFICIENT OBSERVATIONS OBSERVATIONS IDS o " - 83 it 175 9,800 FT 39 H3 129 in 138 HO 130 29 TO 6,600 FT * . 107 144 245 309 203 - 147 71 0 3,300 FT - x no ⑉ 56 ISS 353 488 If 165 304 75 1,600 FT . W ess so ⑉ - 399 497 304 - 380 78 FIGURE V 22. Upper Winds: December, January, February. UPPER WINDS - MARCH, APRIL. MAY - Parametage Pressure feels - @ # - - MEAN PERCENTAGE FREQUENCY OF UPPER WINDS of Issues OF SPECIFIED DIRECTIONS AND SPEEDS AT date - VARIOUS ELEVATIONS --- o FIGURES BELOW THE ROSES INDICATE THE NUMBER - OF OBSERVATIONS LABUAN TARAKAN BALIKPAPAN BANDJERMASIN CAVITE LAOANG MANADO MAKASSAR NAMLEA HEIGHT, (FT) ABOVE M.S.L. 16,400 FT o o INSUFFICIENT INSUFFICIENT OBSERVATIONS OBSERVATIONS 80 # 3 134 123 HE 254 13,100 FT O D D INSUFFICIENT INSUFFICIENT OBSERVATIONS OBSERVATIONS OF 84 E 14 IN ISS 33 9,800 FT o DO W 0 45 39 IDS aso 376 4d 184 369 se 6,600 FT so ITO 124 302 449 480 201 406 13 o 3,300 FT * I IDS 204 134 40 493 553 ==> 443 73 o 1,600 FT 120 - 142 465 496 ses === 447 75 FIGURE V 23. Upper Winds: March, April, May UPPER WINDS - - JUNE, JULY, AUGUST I - - If # # # - MEAN PERCENTAGE FREQUENCY OF UPPER WINDS - of time OF SPECIFIED DIRECTIONS AND SPEEDS AT VARIOUS ELEVATIONS - : - FIGURES BELOW THE ROSES INDICATE THE NUMBER OF OBSERVATIONS LABUAN TARAKAN BALIKPAPAN BANDJERMASIN CAVITE LADANG MANADO MAKASSAR NAMLEA HEIGHT (FT) ABOVE MAL 16, 6,400 FT o o INSUFFIGIENT INSUFFICIENT OBSERVATIONS OBSERVATIONS = 44 - = ⑉ E ETS 9 13,100 FT O o INSUFFICIENT INSUFFICIENT DESERVATIONS DESERVATIONS - 67 ⑉ de 344 : ⑉ 9,800 FT 0 H ⑉ - ENT ⑉ 453 ⑉ 400 87 6,600 FT o - INS et see 340 - are 455 IT 3,300 FT * che SET - ⑉ ⑉ are 309 470 = 1,600 FT 2 0 - 114 E - 403 ⑉ are 473 " FIGURE V 24. Upper Winds: June, July, August. UPPER WINDS - SEPTEMBER. OCTOBER, NOVEMBER - - MEAN PERCENTAGE FREQUENCY OF UPPER WINDS - - - OF SPECIFIED DIRECTIONS AND SPEEDS AT VARIOUS ELEVATIONS - of FIGURES BELOW THE ROSES INDICATE THE NUMBER OF OBSERVATIONS - 2 - LABUAN TARAKAN BALIKPAPAN BANDJERMASIN CAVITE LACANG MANADO MAKASSAR MAMLEA HEIGHT (FT) ABOVE MEL 0 16,400 FT o o INSUFFICIENT INSUFFICIENT INSUFFICIENT OBSERVATIONS DESERVATORS OBSERVATIONS 1 of 44 104 de see 13,100 FT o o INSUFFICIENT INSUFFICENT DESERVATIONS OBSERVATIONS - 87 INT or est TO 348 9,800 FT IDS ⑉ - BI in ass DOB 424 es 6,600 FT - 147 - HO 400 ⑉ 48 ⑉ 456 90 3,300 FT . o 179 360 94 see 364 488 - ⑉ a 1,600 FT - - 124 558 378 487 - 462 " 0 FIGURE V 25. Upper Winds: September, October, November. CLIMATE AND WEATHER Page V. 21 G. Cloud. Cloud data at various stations in the Celebes Sea area are shown below, in Tables V. 10, V. 11 and V. 12. TABLE V. 10 CLOUDINESS Mean percentage of sky covered by cloud, regardless of height, at specified hours (L.C.T.). Yes STATION AND Hous JAM Fax Mas Are MAT JUM JuL Ave Sex Oct Nov Dec YEAR Rec MINDANAO Cotabato 0600 64 61 52 55 65 72 78 77 75 66 67 64 66 5 1400 67 68 61 57 65 69 73 69 67 67 67 68 66 5 Davao 0600 60 50 50 60 59 63 62 60 60 60 62 65 59 5 1400 67 53 53 62 62 65 66 65 65 63 66 69 63 5 Surigao 0200, 0600, 1000, - - - - - - - - - I - - - - 1400, 1800, 2200 (7) 74 70 65 60 59 62 71 66 69 68 70 76 68 34 Zamboanga 0600 74 71 66 67 74 76 76 79 80 77 74 74 74 8 1400 69 67 63 67 74 72 74 72 76 74 73 70 71 8 0200, 0600, 1000, 1400, 1800, 2200 66 63 61 62 70 75 79 76 77 75 72 67 70 15 SULU ARCHIPELAGO Jolo 0600 79 79 73 70 71 72 75 76 73 75 74 79 75 8 1400 76 74 71 70 74 75 76 75 78 79 77 76 75 8 NORTHEAST BORNEO Sandakan 0600, 0900, 1400, I - - - - I - - I - - - - - 2000 (7) 75 72 75 68 65 69 73 65 75 76 78 78 71 4 NORTHERN CELEBES Tomohon 0600 76 80 68 54 50 59 59 53 49 49 58 67 60 13 1200 85 85 83 80 78 77 73 65 72 78 77 82 78 13 1800 82 79 76 68 68 66 66 60 60 64 72 77 70 13 OFF HALMAHERA 2000 44 44 43 37 43 58 55 55 47 42 48 45 47 498 OFF EASTERN MINDANAO 2000 44 48 50 49 52 56 51 53 49 50 43 51 50 400 OFF WESTERN MINDANAO 2000 39 40 40 44 54 52 68 64 58 63 54 48 52 1287 OFF NORTHERN BORNEO 2000 53 47 38 35 37 49 57 50 42 55 56 52 48 778 OFF NORTHEASTERN BORNEO 2000 60 49 41 47 40 42 54 43 48 42 49 54 47 388 OFF NORTHERN CELEBES 2000 46 50 41 40 47 47 45 46 52 47 49 52 47 572 TABLE V - 11 CLEAR DAYS Mean number of days with mean cloudiness (percentage of sky covered by cloud, regardless of height) less than 15 per cent. Yes STATION JAM Fax MAR Are MAY JUN Jus Ave Sap Oct Nov Dec YEAR Rac . MINDANAO Davao o o o o o o o o 0 o 0 0 0 11 Surigao o o % N 5 o o o o o o o 5 9 SULU ARCHIPELAGO Jolo o o o o o o 5 o o 0 0 s 5 10 Page V. 22 CLIMATE AND WEATHER TABLE V. 12 CLOUDY DAYS Mean number of days with mean cloudiness (percentage of sky covered by cloud, regardless of height) more than 75 per cent. Yas STATION JAN Fax Mas Are May Juse JUL Avo Sap Oct Nov Dac Year Rec MINDANAO Davao 26 22 23 20 22 21 25 23 21 22 21 23 270 11 Surigao 22 16 16 11 12 13 19 16 15 20 20 24 204 9 SULU ARCHIPELAGO Jolo 16 13 12 9 10 17 18 16 15 16 15 13 170 10 NORTHEAST BORNEO Sandakan 15 12 16 9 7 11 14 8 14 15 16 16 153 4 H. Turbulence and Thunderstorms. Data on thunderstorms are shown below, in TABLES V. 13 and V. 14. TABLE V - 13 DAYS WITH THUNDERSTORMS Mean number of days with thunderstorms at any time of day. Yes STATION JAN Fis Mas Are MAY JUN JeL Avo Sap Oct Nov Dec YEAR Rec MINDANAO Cotabato 9 5 7 12 15 6 8 8 8 12 6 9 104 5 Davao 2 3 2 7 12 5 6 5 7 9 5 3 66 5 Surigao 0 1 1 2 4 4 4 3 6 7 5 1 37 6 Zamboanga 2 4 4 7 9 6 3 5 4 5 3 3 56 5 SULU ARCHIPELAGO Jolo 3 3 3 7 12 6 3 4 5 5 1 3 54 5 NORTHEAST BORNEO Sandakan 1 1 1 1 2 3 3 3 6 5 4 2 31 5 NORTHERN CELEBES Manado 1 2 2 4 4 4 2 2 4 6 6 1 38 6 TABLE V. 14 FREQUENCY OF THUNDERSTORMS Mean percentage frequency of thunderstorms at 2000 L.C.T. OCEAN AREA JAN Fn MAR No Are MAY Jun JuL Ave Sup Oct Nov Dec Your Rec OFF HALMAHERA 14 8 10 11 26 10 8 6 8 8 20 6 11 498 OFF EASTERN MINDANAO 4 6 o 4 6 6 23 4 8 12 o 0 6 400 OFF WESTERN MINDANAO 5 7 5 25 19 13 9 11 11 19 9 2 11 1287 OFF NORTHERN BORNEO 4 1 o 5 6 o 1 7 0 1 2 2 2 778 OFF NORTHEASTERN BORNEO 4 9 14 9 8 3 2 4 7 6 4 0 6 388 OFF NORTHERN CELEBES o 5 5 3 16 8 6 o 8 7 10 6 6 572 I. Icing. No data are available on icing conditions in this area. Discus- sion is presented in TOPIC 51, B, 2, (2) of this chapter. J. Visibility, Fog, Haze, Dust, Smoke. Data on fog and visibility are shown below, in TABLE: V 15 + and V - 16. CLIMATE AND WEATHER Page V 23 TABLE V. 15 DAYS WITH FOG Mean number of days with fog at any time of day. STATION Yes Jam Fax MAR Are Mar Jun JuL Aue San Oct Nov Da: Year Rec MINDANAO Davao . 1 o 1. 1 1 5 # o o 0 1 6 5 Surigao 5 2 4 3 2. 5 o o # 1 # 1 13 5 NORTHEAST BORNEO Sandakan # o o o o o o o 0 o o 5 1 4 TABLE V - 16 VISIBILITY AT SANDAKAN Mean number of days with visibility less than specified limits at specified hours (L.C.T.) at Sandakan, Northeast Borneo. (4 years record) LIMIT AND Hous JAM For MAR Are Mar June Jue Avo See Oct Nov Dec Year ½ mile 0600 5 0 o o o o o o o o o 5 # 0900 0 o o o o o o o o o 0 0 0 1400 o o o o o o o o o o o . $ 2½ miles 0600 3 1 1 o o o o o o o 1 2 7 0900 1 1 5 # o o o o o o 5 s 3 1400 1 1 1 o o 5 o o o o o 5 3 6 miles 0600 6 3 2 1 o 0 . o o 1 2. 4 19 0900 3 1 1 5 o o o o o # 1 2 9 1400 3 1 1 o # 5 - o o o , 1 6 12 miles 0600 22 23 23 8 1 - 1 . 2. 1 2 11 95 0900 7 4 4 2 1 5 o o 1 5 2 4 25 1400 7 3 3 0 5 1 1 o s o 1 3 19 - 5 Less than 1 day K. Local names for weather elements. See TABLE V - 17, below. TABLE V - 17 LOCAL NAMES FOR WEATHER ELEMENTS NAME REGION MEANING Baguio Philippines Tropical cyclone Barat Celebes West wind Broebroe Celebes Dry nocturnal land breeze Colla Philippines Strong squally SW winds Dongi Celebes North wind Habagad Philippines Strong squally SW winds Slatan Celebes S or SE wind Tandongkasa Celebes S wind Timoer Celebes S wind Tongara Celebes Nocrurnal land breeze Typhoon China, etc. Tropical cyclone 54. Principal Sources 4. Boerama, J. c. 1930. TYPEN VAN DEN REGENVAL IN NEDERLANDSCH-IN- DIE Koninklijk Magnetisch en Meteorologisch Observatorium 1. Allen, P. W. and Bryson, R. A. te Batavia. Verhandelingen, No. 18. 103 pp. illus, Batavia. 1944. TROPICAL MICROANALYSIS. University of Chicago, Insti- 5. Boerama, J. tute of Tropical Meteorology. Lecrure Notes (mimeographed). 1931. REGENVAL IN NEDERLANDSCH-INDIE Koninklijk Mag- Rio Piedras, Puerto Rico. necisch en Meteorologisch Observatorium te Batavia. Verhan- 2. Allied Geographical Section, Southwest Pacific Area. delingen, No. 24. 244 PP- map. Batavia. 1943. AREA STUDY OF NORTHERN MOLUKKAS. Terrain Study No. 6. Braak, C. 71. Brisbane. (Confidential) 1929. HET KLIMAAT VAN NEDERLANDSCH-INDIE BUTTENGE- 3. Bellamy, J. C and Schacht, E.J. WESTERN BEHALVE SUMATRA. Koninklijk Magnetisch en Me- 1944. BASIC PRINCIPLES OF TROPICAL ANALYSIS AND FORE- teorologisch Observatorium te Batavia. Verhandelingen, No. 8. CASTING. University of Chicago, Institute of Tropical Meteor- Weltevreden. ology. Lecture Notes (mimeographed). Rio Piedras, Puerto 7. Brank, C. Rico. 1931. KLIMAKUNDE VON HINTERINDIEN UND INSULINDE Köp- Page V 24 CLIMATE AND WEATHER pen, w and Geiger, R., Handbuch der Klimarologie. Vol. 4, of India Meteorological Dept. Part R. 125 PP- illus. Berlin. 25. Knoll, D. W. 8. Brooks, C. E.P. 1941. CLIMATOLOGY ASIATIC STATION. United States Hydro- 1921. THE METHOROLOGY OF BRITISH NORTH BORNEO. Royal graphic Office Publication No. 219. 96 PP- illus. Washington. Meteorological Society, Quarterly Journal. 47. PP- 294-297, illus. 26. Riehl, H. and Bonnot, C. D. London. 1944. WAVES IN THE EASTERLIES. University of Chicago, Insti- 9, Buxton, E. B. et al. tute of Tropical Meterology. Lecture Notes (mimeographed), 1942. COLLECTED PAPERS PREPARED FOR PAN AMERICAN AIR- Rio Piedras, Puerto Rico. WAYS, INC. U.S. Army Air Forces, Directorate of Weather, 27. Royal Australian Air Force. Publications. Vol. 4, No. 4. 21 PP- illus. Washington. (Re- c. 1940. FORECASTING WEATHER IN THE AUSTRALIAN EQUA- stricted) TORIAL REGIONS. Parts I and II. 63 PP- 10. Coronas, Jose. 28. 1920. THE CLIMATE AND WEATHER OF THE PHILIPPINES, 1903 1941. REPORT ON GENERAL METHOROLOGICAL CONDITIONS TO 1918. Government of the Philippine Islands. Philippine OVER THE NETHERLANDS EAST INDIES AND NORTHERN AUS- Census, A. D. 1918. 195 PP. illus. Manila. TRALIAN WATERS. Mimeographed. (Restricted) 11. Day, J. A. 29. c. 1942. SYNOPTIC ANALYSIS IN THE TROPICAL PACIFIC. Pan 1942. TABLES OF METHOROLOGICAL DATA-NETHERLANDS American Airways publication. Also as U. S. Navy reprint. 26 EAST INDIES. Mimeographed. 4 PP- (Restricted) PP- illus. 30. 12. Deppermann, C. E. 1942. WEATHER ON THE AUSTRALIA STATION. LOCAL INFORMA- 1934. THE UPPER AIR AT MANILA. Commonwealth of the Phil- TION. R. A. A. F. Publication No. 252. Vol 2. Melbourne. ippines, Weather Bureau. Publications of the Manila Observa- (Restricted) tory. Vol. 2, No. 5. 29 PP- illus. Manila. 31. Selga, Miguel. 13. 1935. OBSERVATIONS OF RAINFALL IN THE PHILIPPINES. Pub- 1935. THE MEAN TRANSPORT OF AIR IN THE INDIAN OCEAN lication of Commonwealth of the Philippines, Dept. of Agri- AND SOUTH PACIFIC OCEANS. Commonwealth of the Philip- culture and Commerce, Weather Bureau. 407 PP- illus. Also pines, Weather Bureau. Publications of the Manila Observatory. Supplement No. 1 to same publication. 1938. 96 PP- 50 PP- illus. Manila. 32. United States Army Air Forces. 14. 1943. SOIL TRAFFICABILITY IN MILITARY OPERATIONS Direc- 1936. OUTLINES OF PHILIPPINE FRONTOLOGY. Commonwealth torate of Weather, Publication No. 347. 8 PP- illus. Washington. of the Philippines, Weather Bureau. Publications of the Manila (Restricted) Observatory. 27 PP-, illus. Manila. 33. United States Army Air Forces. 15. Manuscript data on file with Weather Division, Washington. 1937. THE WEATHER AND CLOUDS OF MANILA. Commonwealth 34. United States Army, Military Intelligence Service. of the Philippines, Weather Buresu. Publications of the Ma- 1943. SURVEY OF BRITISH NORTH BORNEO, BRUNEI, AND SA- nila Observatory. 87 PP- illus. Manila. 16. RAWAK. $30-676. Washington. (Confidential) 35. 1938. TYPHOONS ORIGINATING IN THE CHINA SEA. Common- 1943. SURVEY OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. S30-603. 3 vols., illus. wealth of the Philippines, Weather Bureau. Publications of the Washington. (Confidential) Manila Observatory. 51 pp- illus. Manila. 17. 36. United States Navy Department, Hydrographic Office. 1936. SAILING DIRECTIONS FOR NEW GUINEA. H O Publication 1939. SOME CHARACTERISTICS OF PHILIPPINE TYPHOONS. Com- monwealth of the Philippines, Weather Buresu. Publications of No. 164. PP- 582-594 Washington. 37. the Manila Observatory. 143 PP, illus. Manila. 18. 1924-44. PILOT CHARTS OF THE NORTH PACIFIC, SOUTH PA- 1939. TYPHOONS AND DEPRESSIONS ORIGINATING TO THE NEAR CIFIC, AND INDIAN OCEANS Washington. EAST OF THE PHILIPPINES. Commonwealth of the Philippines, 38. United States Navy Department, Division of Naval Intelligence. Weather Bureau. Publications of the Manila Observatory. 44 1942-43. THE PHILIPPINES. o N 193. Pares I and II. Washington. PP- ilus. Manila, (Restricted) 19. 39. United States Department of Commerce, Weather Bureau, Ma- 1940. UPPER AIR CIRCULATION OVER THE PHILIPPINES AND AD- rine Division. JACENT REGIONS. Commonwealth of the Philippines, Weather 1937. CLIMATIC FEATURES OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLAND REGION. Bureau. Publications of the Manila Observatory. 85 PP- illus. 82 PP-, illus. Washington. (Restricted) Manila. 40. United States Department of Commerce, Weather Bureau, Sta- 20. Dunn, G. E. tistics Division. 1944. BRIEF SURVEY OF TROPICAL ATLANTIC STORMS. Univer- 1943. CLIMATE AND WEATHER OF SOUTHEASTERN ASIA, PART sity of Chicago, Institute of Tropical Meteorology. Lecture IL FARTHER INDIA AND THE NETHERLANDS EAST INDIES. U.S. Notes (mimeographed). Rio Piedras, Puerto Rico. Army Air Forces, Weather Information Branch Publications. 21. Gilman, C.S. and Duncan, G. H. Vol. 5, No. 3. 141 PP- illus. Washington. (Restricted) 1944. THE POLAR FRONT IN THE TROPICA University of Chicago, 41. Institute of Tropical Meteorology. Lecture Notes (mimeo- Various years. DAILY SYNOPTIC SERIES, HISTORICAL WEATHER graphed). Rio Piedras, Puerto Rico. MAPS, NORTHERN HEMISPHERE SEA LEVEL Washington. (Re- 22. Great Britain, Meteorological Office. stricted) 1938. WEATHER IN THE CHINA SEAS AND IN THE WESTERN 42. PART OF THE NORTH PACIFIC OCEAN. 3 vois, illus. London. Manuscript data. Washington. (Restricted) 43. Van der Stok, J. P. 23. 1897. WIND AND WEATHER, CURRENTS, TIDES AND TIDAL 1942. MONTHLY METEOROLOGICAL CHARTS OF THE WESTERN STREAMS IN THE EAST INDIAN ARCHIPELAGO. 208 PP- charts. PACIFIC OCEAN. MO Memoir No. 422. 130 PP- illus. London. Batavia. Also as U.S. Navy reprint. (Restricted) 44. Visser. S. W. 24. Grimes, A. 1936. MITBOROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS. Wetenschappelijke Uit- c. 1942. FORECASTING IN THE EQUATORIAL ZONE Publication komsten der Snellius Expeditie. Vol. 3, 111 PP- illus. Leiden. JANIS 155 Non-registered CHAPTER VI JAPAN CHINA MIDWAY IS. HAWAIIAN IS. HONOLULU -WAKE- I MARIANAS , IS. JOHNSTON 1. PHILIPPINE FRENCH-INDO IS. GUAM CHINA PALAU MARSHALL 515. CAROLINE ISLANDS GILBERT IS BORNEO CHRISTMAS I. CELERES NEW GUINEA JAVA SOLOMON 15. TIMOR AUSTRALIA JOINT ARMY-NAVY INTELLIGENCE STUDY OF CELEBES SEA AREA PORT FACILITIES DECLASSIFIED By Authority of MAY 1944 JCS letter, 7-25-75 By SR Date JUL 31 1975 DECLASSIFIED By Authority of JCS letter, 7-25-75 By SR JUL 31 1975 Date List of Effective Pages, Chapter VI CHANGE IN Suajact MATTER Erract PAGE NUMBERS Cover Page Original unnumbered List of Effective Pages and Table of Contents, Chapter VI (inside front cover) Original unnumbered Text and Figures Original PP- VI-1 to VI-24 Figure (insert, reverse blank) Original Figure VI-23 Text and Figures Original pp. VI-25 to VI-28 Figure (insert, reverse blank) Original Figure VI-29 Text and Figures Original PP. VI-29 to VI-30 Figure (insert, reverse blank) Original Figure VI-32 Text and Figures Original PP- VI-31 to VI-82 Figure (insert, reverse blank) Original Figure VI-107 Text and Figures Original pp. VI-83 to VI-106 Text (reverse blank) Original P- VI-107 Figure (insert, reverse blank) Original Figure VI-147 Table of contents, Chapter VI, continued (inside back cover) Original unnumbered Back cover (outside blank) Original unnumbered Table of Contents Note: This chapter is based on material available in Washington, D. C., on 25 April 1944. Page Page 60. GENERAL DESCRIPTION VI 1 B. Sangihe-Talaud Sector VI 47 61. MAJOR PORTS (1) Beo, Talaud Islands VI 1 VI 47 (2) Liroeng (Lirung), Talaud Islands VI 47 A. Halmahera Sector VI- 1 (3) Peta, Sangihe (Sangi) Island VI 48 (1) Ternate, Ternate Island VI 1 (4) Tahoena (Taroena), Sangihe Island VI 49 B. Mindanso Sector VI 5 (5) Tamako, Sangihe Island VI 49 (1) Surigao, Mindanao Island VI 5 (6) Dagho, Sangihe Island VI 49 (2) Cagayan, Mindanao Island VI 6 (7) Behongang, Kahakitang (Karakitang) Island VI 50 (3) Iligan, Mindanao Island VI 7 (8) Hoeloe (Ulu), Siaoe (Siau) Island VI 50 (4) Misamis, Mindanao Island VI 8 (9) Tahoelandang (Boehias), Tahoelandung Island VI 51 (5) Oroquieta, Mindanao Island VI 11 C. Mindanao Sector (6) Zamboanga, Mindanao Island VI 12 VI 51 (7) Cotabato, Mindanao Island (1) Mati, Mindanao Island VI 16 VI 51 (8) Davao, Mindanao Island (2) Tarragona, Mindanao Island VI 18 VI 52 (3) Holy-Cross, Mindanao Island VI 52 C. Sulu Archipelago VI 22 (4) Caraga, Mindanao Island VI 52 (1) Jolo, Jolo Island VI 22 (5) Baganga, Mindanso Island VI 52 D. Northeast Borneo VI 24 (6) Hinatuan, Mindanao Island VI 52 (1) Jesselton VI 24 (7) Port Lamon, Mindanao Island VI 53 (2) Sandakan VI 27 (8) Lianga, Mindanao Island VI 53 (3) Linkas (Tarakan), Tarakan Island VI 28 (9) Marihatag, Mindanso Island VI 54 E. Northern Celébes Sector (10) Tandag, Mindanao Island VI 54 VI 31 (11) Cantilan, Mindanao Island (1) Gorontalo, Celebes Island VI 55 VI 31 (12) Lakando (Lakandola), Masapelid Island VI 55 (2) Manado, Celebes Island VI 32 (13) Placer, Mindanao Island VI 56 62. MINOR PORTS VI 35 (14) Pilar, Siargao Island VI 56 (15) Numancia, Siarago Island VI 57 A. Halmahera Sector VI 35 (16) Dapa, Siargao Island VI 57 (1) Weda, Halmahera Island VI 35 (17) Dinagat, Dinagat Island VI 58 (2) Gamsoengi (Patani), Halmahera Island VI 35 (18) Butuan, Mindanao Island VI 58 (3) Inggelang, Inggelang Island VI 35 (19) Nasipit, Mindanao Island VI 59 (4) Boeli-Serani, Halmahera Island VI 36 (20) Odiongan, Mindanao Island VI 60 (5) Lolobata, Halmahera Island VI 37 (21) Gingoog, Mindanao Island VI 60 (6) Goeroea, Halmahera Island VI 37 (22) Talisayan, Mindanao Island VI 60 (7) Akeselaka (Ake Selaka), Halmahera Island VI 38 (23) Balinguan, Mindanao Island VI 62 (8) Bobaneigoe (Bobane Igoe), Halmahera Island VI 38 (24) Binone, Camiguin Island VI 64 (9) Kaoe, Halmahera Island VI 39 (25) Mambajao, Camiguin Island VI 64 (10) Miti Island VI 40 (26) Bugo, Mindanao Island VI 66 (11) Tobelo, Halmahera Island VI 40 (27) Kolambugan, Mindanao Island VI 66 (12) Galela, Halmahera Island VI 41 (28) Jimenez, Mindanao Island VI 66 (13) Sangowo, Morotai Island VI 41 (29) Plaridel, Mindanao Island VI 67 (14) Djiko (Wajaboela), Morotai Island VI 41 (30) Baliangao, Mindanao Island VI 67 (15) Djailolo, Halmahera Island VI 41 (31) Dapitan, Mindanao Island VI 70 (16) Mare, Mare Island VI 42 (32) Port Puluan, Mindanao Island VI 71 (17) Ngofakiaha, Makian Island VI 42 (33) Dipolog, Mindanao Island VI 71 (18) Batoela, Halmahera Island VI 43 (34) Sindangan, Mindanao Island VI 72 (19) Waisabatang (Sabatang), Batjan Island VI 43 (35) Port Santa Maria, Mindanao Island VI 72 (20) Laboeha, Batjan Island VI 44 (36) Caldera Bay, Mindanao Island VI 72 (21) Penamboean, Batjan Island VI 45 (37) Kabasalan, Mindanao Island VI 73 (22) Waja, Mandioli Island VI 46 (38) Lumarao, Mindanao Island VI 74 Chapter VI Page VI I PORT FACILITIES 60. General Description close to the reef. The roadstead is fairly well protected, but the holding ground is bad, the bank steep, and the tidal stream There were no ports in the Celebes Sea area which could be strong. In December, there is frequently a heavy swell. classified as "major" in the sense in which the word is used in There is both a diurnal and a semidiurnal tide, but the lat- Europe and North America. The highest estimated handling ter predominates. The spring highs and the spring lows of capacity for general cargo for any port was 450 short tons per the two tides may coincide. The bighest water level under such 8-hour day, although some specialized ports, such as those for conditions occurs in June and December. The maximum rise lumber and oil, would exceed that figure for their special prod- and fall that can be expected are, respectively, about 2.3 feet uct. The term "major ports," however, has been used here to above and 1.6 feet below mean sea level. classify those which, because of developed facilities or trade A strong current sets through the roadstead at times. High volume, stand out above the others. Fifteen ports fall in this water is accompanied by a current setting to the northward and category. low water by a current setting to the southward. The term "minor ports" has been used for all those coastal The climate is characterized by the absence of excessive heat towns or villages not listed as major ports, which had any cargo and by fresh sea breezes and moderate rainfall. The mean an- handling facilities at all or which were ports of call for merchant nual temperature is 80.7°. The average annual rainfall is 85 vessels. One hundred and thirteen localities are covered under inches. There is no well-defined wet season. this heading. The prevailing wind from November through March varies Both major ports and minor ports have been listed according from west and northwest to northeast. From April through Oc- to the following geographic divisions: tober winds from southeast to south-southwest prevail. Halmahera Sector - 1 major port, 22 minor ports. Troublesome rollers may be experienced in the roadstead Sangibe-Talaud Sector - no major ports, 9 minor ports. from December to April. Southerly winds cause a broken sea Mindanao Sector - 8 major ports, 57 minor ports. Sulu Archipelago - 1 major port, 9 minor ports. when the currents set to the southward. Northeast Borneo - 3 major ports, 9 minor ports. (b) Landing facilities. The waterfront of the town is Northern Celebes Sector - 2 major ports, 14 minor ports. bordered by a drying coral reef which attains its greatest width off Fort Oranje, about midway between the Residency Pier and 61. Major Ports the Sultan's Pier (Reference numbers 3 and 4, TABLE VI - 1 and FIGURE VI. 1). A. Halmahera Sector. The principal facilities are listed in TABLE VI 1 and are keyed to the port plan (FIGURE VI. 1). Hertog Hendrik Pier (1) Ternate, Ternate Island (0° 47' N, 127° 23' E). (Reference number 2), a T-head pier of open pile construction Ternate lies on the southeastern coast of Ternate Island, (FIGURES VI 2, VI 3, and VI 4), was the only commercial about 7 miles west of Dodinga Bay, on the western coast of pier in the port. A small pier served the Japanese fishing settle- Halmahera Island (FIGURE VI- 1). The island is approximate- ment near the southern end of the shore reef (Reference number ly circular, about 7 miles in diameter. The coast falls steeply to 1). There was a pier for small boats (Reference number 3) near the sea, almost entirely without any drying bank. About 1 mile the Residency but care was necessary to avoid rocks at low tide. to the south-southeast of Ternate Island, and separated from it The Sultan's Pier (Reference number 4), a private pier for by Gamme Lamo channel, lie Tidore and Maitara islands, and small craft, was located at the northern end of the waterfront. about 1 mile northward from the northern extremity of Ternate Island is the island of Hiri. Several other small piers and landings of no commercial im- The most important locality in the Northern Moluccas, it is portance were located in front of the town. the commercial center of and has the best port facilities in the The estimated volume of cargo which could be handled daily Halmahera group. at the vessel berth at Hertog Hendrik Pier (Reference number (a) Harbor. Ternate roads, the harbor of Ternate, is an 2) is based upon the handling of general cargo. An 8-hour day open roadstead with depths of 15 fathoms about 1/4 mile off- is assumed. shore, and 30 fathoms at about 800 yards. The southwestern At the root of Hertog Hendrik Pier were: a customs cargo approach, through Gamme Lamo channel, has a lease depch of shed, 225 feet by 40 feet, stone and tile construction; the Kon- 19 fathoms in the fairway. The approaches from the northward inklijke Paketvaart Maatschappij (K.P.M.) cargo shed, 100 and southward are deep and generally clear. feet by 60 feet, stone and shingle construction; and Chinese Fixed red and green lights were shown at the head of the storage sheds, 120 feet by 80 feet, wood and corrugated iron northern and southern piers, respectively. construction. In the area adjacent to and southward of the pier Before occupation by the enemy the best anchorage in the a number of structures, believed to be warehouses, have been roadstead was in a depth of 15 fathoms, about 350 yards off- built by the Japanese. Ample open storage space was available shore, with the Residency flagstaff bearing 298°, and the head about 200 yards from the pier and beyond. About 20 motor- of the southern pier 215° In a lesser depch a vessel would be too boats were based at Ternate. DECLASSIFIED By Authority of JCS 7-25-75 By SR Da JUL 31 1975 Page VI - 2 PORT FACILITIES 127* 23 di KAOE 4 BAY Palace HIRI I. NO d'as' 0'46' DODINGA BAY TERNATE ISLAND TERNATE CAMME MAITARA I, TIDORE 0'40' ISLAND d'40' HALMAHERA I. MARE P. Fort Oranje 0'30' 0°30 MOTI 1. VICINITY MAP a SCALE OF MILES o 10 Prepared by the Board of Engineers For Rivers and Marbors, Corps of Engineers TERNATE N TERNATE ROADS 3 Cool 0°47' Water Tank 0°47' Worehouses 1 RIDE 2 Oil Drum Storage D PORT FACILITIES AT Japanese Settlement TERNATE, TERNATE ISLAND SCALE OF FEET I 500 o 1,000 2,000 SOURCE: AERIAL PHOTOS C.F.L. No. 716. 743-747 APRIL 1944 FIGURE VI 1. Ternate. Sketch showing location of Ternate (inset) and port plan showing location of facilities. PORT FACILITIES Page VI - 3 TABLE VI 1 PIERS AND WHARVES AT TERNATE, TERNATE ISLAND Reference number on map (FIGURE VI-1) 1 2 NAME PIER HERTOG HENDRIK PIER Location on water front At Japanese settlement 1,600 yards south About 1,100 yards south of Fort Oranje of Fort Oranje Owned and Operated by No data No data Purpose for which used Landing for fishing boats Handling general cargo Type of construction No data; T-head pier, with 10-foot wide Metal screw piles, timber deck; T-head pier, with approach to pierhead approach about 18 feet wide Face South side North side Face South side North side Description (feet) (feet) (feet) (feet) (feet) (feet) Dimensions 40 20+15+60 20+15+60 198 40+90+300 40+90+300 Depth of water No data No data No data 13 Under 13 Under 13 Berthing space available 40 None None 198 40+90 40+90 Width of apron Open wharf Open wharf Deck above L.W.O.S.T. No data No data Capacity per square foot (lbs.) No data No data Lighted or unlighted No data Lighted Transit sheds None None Mechanical handling facilities None None Railway connections None 2 narrow-gauge tracks along approach; trackage on pierhead Water supply No data Fresh water is available Electric current No data Electric current believed available Estimated capacity of terminal, short tons per day Capacity 160 short tons per day Remarks - Depth of 33 feet at 66 feet off pierhead. Two buoys and 6 dolphins make berthing possible in depths from 13 to 33 feet, as convenient. Berthage 1,200- foot vessel with 12-foot draft Reference number ON map (FIGURE VI-1) 3 4 NAME RESIDENCY PIER SULTAN'S PIER Location on waterfront About 770 yards south of Fort Oranje About 775 yards north of Fort Oranje Owned and Operated by Netherlands East Indies Government Sultan of Ternate Purpose for which used Boat landing Landing for small craft Type of construction Timber open-pile Timber open-pile Face South side North side Face Soush side North side Description (feet) (Teet) (feet) (feet) (feet) (feet) Dimensions 10 250 250 40 40-15+800 40+15+600 Depth of water 2 2-0 2-0 Shallow - - Berthing space available 10 None None 40 None None Width of apron Open wharf 10 10 10 Deck above L.W.O.S.T. No data No data Capacity per square foot (lbs.) No data No data Lighted or unlighted No data No data Transit sheds t, None None Mechanical handling facilities None None Railway connections None None Water supply None No data Electric current No data No data Estimated capacity of terminal, short tons per day - - Remarks Pavilion on inner end of pier, 60 by 20 Pierhead lies at edge of shore reef. Circular pavilion, feet about 20-foot diameter, on pierhead. Page VI - 4 PORT FACILITIES (c) Clearance facilities. The narrow-gauge tracks on Her- nected to a pipe line on the pier had a capacity of 40 tons per tog Hendrik Pier ran inland about 700 feet to a coal storage day. shed and yard. Trucks had access from the 3 northernmost piers A storage depot for oil in drums and tins, located on the (Reference numbers 2, 3 and 4, TABLE VI - 1 and FIGURE VI - 1) to the island road system. shore about 200 yards southwest of Hertog Hendrik Pier, has Vessels of the K.P.M. called regularly at Ternate. probably been destroyed by the Dutch. The clearance capacity of the port is estimated to have been A coal shed was located about 700 feet inland from Hertog 160 short tons (2,000 pounds) of general cargo daily, handled Hendrick Pier. at vessel berths, assuming an 8-hour day. (e) Repair facilities. A small repair shop, owned by local (d) Availability of supplies. Drinking water was obtained Japanese fishermen, was the only facility for the repair of from a well near the Hertog Hendrik Pier. A motor pump con- vessels at Ternate. FIGURE VI 2. Ternate. Hertog Hendrik Pier (Reference No. 2, Table VI-1 and Figure VI-1), showing T-head, looking northwest. Before 1938. FIGURE VI - 3. Ternate. Hertog Hendrik Pier (Reference No. 2, Table VI-1 and Figure VI-1), showing type of construction and railway tracks on approach to T-head, looking west. PORT FACILITIES Page VI 5 HINATUAN PASSAGE SURIGAO Ber VICINITY MAP SCALE of MILES e I BILANBILAN N FIGURE VI 4. Ternate. Hertog Hendrik Pier (Reference No. 2, Table VI-1 and Figure VI-1), 2 showing steamer berthed alongside T-head, looking southeast. PORT SURIGAO , B. Mindanao Sector. (1) Surigao, Mindanao Island (9° 47' N, 125 30' E). Surigao is on the southwestern side of Hinatuan Passage near the northern tip of Mindanao Island (FIGURE VI - 5). It was a place of considerable importance, since most of the trade of PORT FACILITIES AT eastern Mindanao passed through it. There were no landing SURIGAO, MINDANAO 123°30'E facilities of commercial importance at Surigao itself. The port SCALE OF FEET 100 o soo 600 facilities and warehouses were at Bilanbilan, about 2/3 mile SOURCE CHART NO. 4629 southeast of Surigao, with which it was connected by a good - APRIL 1944 road. FIGURE VI 5. Surigao. Surigao River, discharging on the west side of the town, has Sketch showing location of Surigao (inset) and port plan about 1 foot of water on its bar at low water. Only small boats showing location of facilities. can enter. The ruins of an iron bridge near the mouth prevent large boats from entering. The mean annual temperature at Surigao is 80°, with a (a) Harbor. Bilanbilan Bay is open to the northward, with maximum of 90.8° and a minimum of 71.6°. The average an- depths of 10 to 15 fathoms. It is about 11/4 miles wide between nual rainfall is 142.49" and the mean relative humidity 84.4 Surigao lighthouse and a dangerous shoal to the east per cent. The prevailing winds from November through May A cove in the northwestern corner of Bilanbilan Bay forms are from northeast to east-southeast and from southwest to west- a natural harbor, open northeastward (FIGURE VI - 5). The northwest the remainder of the year. entrance to the harbor, about 400 yards wide, has depths of 6% (b) Landing facilities. The facilities at Bilanbilan (Port to 10 fathoms. It recedes 400 yards westerly where it is 5 fath- Surigao) are listed in TABLE VI 2 and are keyed into the port oms deep. There is a 41/4-fathom shoal in the middle and rocky plan (FIGURE VI . 5). obstructions off the southern side. The principal facility was the reinforced concrete wharf The port facilities were on Bilanbilan Point, the north side near the northeastern end of the waterfront (Reference num- of the entrance to the cove (FIGURE VI - 5). Depths along the ber 2, TABLE VI 2, and FIGURE VI 5). In 1937 an extension wharves were 7½ to 30 feet. Depths offshore increase rapidly. of 69 feet was under way at the southern end and another ex- A narrow channel, with a controlling depth of 9 feet, rounds tension of 98 feet on the northern end was proposed. Other pro- the southwestern end of the point. posed improvements included filling in the small basin behind A jetty northeast of the main wharf (Reference number 2, the southern end of the wharf and construction of warehouses TABLE VI 2 and FIGURE VI 5) projected 80 feet seaward on the open area between the wharf and the road. The present at right angles to the shore, It was awash at low water and status of this construction has not been determined. In June although marked by a small beacon, constituted a danger in ap- 1938, depths outside the protecting pile clusters ranged from proaching the main wharf. 13 feet at the northeastern end to 30 feet at low water A fixed red light, 22 feet above high water and visible 7 at the southwestern end. In December 1938, there was a depth miles, was exhibited from a concrete tower rising from the sea of 21 feet at the westerly end of the wharf with shoaling to on the edge of the shore reef off Bilanbilan Point. Vessels could eastward. The controlling depth of 13 feet alongside the face pass fairly close to the light as the water deepens rapidly out- of the wharf restricts berthage accommodation to one 200-foot side it. vessel of 12-foot draft. There is good anchorage about 1/4-mile eastward or south- There was a warehouse at the Ong Hing Lian wharf (Refer- eastward from the light in 14 to 16 fathoms over sandy bottom. ence number 3, TABLE VI 2, and FIGURE VI 5). Other ware- Small vessels might find shelter in 9 feet of water behind the houses were located at Bilanbilan. The main wharf was backed harbor point. by an open area of over 10,000 square feet, apparently suitable The tide at Surigao is chiefly diurnal. The mean higher high for open storage. water interval is 10 hours, 47 minutes with range of 3.4 feet. The Several tugs were based at Surigao and a few lighters were lowest tide is 1.5 feet below mean lower low water. available. Page VI 6 PORT FACILITIES TABLE VI 2 PIERS AND WHARVES AT SURIGAO REF. No. FACILITY ON MAP LOCATION DIMENSIONS DEPTH OF WATER REMARKS (Fig. VI-5) 1 T-head pier Seaward of jerry, NE of concrete No data 2' off head wharf (Ref. No. 2) 2 Main wharf Near NE end of waterfront, 325' long 13' NE end 30' SW Reinforced cuncrete close inside of jetty (face) end 291/2' wide. 3 Ong Hing Lian wharf SW of main wharf (Ref. No. 2) 85' long 71/2'-18" at these Wooden construction (face) landings 4 T-head pier SE of Ong Hing Lian wharf (Ref. No data No. 3) 5 Pier SE end of waterfront About 100' (c) Clearance facilities. There were 2 short roadways, each and Sulauan Point there are 5 small detached reefs, none of over 20 feet wide, connecting the concrete wharf with the prov- which is 1/2 mile from shore. The shore of Sulauan Point con- incial road which paralled the entire improved waterfront at sists of low coral cliffs alternating with sandy beaches. It is Bilanbilan and provided the only road connection with Surigao. fringed by a coral reef to a distance of less than ½ mile. Part of Regular weekly steamship service was maintained with Cebu the reef bares at low water. and Manila and small vessels operated from the port to points The middle of the bay is deep and clear. There are no known along the east coast of Mindanao and to nearby islands. detached dangers except Alutaya Reef, 3½ miles 240° from The clearance capacity of the port is estimated to have been Gorda Point. The center of the reef bares at low water. The 240 short tons (2,000 pounds) of general cargo daily, handled channel between the reef and the shore is about 2½ miles wide, at the berth at the concrete wharf, assuming an 8-hour day. with depths of over 100 fathoms. (d) Availability of supplies. Diesel oil was stored in bulk Vessels could find anchor in 8 to 30 fathoms with the wharf and piped to an unidentified point on the waterfront, probably bearing 328°. the main wharf. Supplies of food, gasoline, and lubricating oil A buoy moored in 3 fathoms, about 600 yards northward were available in moderate quantities. A fresh-water pipe con- from the lighthouse, marked the eastern edge of shoal water nection was available near the concrete wharf. northward of Macabalan Point. A fixed red light, 58 feet above (e) Repair facilities. There were no facilities for repair high water and visible 9 miles, was shown from a tower on the work other than a small machine shop. north side of Macabalan Point. The mean high water interval is 11 hours 27 minutes, with (2) Cagayan, Mindanao Island (8° 28' N, 124° 38' E). a diurnal range of tide of 4.2 feet and the mean range of tide Cagayan is on the Cagayan River about 2 miles from its is 2.7 feet. mouth (FIGURE VI 6). There were no landing facilities of (b) Landing facilities. The only facility at the port was a commercial importance at Cagayan itself. The landing place reinforced concrete wharf, about 380 feet long and 30 feet for the town was located about 600 yards southward from the wide, located about 600 yards south of Cagayan Light near the lighthouse on Macabalan Point (8° 30' N, 124° 39' E) near head of Macajalar Bay (FIGURE VI 6). Depths alongside the head of Macajalar Bay. A good road connected it with varied (1938) from 25 feet at the northern end to 16 feet at Cagayan about 1% miles southwestward. the southern end with 19 feet midway along the face of the The Cagayan River, which discharges into the head of Maca- wharf. In 1939, a least depth of 20 feet was reported alongside. jalar Bay, has 1½ fathoms on its bar at low water, but the depths The area between the wharf and shore had been reclaimed. The and direction of the channel across it are constantly changing wharf was lighted. Extensions to the wharf were proposed with the freshets of the rainy season. Shoal water extends about (1939), but the present status of these improvements is not % mile seaward from the river mouth. Small boats can enter known. Assuming a minimum depth of 20 feet, the wharf could the river at high water and proceed to the town above which provide berthing accommodations for one 350-foot vessel with the river is not navigable. a draft of 20 feet. (a) Harbor. The harbor is an open roadstead south of There were a cargo shed and a number of warehouses near Macabalan Point near the head of Macajalar Bay. The point is the wharf. low and sandy, with deep water on its eastern side, but shoal water extends nearly 1/2 mile from the northern side. (c) Clearance facilities. A good road connected the port Macajalar Bay is 16 miles wide at the entrance between with the town. A number of vessels called weekly from Cebu. Gorda and Sulauan Points and recedes about 12 miles south- The unloading capacity of the port is estimated to have been eastward. The shore of Gorda Point is clear and steep. The east- 300 short tons (2,000 pounds) of general cargo daily, handled ern shore of the bay is high and is formed by sandy beaches at the vessel berth, assuming an 8-hour day. separated by low rocky points. The head of the bay is fringed (d) Availability of supplies. Gasoline and lubricating oil by narrow coral reefs. The western shore is low and fringed by were stocked in tins in small quantities. Diesel oil was not al- steep coral reefs. A coral reef, partly bare at low water, extends ways available. The wharf was lighted. Fresh water was not M mile northward from Malugan Point and between this point available. PORT FACILITIES Page VI-7 MACAJALAR BAY Bugo Mocobolon Pt. if CAGAYAN 6 20 Macabalan Pt VICINITY MAP SCALE OF MILES o 2 3 mud II s sand rky. rocky 47 124 °40' E is 27 SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS N a 32 39 a 21 71 is 22 4 12 di ⑆ SE if 43 36 3 4: 20 40 37 23 32 21 26 - 25 PORT FACILITIES FOR at 8 I I 44 IS 22 CAGAYAN, MINDANAO - I I 6 A 29 SCALE OF FEET d 19 500 o 500 Prepared by the Board of Engineers for SOURGE CHART NO.4639 Rivers and Marbors, Corps of Engineers APRIL 1944 FIGURE VI 6. Cagayan. Sketch showing location of Cagayan (inset) and port plan showing location of facilities. (e) Repair facilities. There were several small machine A fixed red light, 37 feet above mean high water and visible shops at Cagayan, where minor repairs could be made. Welding 7 miles, was shown from a tower located at the shore end of the equipment was available, but no foundry work could be done. pier. (3) Iligan, Mindanao Island (8° 14' N, 124° 14' E). The tidal currents at ebb run northward across the pier and are exceptionally strong when the Iligan River is in flood. The Iligan is in the southeastern corner of Iligan Bay, on the north prevailing winds'are northeast to east-northeast. shore of the Iligan River, at its mouth (FIGURE VI 7). It is the port through which the commerce of the Lake Lanao dis- (b) Landing facilities. The only landing facility at Iligan trict of central Mindanao passed. The landing facilities were was a reinforced concrete pier, 272 feet long and 39 feet wide on the bay side of the town, north of the river entrance (FIG- (FIGURE VI 7). Depths alongside range from 36 feet at the URE VI 8). head to about 12 feet at the inshore end. A rock causeway 308 The Iligan River empties into the bay on the south side of the feet long and 36 feet wide connected the inner end of the pier to the shore. An area 36 by 66 feet was reclaimed on the north town. It is small and unimportant, having less than 3 feet of water on its bar at low water. side of the causeway at its outer end. A shed 20 by 40 feet was (a) Harbor. The harbor is an open roadstead in the south- constructed on this area. A rock bulkhead 98 feet long was east corner of Iligan Bay. Iligan Bay, between Initao Point east- constructed to the south at right angles to the outer end of the ward and Polo Point westward, is about 33 miles wide and in- causeway. dents 23 miles. The concrete pier was equipped with metal bollards and The anchorage is bad and at times, during the northeast mon- fender piles (FIGURE VI . 9). The pier was lighted. soon, is untenable. At such times vessels seek shelter in Quina- Two 200-foot vessels with a draft of 12 feet could berth lang Cove, 3 miles northward of Iligan, where anchorage, here, one on each side of the pier. A few broken piles mark the sheltered from the northeast monsoon, may be found in 20 to sites of the wharves formerly located at Camp Overton and 25 fathoms, about 1/8 mile from the edge of the shore reef. Tominobo, about 2 and 1½ miles, respectively, south of Iligan. Page VI 8 PORT FACILITIES fhe fine rky rocky ISS 124°14'E s sand a a gravel 185 M mud 42 243 as ⑉ m 14 SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS ISO se fresh (73 134 75 183 quot 202 129 " 28 187 - 34 72 166 28 ) ⑉ 10 65. so and growth 16 182 INS 77 Lopez 1 Initoo Pt 199 4d 166 or Oroquisto 200 33 IAS 132 1% Monticos PL - 18 Jiminezs Modre Reef Salvimbal Pt se as Quinalang 140 8°15'N - Miscmis Cove WILIGAN 163 23 Misomis port 70, ILIGAN EF 39 157 Kolambugan 125 19 SPON wayn. 124 VICINITY MAP 74 B SCALE or MILES ID4PO'E 31 N° 73 PORT FACILITIES AT heavity ILIGAN, MINDANAO CONCRETE PIER SCALE OF FEET milla 1000 o 2000 4000 SCALE or FEET HHH - # - 190 SOURCE C & 0.S. CHARTNO.4639 APRIL 1944 Prepared by the Board of Engineers For Rivers and Herbors, Corps of Engineers FIGURE VI 7. Iligan. Sketch showing location of Iligan (inser), details of pier (inset) and port plan showing location of facilities. In addition to the cargo shed on the pier, 2 storage buildings (a) Harbor. The harbor, a small natural bay about 1 were located at the root of the approaching causeway. mile wide at its entrance between Misamis and Malaubang (c) Clearance facilities. A roadway connected the pier Points, recedes about 1/2 mile into the north shore of Port with the town. There was regular and frequent steamship con- Misamis. Open to the southeast, it is protected from northeast nection with Cebu. winds by Misamis Point. Depths at the entrance average 4½ The unloading capacity of the port is estimated to have been fathoms, decreasing toward the head of the bay. The 5-fathom 240 short tons (2,000 pounds) of general cargo daily, handled contour does not enter the bay. at the vessel berths, assuming an 8-hour day. Port Misamis, including Panguil Bay, is a long narrow in- (d) Availability of supplies. Fresh water could be secured let extending southwesterly for about 22 miles. It is 9 miles from pipe connection at the outer end of the pier. Gasoline, wide at the entrance between Binuni and Loculan Points, and diesel oil, and lubricating oils were available in small quantities. narrows until it is less than 1 mile wide about 12 miles from the entrance, beyond which it spreads to form Panguil Bay, a (4) Misamis, Mindanao Island (8° 09' N, 123° 51' E). large shoal basin, which is navigated only by small launches. Misamis is on the northern shore of Port Misamis, an inlet Binuni Point is low and surrounded by a fringing coral reef to a in the southwestern corner of Iligan Bay (FIGURE VI - 10). distance of about 1/3 mile. The shores of Port Misamis are low The port was of considerable importance as an export point and covered with mangroves. North of Misamis Point there is for lumber, corn, and copra. The landing facilities were about an extended sandy shore. Immediately southward, on the oppo- 1/4 mile southeast of the town, near Misamis Point (FIGURE site coast, there are high hills. Loculan Point, the western limit VI 10). of Port Misamis, is low and sandy. PORT FACILITIES Page VI 9 N FIGURE VI 8. lligan. Town and harbor, showing concrete pier near mouth of Iligan River, looking northwest. in FIGURE VI 9. lligan. Concrete pier and causeway showing type of construction, looking southeast. Page VI 10 PORT FACILITIES A number of charted reefs and shoals, some of which were The Government pier, easternmost of the two (Reference marked by buoys, lie within the entrance to Port Misamis. The number 1, FIGURE VI . 10), consisted of a dumped rock entrance should be approached cautiously. causeway 235 feet long and 27 feet wide, with a 40-foot square There are two channels that lead into Panguil Bay and to steel sheet piling head, terminating in a reinforced concrete Misamis, of which the eastern channel is the wider and most pier 187 feet long and 40 feet wide, on concrete piling. The generally used. depths alongside the pier were 20 feet in 1939. This pier had Iligan Bay is described under Topic 61, C, (3), (a). berths for 2 vessels 350 feet long with draft of 20 feet, one on Good anchorage may be found southward and westward each side, but the lengths of the berths would only permit 2 from Misamis Point, according to draft. A good berth for a hatches on each vessel to be worked simultaneously. large vessel is in 4½ fathoms of water, with the light bearing The western lumber mill pier (Reference number 2, FIG- 36° true distant 1/4 mile. Small vessels may anchor farther URE VI - 10) consisted of a rock and earth causeway about northward, about 200 yards southward from the piers. 200 feet long with the pier extending about 250 feet sea- A fixed red light visible 7 miles was shown from a tower ward from its extremity. The pier was probably of timber on the southwest corner of the old fort at Misamis Point. construction. Depths were reported to range from 16 to 13 The high water interval at Misamis is 11 hours, 32 minutes. feet alongside at low water. This pier was lighted and water Higher high water height is 4.4 feet, and the lowest tide reaches was piped onto it. There were industrial tracks on the causeway 1.5 feet below mean low water. which lead to the mill. This pier could provide berthing ac- The tidal currents at ebb flow eastward across the ends of commodations for 2 vessels 200 feet long and 12 feet draft, the piers at Misamis. one on each side. (b) Landing facilities. The facilities at Misamis con- (c) Clearance facilities. There was industrial trackage on sisted of two piers, one privately owned and operated, and the the causeway but not on the pier at the lumber mill. Roads led other owned and operated by the Government. from the piers to the town, There were no railroads. the Fine - send SOUNDINGS FATHOMS Maire MISANIS A 4, VICINITY MAP MAJ en EMP MISAMIS PORT FACILITIES AT MISAMIS, MINDANAO SCALE OF FEET LOOD e 3,000 Propose to I for SOURCE: to ass CHART NO. 4640 - et Engineers APRIL 1944 . are FIGURE VI 10. Misamis. Sketch showing location of Misamis (inset) and port plan showing location of facilities. PORT FACILITIES Page VI Il The unloading capacity of the port is estimated to have been proach to the pier is through a narrow break in the off-lying 600 short tons (2,000 pounds) of general cargo daily, handled coral reef. A basin 500 feet wide is reported to have been at vessel berths, assuming an 8-hour day. dredged in the cove, which provides turning room for only (d) Availability of supplies. Water was available on the small vessels. The cove is open to the eastward. Charted depths western pier. Gasoline in tins and diesel oil in drums were avail- range from 61/4 fathoms at the entrance to about 3 fathoms able in small quantities. The western pier was lighted. There at head of the pier, although depths along the northern side were no coal supplies. of the pier are reported to be 27 feet. The coral reef surround- (e) Repair facilities. Minor machine-shop work could ing the cove, awash at low water, provides some protection be done, but no welding or foundry equipment were available. from northerly and southerly seas. The hills of the coast pro- vide some protection from southerly winds and good pro- (5) Oroquieta, Mindanao Island (8° 29' N, 123° 48' E). tection from westerly winds. Oroquieta is on the western side of Iligan Bay on the north- Iligan Bay is described under Topic 61, C, (3), (a). ern coast of Mindanao Island, on the left bank and at the mouth Anchorage, protected from southerly and westerly winds, of the Oroquieta River (FIGURE VI - 11). The landing is at with good holding ground may be found about 1/4 mile from Loboc, about 1 mile northwest of Oroquieta, with which it is shore in 12 fathoms of water, over muddy bottom, with the connected by road. The Oroquieta River enters the bay just church bearing 227°. During the northeast monsoon this south of the town. There is only 1½ feet of water on the bar anchorage is untenable. Small steamers find sheltered anchor- at low tide. age in Loboc Cove where vessels moor fore and aft. (a) Harbor. Loboc Cove, the harbor for Oroquieta, is an There were no navigation lights at Oroquieta. indentation in the coral reef, about 350 yards wide and 500 (b) Landing facilities. The only facility at Oroquieta con- yards long, located about 1 mile northwest of the town. Ap- sisted of a dumped rock causeway 135 feet long and 20 feet 57 abot Napolo Pt corse 50 13 wh white 5 S sond bk black mud a br brown Loper - inited SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS 16 OROQUIE 19 Jiminers'g Rest Salimber Loboc Missmis Filigon port Kolombugon church VICINITY MAP SCALE or MILES 184°C'E 25 35 Loboc 38 5 66MS 16 19 33 5 64.05 N is 25 13 IS 23 IS 27 BAWS 31 3) -12 25 22 42 13 21 9% F. OROQUIETA this 9 PORT FACILITIES AT 2 OROQUIETA, MINDANAO 31 SCALE OF FEET 1000 o 1000 Oroguings, 2 3000 2 SOURCE C&G.S. CHART NO. 4639 APRIL 1944 Tabec Prepared by the Board of Engineers For Rivers and Harbors, Corps of Engineers FIGURE VI 11. Oroquieta. Sketch showing location of Oroquieta (inset) and port plan showing location of facilities. Page VI 12 PORT FACILITIES wide, with a rock-filled crib head 27 feet long and 33 feet wide, (6) Zamboanga, Mindanao Island (6° 54' N, 122° 04' terminating in a reinforced concrete pier, 194 feet long and 30 E). feet wide, on piling (FIGURE VI 11). Zamboanga is on the southwestern extremity of Mindanao Depths of 10 feet were reported along the southern face and Island, facing Basilan Strait (FIGURE VI - 12). It is the princi- 27 feet along the northern face. Inadequate depths along the pal city of Mindanso and the center of trade for southwestern southern side of the pier and limited space in the harbor for Mindanao and the northern portion of the Sulu Archipelago. maneuvering vessels are believed to have restricted the useful- The only facilities of commercial importance were at the Gov. ness of the port to a berth for one 200-foot vessel of 12-foot ernment wharf, which consisted of a modern concrete pier and draft along the northern side of the pier. its accessory piers and wharves fronting an extensive reclaimed A large warehouse was reported to have been located in the area on the southwestern side of the town (FIGURE VI - 13). town of Oroquieta. Proposed new port work included the con- (a) Harbor. The harbor is an open roadstead in Basilan struction of a cargo shed but the present status of the project Strait. The harbor limits inclose an area about 2 miles long is not known. and 1/2 mile wide, with depths ranging from 10 to 45 fathoms. It is protected on the south by Little and Great Santa Cruz Is- (c) Clearance facilities. There were no railroads. Roads led lands, but is exposed to gales from the west and southeast. Dur- from the pier to the town of Oroquieta and to other points along ing the northeast monsoon the roadstead is sheltered and the the coast. Regular steamer communication was maintained with water smooth. Cebu. An inner small boat harbor was formed behind a rock jetty, The discharge capacity of the port is estimated to have been which projected about 900 feet south-southeasterly from the 200 short tons (2,000 pounds) of general cargo daily, handled shore. A detached rock breakwater, about 420 feet long, lay at the vessel berth, assuming an 8-hour day. about 200 feet southwest of and parallel to the bulkhead at the Ill'm ZAMBOANGA PENINSULA Cally N BACOLI COLORA fate L.SANTA 9a SANTA CRUZ Bositon Streit LANHIL 40 MALAMAGE SIBAGO 10 009 COCOL VICINITY MAP BASILAN ISLAND SCALE,OP MILES 0 BOAT BASIN due N SECURITY 1110 1 2/ UNIT / © / / 5 6 ! to - STATE . = 36 . # - at . of 24 "10 38 # if 4 = 4 24. 29 PORT FACILITIES AT 25 a de 20 = lb ZAMBOANGA, MINDANAO Co corol SCALE OF FEET rity. rocky 800 800 5 sond 29 19 30 n SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS SOURGE CROS CHART NO.4648 Propered " the Bourd of Engineers for livers and Corpo of Englaners APRIL 1944 FIGURE VI 12. Zamboanga. Sketch showing location of Zamboanga (inset) and port plan showing location of facilities, PORT FACILITIES Page VI - 13 FIGURE VI 13. Zamboanga. Aerial view, looking southwest, showing harbor works. 9 January 1939. root of the approach to the Government Wharf. The eastern deep) is 1½ miles long and nearly 1 mile wide. It is fringed extremity was about 200 feet westward from the approach. by a narrow reef. Depths in this inner harbor ranged from 5 to 20 feet. The anchorage off Zamboanga is not good. The coast drops A sewer outfall, marked by 4 piles, projecting but a short off rapidly and outside the 12-fathom contour the bottom is distance above high water, lay 215 yards from and on line with hard and uneven. Vessels anchor anywhere in front of the the outer face of the T-head of the Government Wharf and town, not going inside the 10-fathom contour as the water crossed the western part of the inner harbor. shoals rapidly. This anchorage is exposed to gales from the Basilan Strait, separating Mindanao from Basilan Island, is west and southeast. A heavy sea sets in with these gales and is 8½ miles wide and 24 miles long. The Santa Cruz Islands and increased when the flood stream sets against the wind. Bank, on the Mindanao side of the strait, divide it into 2 An occulting white light, 64 feet above high water and visible channels, both equally navigable. The northern channel, al- 13 miles, was shown from the summit of Little Santa Cruz Is- though the narrower, is generally preferred by sailing vessels land. as it offers the advantage of an anchorage in case of a calm. Before the war a fixed red light, 36 feet above high water Santa Cruz Bank is a coral bank, the northern edge of and visible 9 miles, was shown from the T-head of the Govern- which is 1½ miles from the coast of Mindanao. A channel ment Wharf at Zamboanga. with a least depth of 8 farhoms crosses the middle of the bank At Zamboanga there are generally two tides in the lunar day; in a northwest-southeast direction. but at equinoctial quarterings, and when the moon has a high Little Santa Cruz Island, on the northern edge of Santa Cruz declination, there may be but one tide. Bank, about 2 miles southwestward from Zamboanga, is 1/4 The high water interval at Zamboanga is 6 hours 29 min- mile long and 1/8 mile wide. Each end is prolonged by a drying utes. The higher high water height is 3.3 feet, and the lowest reef. Shoal water extends from the western reef for a distance tide subsides to minus 1.5 feet below mean lower low water. of 1½ miles from the island. In Basilan Strait, the tidal streams follow the direction of the Great Santa Cruz Island on the eastern end of the bank channel. Near islands and shoals they follow the edge of southeastward from the smaller island (from, which it is the reefs, attaining velocities of 5 to 6 knots. The current sets separated from Little Santa Cruz by a channel 6 to 8 fathoms both west and east with equal strength in the roadstead off Zam- Page VI- 14 PORT FACILITIES boanga, but it has been observed to set continuously easeward sisted of a reinforced concrete T-head wharf, approached by a with varying velocity for 24 hours during a period of north- reinforced concrete pier which extended from a reclaimed area westerly winds. A current indicator is located on the wharf at fronted by a concrete bulkhead. A reinforced concrete boat Zamboanga. pier extended eastward from the approach pier and parallel to The mean annual temperature is 79.8°, with a maximum the T-head wharf (FIGURE VI. 14). These facilities are listed of 92.1°, and 71.2° is the minimum. The average annual rain- in TABLE VI 3 and are keyed to the port plan (Reference num- fall is 43.07 inches, and the mean relative humidity, 84.6 per bers 1 to 8, FIGURE VI 2). The estimated unloading Ca- cent. pacity is based on the handling of general cargo. An eight-hour (b) Landing facilities. The facilities at Zamboanga con- day is assumed. TABLE VI 3 PIERS AND WHARVES AT ZAMBOANGA, MINDANAO ISLAND Reference number ON map (FIGURE VI - 12) I 2 NAME GOVERNMENT WHARP (T-head) GOVERNMENT WHARF (Approach Pier-Outer end, eastern side) Location on water front Outer end of approach pier in front of town Extends from Boar Pier to T-head Owned and Operated by State State Purpose for which used General cargo and passengers Coastal and medium sized craft. General cargo Type of construction Reinforced concrete deck on concrete piling. Has Reinforced concrete deck on concrete piling pile cluster feeders Face or Inner Western Inner Eastern Outer Side Side Side Face (feet) (feet) (feet) Description Dimensions 800 165 480 140 Depth of water 25-30 20 20 20 Berthing space available 800 165 480 140 Width of apron Open wharf Open wharf Deck above low water No data No data Capacity (lbs. per sq. ft.) No data No data Lighted or unlighted Lighted Lighted Transit sheds None None Mechanical handling facilities None None Railway connections None None Water supply Fresh water available Fresh water available Electric current No data No data Estimated capacity of terminal, short tons per day 1,100 Remarks Berthage for one 600-foot, 450-foot, and 200-foot vessel with drafts of 30, 20, and 12-foot, respec- tively Reference number on map (FIGURE VI 12) 3 4 NAME GOVERNMENT WHARF (Approach Pier-Western GOVERNMENT WHARF (Boat Pier) side) Location on water front Extends from shore to T-head Extends eastward from approach pier Owned and Operated by State State Purpose for which used Coastal and small craft, general cargo Coastal and small craft, general cargo Type of conseruction Reinforced concrete deck on concrete piling Reinforced concrete deck on concrete piling Face Face North side South side Description (feet) (feet) (feet) (feet) Dimensions 465 29.5 178 178 Depth of water 15-20 20 15 20 Berthing space available 465 29.5 178 178 Width of apron Open wharf Open wharf Deck above low water No data No data Capacity (lbs. per sq. ft.) No data No data No data No data Lighted or unlighted Lighted Lighted Lighted Lighted PORT FACILITIES Page VI 15 TABLE VI-3 (Continued) Reference number ON map (FIGURE VI 12) 3 4 Transit sheds None None Mechanical handling facilities None None Railway connections None None Water supply Fresh water available Fresh water available Electric current No data No data Estimated capacity of terminal, short tons per day 400 100 Remarks Berthage: 2 class F Berthage: I class F (south side) Reference number on map (FIGURE VI 12) 5 6 NAME GOVERNMENT WHARF (Approach Pier-inshore GOVERNMENT WHARP (Eastern bulkhead) end, eastern side) Location on water front In rear of Government Wharf Eastward from approach pier and fronting reclaim- ed area Owned and Operated by State State Purpose for which used Lighters and small coastal craft Lighters and small craft. General cargo Type of construction Reinforced concrete deck on concrete piling Concrete bulkhead wall with a filled ares behind Face Face Description (feet) (feet) Dimensions 280 850 Depth of water 15 15 Berthing space available 280 850 Width of apron Open wharf Open wharf Deck above low water No data No data Capacity (lbs. per sq. ft.) No data Unlimited Lighted or unlighted Lighted No data Transit sheds None None Mechanical handling facilities None None Railway connections None None Water supply Fresh water available No data Electric current No data No data Estimated capacity of terminal, short tons per day 120 450 Remarks Berthage: 1 Class F Berthage: 2 cláss F Has 5 stairway landings at intervals along face Reference number ON map (FIGURE VI 12) 7 8 NAME GOVERNMENT WHARF (Western bulkhead) GOVERNMENT WHARF (Boat Basin Quay) Location on water front Westward from approach pier and fronting re- Western end of reclaimed area claimed area. Owned and Operated by State State Purpose for which used Lighters and small craft. General cargo. Lighters and small craft. General cargo Type of construction Concrete bulkhead wall with fill area behind. Concrete bulkhead wall with fill area behind. Face Face Description (feet) (feet) Dimensions 300 300 Depth of water 15 41/2-6 Berthing space available 300 300 Width of apron Open wharf Open wharf Deck above low water No data No data Capacity (lbs. per sq. ft.) Unlimited Unlimited Lighted or unlighted No data No data Transit sheds None None Page VI 16 PORT FACILITIES TABLE VI 3 (Continued) Reference number on map (FIGURE VI 12) 7 8 Mechanical handling facilities None None Railway connections None None Water supply No data No data Electric current No data No data Estimated capacity of terminal, short tons per day 250 Remarks Berthage: 1 class F FIGURE VI 14. Zamboanga. Aerial view of Government Wharf prior to completion of bulkheads and breakwaters, showing type of construction. 15 September 1936. The reclaimed section, probably available for open storage, per hour depending on the cargo. The loading rate for lumber had an area of about 11 acres. There were about 1,970 linear was about 10,000 board feet per hatch per hour. feet of bulkhead, of which about 1,450 linear feet were usable The discharge capacity of the port is estimated to have been as quays by small craft (FIGURE VI - 15). 2,420 short tons (2,000 pounds) of general cargo daily, There were a customs warehouse and numerous private ware- handled at vessel berths, assuming an 8-hour day. houses and storage sheds. The private warehouses had a capac- (d) Availability of supplies. Water in ample quantities ity of about 5,000 tons. and of good quality was available on the wharf. A commercial towing company had 4 light towing launches No bunker coal or fuel oil was available. The wharf was and 2 small sea-going tugs. Six sea-going and 4 harbor lighters lighted. of 50 to 100 tons capacity were available. (e) Repair facilities. There were no dry docks. Facilities (c) Clearance facilities. There were no cranes. All cargo was handled by ship's tackle and was hauled to and from the for repairs were limited. The marine railway at Zamboanga was ship's side by trucks. capable of hauling out a vessel of 50 tons, with a length of 100 There were no railroads. feet and draft of 9 feet. There was a machine shop in Zamboan- ga where small repair work could be done. Roads led from the wharf to the town and warehouses and connected to the highways which extended along the coast. (7) Cotabato, Mindanao Island (7° 14' N, 124° 15' E). Experienced gangs of native stevedores were available. The Cotabato is on the left bank of the north branch of the Min- discharging rate was from 15 to 30 tons per stevedoring gang danao River about 51/4 miles above Cotabato entrance through PORT FACILITIES Page VI 17 FIGURE VI 15. Zamboanga. Aerial view, looking northwest, showing reclaimed area and detached breakwater. 9 January 1939. which it reaches Illana Bay (FIGURE VI - 16). It was the cen- 7 miles from 65° to 204°, was located on the southern point of ter of trade for the Mindanao Valley and the surrounding coast- Cotabato entrance. al area. The landing facilities were located in front of the town The high water interval at Cotabato is 7 hours, 05 minutes. along the south shore of the Mindanao River. The height of higher high water is 3.5 feet above mean lower (a) Harbor. It is a river port, communicating with Illana low water. The lowest tide is 1.5 feet below mean lower low Bay by a channel with a least width of about 60 yards and a water. The currents in Mindanao River are strong. Tide rips controlling depth (1939) of 5 feet over the bar at the entrance. occur off Cotabato entrance. The tidal currents in Illana Bay The bar at Cotabato entrance is reported to be shoaling gradu- flood southward and ebb northward. ally, and is subject to change during freshets. In 1939 it could The mean annual rainfall is 89.73 inches. be crossed at high water by small vessels drawing 8 to 9 feet. (b) Landing facilities. The facilities at Cotabato are key- Local knowledge is necessary both for crossing the bar and ed to the port plan (FIGURE VI - 16). A concrete and sheet pil- navigating the river. ing quay about 725 feet long was constructed along the river At 21 miles above the sea the river divides into 2 arms which bank (Reference number 1, FIGURE VI - 16). The depths discharge into Illana Bay about 4½ miles apart, forming an alongside in June, 1937, ranged from 7 to 14 feet at low water. extensive delta, Numerous small channels connect the 2 arms. The eastern of two small municipal wharves (Reference num- The northern arm on which Cotabato is located, is the wider ber 3, FIGURE VI - 16) had a depth of 14 feet alongside; the and deeper and is navigable for small steamers to the port. Lo- western wharf (Reference number 2, FIGURE VI - 16) had a cal river boats drawing 5 to 7 feet normally operate from Cota- depth of 4 feet. There were no cranes. bato to Paidu-Pulangi, 27 miles upstream, and at periods of A shed, approximately 200 feet by 25 feet, in the rear of the high water the same boats continue up the river a distance of quay, was probably a warehouse (FIGURE VI - 18). In the im- 52 miles. The larger ocean-going vessels which formerly called mediate vicinity of the quay an area of about 2 acres was avail- at Cotabato now anchor outside and discharge into lighters. A able for open storage space. number of private beacons marked the channel to Cotabato. Lighters and tugs were available for the transportation of Opposite the town the river is from 300 to 400 yards wide. cargo to and from the anchorage off the river mouth. The bottom is soft mud. The channel, between the town water- (c) Clearance facilities. Before the war there was regular front and 2 islets in midstream (FIGURE VI . 17), forms a ba- steamboat communication with Davao and with Manila via sin with an area of about 15 acres and depths of 5 to 18 feet. Zamboanga. Several small river steamers or motorboats made Because of the strong current it is difficult to turn a vessel daily trips to Paídu-Pulangi, 27 miles up the river from Cota- during ebb tide. bato, and at periods of high water these boats continued up The best anchorage is in Illana Bay, northwest of Cotabato the river to Fort Pikit, a distance of 52 miles. There were no entrance, in depths of 5 to 20 fathoms over mud bottom about 1 railroad facilities in the port. Trucks had access from the water- mile from shore. At times during the height of the southwest front to the island road system. monsoon this anchorage becomes decidedly uncomfortable. Small vessels can anchor closer inshore, in depths of 9 to 15 (d) Availability of supplies. Fresh water was scarce. Die- feet, over mud on the edge of the reef northeastward of Panali- sel oil, gasoline, and kerosene were obtainable. san Point, the northern point of Cotabato entrance. (e) Repair facilities. Only minor repairs were possible at A flashing white light, 33 feet above high water and visible a small machine shop. Welding equipment was available. Page VI 18 PORT FACILITIES - SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS ILLANA OCTABATO Läunger Mont MORO VICINITY MAP PORT FACILITIES AT COTABATO MINDANAO SCALE or FEET 2000 : - --- of - - - lerge et SOURCE APRIL OTABATO FIGURE VI 16. Cotabato. Sketch showing location of Cotabato (inset) and port plan showing location of facilities. (8) Davao, Mindanao Island (7° 04' N, 125° 37' and rarely becomes rough, even at the height of the monsoon. Davao is close to the mouth and on the north bank of Davao The middle of the gulf is deep and clear. The shoals which River in the northwestern part of Davao Gulf (FIGURE VI fringe the western shore do not extend seaward over 1½ miles, 19). It was the commercial center of southern Mindanao and while in the eastern part of the gulf there are a number of the leading Philippine port for the export of hemp. The port dangerous detached shoals and reefs lying from 3 to 4 miles area is at Santa Ana, about 1 mile to the east-northeastward. from the coast and foul ground at a lesser distance. Practically all of the trade of Davao was handled at the Govern- The harbor at Santa Ana is naturally sheltered from west to ment Pier at Sanra Ana, which had highway connection to north by the mainland, and to some extent from northeast to Davao. Other landings within the harbor limits were located at east by Samal Island. During the southwest monsoon the sea is Ipil, Lanang Point, the petroleum terminal for Davao (FIGURE choppy. Off Santa Ana, the 5-fathom contour is 200 to 400 yards VI - 20), Ilang and Tambungon, 11/2, 31/4, 71/4, and 10% offshore. The approach from the southward is deep and clear miles, respectively, northeast of Santa Ana. of dangers. The northern approach is through Pakiputan The Davao River was little used except by fishermen, and Strait, which separates Samal Island from the mainland and has local knowledge is necessary for crossing the shoal area across a minimum mid-channel depch of 14 fathoms. This strait is ½ its mouth. There are depths of only 2 or 3 feet on the bar at mile wide and has a depth of 19 fathoms in the narrowest part. low water and the channel changes frequently in freshets. A 21/4-fathom rocky detached shoal lies near the southern en- (a) Harbor. The limits of Davao Harbor include the area trance, 1/2 mile offshore and 2 miles 56° from the northern of Davao Gulf, west and northwest of Samal Island, from Du- entrance point to the Davao River. There are several dangers malag Point, about 3 miles southwest of the mouth of the in the northern part of the strait. Davao River, to the mouth of the Lasang River, about 131/2 From Dumalag Point to the mouth of the Davao River, the miles northeast of the Davao River (FIGURE VI.- 19). coast is low, swampy, and bordered by a sandy beach. Shoal Davao Gulf is about 35 miles wide at the entrance between water extends about 1/4 mile offshore, beyond which the water Cape San Agustin and Calian Point, and recedes northward deepens rapidly. about 70 miles. Samal and Talikud Islands lie in the northern The harbor at Ipil is a small basin formed by a break in the part of the gulf. The area north of the islands is well protected shore reef, near the southern entrance to Pakipuran Strait. PORT FACILITIES Page VI 19 FIGURE VI 17. Cotabato. Aerial view of Cotabato, looking northwest. At Lanang Point, the harbor is an open roadstead on the miles, was located on the beach at Santa Ana, southwest of the western side of Pakiputan Strait. The strait at this point is nar- pier. row and there are several dangers in the approaches. From the At Ilang, vessels anchor in 20 fathoms, over mud, off Davao River to Lanang Point the coast is sandy and has broad the southernmost of 2 mooring floats which were maintained for sand flats exposed at low water, the outer edges of which are the use of log rafts. A small anchorage near the shore, with steep for the first 2 miles. Along the last 3 miles of this coast, depths of 4 to 5 fathoms, is accessible to small craft with local the underlying coral is exposed at low water along the outer knowledge of the narrow winding channel. edge of the sand flat. At Tambungon there is anchorage about 0.6 mile offshore Ilang, on the mainland west of Bassa Point at the north- in 10 to 20 fathoms, over mud. ern extremity of Samal Island, was the shipping terminal of a The high water interval at Santa Ana is 6 hours, 13 minutes. lumber company. A narrow channel winds among the reefs to Higher high water rises 5.1 feet above mean lower low water. a small anchorage near the shore. It was marked by private The lowest tide is 1.5 feet below mean lower low water. Off buoys but was navigable only by small boats with local knowl- Santa Ana, the tidal current runs parallel to the shore with a edge. A beacon marked the northern side of the entrance. velocity of about 2 knots. Tambungon, a shipping point for logs, lies in a bight midway The currents in Pakiputan Strait run about 2½ knots, and between the Bunawan and Lasang Rivers, near the northern occasionally set southward both with a rising and falling tide, limit of Davao Harbor. Midway in the bight there is a coral usually during strong northerly winds, or after water has been reef % mile long and 1/8 mile wide, which is awash at the lowest accumulated at the head of the gulf by a southwest gale. tides. The mean annual temperature is 80.4°, with a maximum of From Lanang Point to the mouth of the Lasang River the 99.1° and a minimum of 62.4°. The average relative humidity coast is low and flat, with heavy timber and jungle growth to at 6 a.m. and 2 p.m. is, respectively, 96.0 and 68.2 per cent, the water's edge. and the average annual rainfall is 90.14 inches. From Decem- There is anchorage for large vessels off the Santa Ana pier. ber through April the prevailing winds are from north to east- Vessels anchor either 450 yards northeast or southeast of the northeast, and from May through November, southeast to west- end of the pier in a depth of 12 fathoms over mud bottom. The northwest. anchorage is open to southerly and southwesterly winds. (b) Landing facilities. The principal facilities in Davao A fixed red light, 53 feet above high water and visible 7 Harbor are keyed to the port plan (FIGURE VI 19). Page VI 20 PORT FACILITIES The Government Pier at Santa Ana (Reference number 1, leum Company (References numbers 3 and 4, FIGURE VI . 19). FIGURE VI - 19) consisted of a reinforced concrete outer section These wharves, about 150 yards apart, the former of open 75 feet by 326 feet and a solid-fill inner section 75 feet by 238 timber pile, and the latter of concrete construction, were built feet, with steel sheet piling along the north side. In August parallel to shore, with approach platforms. The outer face of 1940, the depth at the head of the pier was 25 feet. On the each wharf was about 200 feet long, with a depth of about 26 north side there was 25 feet at the outer end, gradually shoaling to 10 feet about 180 feet inshore. On the south side, there was feet alongside. The Asiatic Petroleum Company wharf had a 16 feet at the outer end, gradually shoaling to 6 feet about 180 1-ton hand crane and pipelines to the storage tanks. (FIGURES feet inshore. Dredging proposed would have provided a berth VI . 20 and VI - 21). on the north side of the pier about 490 feet long, with a depth At Ilang, 7½ miles north-northeast of Santa Ana, there of 30 feet, and a berth 260 feet long and 15 feet deep along was a small timber pier (Reference number 5, FIGURE VI - 19) the outer part of the south side. The present status of this im- serving the sawmill, which was the terminus of a logging rail- provement is unknown. way. All cargo was moved by flat rail trucks from wharf to ware- Tambungon, 103/4 miles north-northeast of Santa Ana, was house. the terminus of a logging railway. A stone pier (Reference The pier was lighted. The pier could probably accommodate number 6, FIGURE VI - 19), 1,300 feet long, with a depth of 15 1 vessel 200 feet long with 12-foot draft on the north side. At Ipil, 11/2 miles northeast of Santa Ana, there was a small feet at its end, extended from shore over a mud flat, which is pier (Reference number 2, FIGURE VI 19). practically bare at low tide. At Lanang Point, 31/4 miles northeast of Santa Ana, were There were several private warehouses in the rear of the the wharf and buildings of the International Harvester Com- Government Pier at Santa Ana. Details of 5 of these are shown pany and the wharf and oil storage tanks of the Asiatic Petro- in TABLE VI 4. E. FIGURE VI - 18. Cotabato. Aerial view of Cotabato showing port facilities. 21 January 1935. PORT FACILITIES Page VI. 21 SYMBOLS Piers, Wharves, a Docks Warehouses TAMBUNGON Lasong River 6 5 Busawan River (WARBOR LIMIT). E 2 SANTA ANA Bossa Pt. - TIBUNGKO 5 4 HARBOR N PORT FACILITIES SCALE OF FEET 500 o 500 Madoum Stroif 4 DAVAO LANANG PT, 3 Delas TALINUD patiputon SAMAL ISLAND IPIL DAVAO GULF 2 Shoel Locaron. Monserat SANTA ANA Malito DAVAO - c. SAN AGUSTIN Lowo CALIAN PT. VICINITY MAP Davao River SCALE OF MILES 10 o 10 20 30 DAVAO DAVAO, MINDANAO 07°04'36"N 125°37'27"E SCALE OF MILES Dumalog 1. o I 2 3 4 5 ( HARBOR LIMIT) Dumalog Pt. SOURCE: C & GS CHART NO. 4624 Propared " the fourd of Ingineers for APRIL 1944 Rivers and Marsors, Carge of Ingineers FIGURE VI- 19. Davao. Sketch showing location of Davao (inset), port plan showing location of facilities (inset) and area within the harbor limits. Page VI 22 PORT FACILITIES FIGURE VI 20. Davao. Aerial view of Lanang Point installations, looking west-northwest, showing facilities of International Harvester Company (left) and Asiatic Pe- troleum Company (right). TABLE VI 4 facilities at Santa Ana, and only logging railways to Tibungko WAREHOUSES AT DAVAO, MINDANAO and Tambungon. REF. No. Stevedores were available, The loading rate for hemp and ON MAP ESTIMATED (FIGURE APPROXIMATE GROSS FLOOR copra was 10 tons per gang per hour, and for logs or lumber, VI-19) OWNER OR OPERATOR DIMENSIONS SPACE 8,000 to 10,000 board feet per gang per hour. The rate of dis- 1 Ker & Co. (FiG. VI 22) 125' x 130' 16,250 sq. ft. charge was 20 tons per gang per hour for general cargo, and 2 Hanson, Orth & Stevenson 160' X 65' 10,400 sq. ft. 6,000 to 10,000 board feet for lumber per gang per hour. 3 Columbian Rope Co. 135' 90' 12,150 sq. ft. 4 International Harvester Co. 235' x 65' 15,275 sq. it (d) Availability of supplies. Fresh water, suitable for 5 Mirsui Bussan Kaisha 225' X 120' 27,000 sq. ft. boiler purposes, was piped to the pier at Santa Ana. Coal and bunker fuel oil were not available. Gasoline, diesel oil, and lub- Total 81,075 sq. ft. ricating oil in tins and drums were available at Santa Ana. At the Asiatic Petroleum Company Wharf at Lanang Point, diesel The storage capacity of the warehouses has been estimated oil and gasoline were supplied to shipside by pipelines from 2 at about 4,000 tons. Open storage space, about 1 acre in extent, large and 2 small storage tanks. Food, ice, and other supplies was available in a park adjacent to the pier. were available, There were 2 warehouses at Ipil. A warehouse, 180 feet by (e) Repair facilities. Japanese sources report that a ship- 100 feet, was located in the rear of the Asiatic Petroleum Com- building yard for medium-sized vessels has been established at pany wharf, at Lanang Point. Santa Ana. Only minor repairs were possible. There was a ma- Harbor craft based at the port on June 30, 1940 is listed in chine shop in the town and welding and casting equipment were TABLE VI 5. available. About 600 yards north of the pier at Santa Ana there TABLE VI 5 was a small private marine railway, entirely bared at low water, HARBOR CRAFT AT DAVAO, MINDANAO for handling craft up to 40 feet long and not over 4 feet draft. NUMBER TYPE NET REG. TONS 15 Lighters 1,785 C. Sulu Archipelago. 11 Scows 1,635 33 Fishing boats (1) Jolo, Jolo Island. (6° 04' N, 121° 00' E, HO chart 35 Launches 4513). Jolo is a provincial capital and a port of entry at the northeast Two sea-going tugs were also available. There were no light- corner of a small indentation in the northwestern part of the ers for handling bulk liquid. island of Jolo. It was the only important port in the Sulu Archi- (c) Clearance facilities. A road connected Davao with pelago and had an extensive trade, primarily with the other Santa Ana, Lanang Point, and Hang. There were no railroad islands of the Philippines (FIGURE VI 23). PORT FACILITIES Page VI 23 FIGURE VI 21. Davao. International Harvester Company Wharf, looking south-southeast, showing type of construction. After 1938. and FIGURE VI - 22. Davao, Warehouse (Reference number 1, FIGURE VI - 19), in port area at Santa Ana. 1939. (a) Harbor. Jolo Harbor is defined as the waters within class berths. Additional berths within the limits of Jolo Harbor the following boundaries: from Belan Point along an imaginary could be secured by anchoring further offshore but the shelter line extending from Belan Point to the southwest point of Mar- would be increasingly poor. ongas Point to its intersection with an imaginary line drawn During the northeast monsoon ships may have to anchor in due west from Daingapic Point; thence along an imaginary the lee of Marongas Island across the channel from the port. line from this point of intersection to Daingapic Point; thence Because of strong tidal currents, this anchorage is poor. along the northwest shore of Jolo Island to Belan Point, the There was a fixed red light on the north side of the main pier. place of commencement. The water shoals rapidly inshore. The It was on a white steel frame tower 54 feet high and was visible 60-foot line is less than 500 feet from the end of the pier. The for seven miles. entrance channel is clear of reefs, and has sufficient depth for Tides on the north coast are chiefly diurnal. The diurnal any vessel which could berth at the principal pier. range is 2.8 feet. The port is sheltered from the southwest but fairly open in (b) Landing facilities. There were only two piers. The all other directions. The best anchorage is northwest of the principal pier was a concrete structure at the end of a stone lighthouse on the main pier. Depths here are from 72 to 84 causeway which extended northwest from the north gate of the feet at mean lower low water. Along a line drawn parallel to town (FIGURE VI - 24). The seaward face was 280 feet long the shore at the 84-foot point there should be about five first- and had a depth alongside of 30 feet; the northeast side was 245 Page VI 24 PORT FACILITIES feet long and had depths of 12 to 27 feet; the southwest side 50 feet long with a draft of up to 5 feet. was 162 feet long and had depths of 16 to 38 feet. These depths Two small machine shops were available for minor repairs. are at mean lower low water. There was a small boat basin on the One was in the ice plant and the other in the garage. southwest side. The Chinese pier, south of the principal pier, was a wooden structure with houses of the Chinese settlement D. Northeast Borneo. along one side. The bottom alongside the pier dried at low (1) Jesselton. (5° 59' N, 116° 04' E, HO 2441 and HO water. 2303). A cargo shed was on the main pier and warehouses were in the town. They could accommodate about 30,000 tons of cargo. Jesselton is about 11/4 miles south southwest from Limpat There was no cargo-handling equipment. Point, on the eastern side of Gaya Bay. It was the chief town There were privately owned gasoline launches and native and port of the northwest coast of Borneo and was the usual boats but neither rugs nor lighters. residence of the Governor for about half the year (FIGURES VI - 25 and VI - 26). (c) Clearance facilities. Jolo was connected by road to all the principal settlements on the island. (a) Harbor. The harbor is about 2,400 feet wide off the In normal times regular steamship services were maintained end of the pier. Vessels up to 7,000 tons could be accommo- with all ports of the Philippines. Service with Borneo and dated. The approach is easy and no dredging is necessary to Singapore was irregular. maintain depths in the harbor. The discharge capacity of the port is estimated to have been General depths in Jesselton Harbor are from 36 to 48 feet. about 225 short tons (2,000 pounds) per day. Depths in the entrance north of Gaya are sufficient to admit (d) Availability of supplies. Fresh water for drinking pur- any vessel which can lie in the harbor. Though there are many poses was piped to the principal pier. A charge of 50 centavos shoals, they were well marked. The least depth in a southern per cubic meter was made. entrance used by small craft is 6 feet at mean lower low water. Supplies of food were limited. The harbor is partially open to the north, but is protected to a Gasoline, diesel oil, and lubricating oil in drums were avail- certain extent by Plompong Island Reef and Sapangar Island. able in small quantities. There is a fairly secure anchorage with depths of 36 feet Ice was manufactured in Jolo. about 900 feet from the pier light. It should provide one first (e) Repair facilities. There was a small marine railway a class and one second class berth. There is another first class berth short distance north of the pier. It could handle launches up to in Gaya Harbor. Sapangar Bay which is the northern part of FIGURE VI 24. Jolo. Airview of Jolo looking east-southeast. In the left center is the principal pier to which an extension has been added since the photograph was taken. 25 June 1935. FIGURE VI-23 JANIS 155 121°00' Bus Bus Bare at low water tank Intramuras Belan Pt. (Walled city) JOLO Bare at low water Chinese houses Landing field Laud Chinese pier 5 / 8 a Mangrove swamp Tulay Cemeteries San Raymundo 6" 6 03 03 GOVERNMENT BUILDINGS 1 Provincial building 9 lice and electric plant 2 Customhouse and post office 10 Sulu public hospital 3 Military headquarters 11 Overseas Club 4 Military stables 12 Public market SCHOOLS 13 Ice storage Asturias PORT OF JOLO 14 Warehouses 5 Grammar school 15 Governor's residence 6 High school JOLO ISLAND 16 Government officials' OTHER BUILDINGS residence SULU ARCHIPELAGO 7 Catholic church and convent 17 School superintendent's 8 Suitan's palace residence Barracks o 100 200 300 400 500 YARDS e Radio Reliability Code: 29-20-2 121°00 NO 3273 COMPILED AND DRAWN a THE BRANCH or RESEARCH AND ANALYSIS. oss 14 APRIL 1944 FIGURE VI 23. Map of Jolo. LITHOGRAPHED IN THE REPRODUCTION BRANCH, oss PORT FACILITIES Page VI 25 PIER CUSTOMS Quarters z e the to fax or Reve wing GOVERNMENT OFFICES - lega WORKSHOP fice POWER STATION Signe dank Improve 2 sl Married / 11, / / 1 III 3 / here. 11 11, / Cue STATE Officers Quanters Association Differe Braund Quanters fração Secrie Officers JESSELTON TOWN FROM:SURVEY OF NORTH BORNEO, BRUNEI AND SARAWAK, WAR DEPARTMENT 530-676. JUNE 15, 1943. - - - - 1000 FEET NO 3227 RA, oss 5 APRIL 1944 FIGURE VI 25. Map of Jesselton. / Page VI 26 PORT FACILITIES FIGURE VI 26. Jesselton. View of Jesselton harbor looking north and showing pier, railway and road. Gaya Bay is in the background. No date. Gaya Bay has space for from 30 to 40 first-class berths and illuminated by electricity. Cargo was handled by coolie labor, Malohom Bay which is the southern part has space for about and there were also some cranes with capacities of up to 20 tons. three first-class berths. There is ample space between Sapangar Southwest of the pier were several small docks. They were and Malohom Bays, but the entrance of Gaya Bay is 1½ miles apparently dry alongside at low water. wide and the water here is exposed to the northwest. The customhouse and the port administration building were The entrance was marked by 2 lights and 3 beacons. located on the pier. The customs warehouse had a floor area of There was a fixed green light (under 100 candlepower) on the 6,622 square feet. There were two other warehouses on the root east side of Grieve Reef at 6° 00° N, 116° 04' E. It was on a of the pier. Each measured 100 by 300 feet. There was also a white iron column 24 feet high. The light was visible for 3 small bonded warehouse with a floor area of 870 square feet. miles. At the inner end of the pier elbow there was a fixed No harbor craft are reported. white light (300 candlepower) on an iron standard. The light (c) Clearance facilities. A road connected Jesselton with was 23 feet above mean high water level. Petras, 100 miles distant in a northeast direction. Various feeder Gueritz Reef was marked by a red beacon with a can top. lines extended from this road over the lowlands and the hills. Hewlett Reef, with a least depth of 1 foot, was marked by a Jesselton was the terminus of a railroad from Weston in black and white checkered beacon with a contical top. The Brunei, a distance of 96 miles. The pier was served by railway northeastern extremity of a reef 180 feet west of Harris Reef tracks (FIGURE VI - 28). They ran through the customs ware- was marked by a black beacon with a conical top. house and were flush with its floor. Goods could be handled It is high water, full and change at 10 hr. 30 m. Mean sea without lifting. level is highest with a northeast monsoon and lowest with a Vessels of the Straits Steamship Company had a weekly serv- southwest monsoon. Springs rise approximately 5 feet, neaps 3.5 feet above mean low water springs. There is only one high ice from Singapore. The Sabah Steamship Company main- water in 24 hours when the moon is at its maximum declination. tained a local fortnightly service with Sandakan. The currents vary from 1/2 to 1½ knots after strong southwest There was a government radio station at Jesselton and this winds. town had telegraphic communication with Sandakan and Labuan. (b) Landing facilities. The only pier where ocean-going vessels could be secured was 2,400 feet northeast of the town Discharge capacity of the port is estimated to have been about (FIGURE VI - 27). It was a reenforced, L-shaped, concrete 340 short tons (2,000 pounds) per day. structure, 225 feet long in a northwesterly direction and 25 feet (d) Availability of supplies. Boiler water was piped onto wide. It provided berthing space 328 feet long. Depths close the pier and could be taken from any berth. Drinking water had alongside the arm were 18 to 26 feet at low water. They were 21 to be boiled. The flow of the water during the day was slow, to 26 feet at a distance of 10 feet off the pier. The best landing but after dark from 10 to 15 tons per hour could be taken. place was at the concrete steps on the west side. The pier was Fresh provisions were of good quality and plentiful if suffi- PORT FACILITIES Page VI 27 cient notice were given. Some vegetables and bread were avail- hala Island to the easternmost extremity of Tanjong Aru and able. (3) by the south side of the bay, together with the rivers and Deck and engineering supplies were available in limited the arms thereof so far as navigable. At least half this area has quantities. depths of more than 24 feet at mean lower low water. The Shell Oil Company had storage capacity for 6,000 gal- From the entrance to the head of the harbor, depths vary lons of gasoline and usually kept that amount on hand. The from 18 to 96 feet at mean lower low water, but a bar with Socony Oil Company had storage facilities for 1,000 gallons. depths of from 18 to 30 feet lies across the whole mouth of Gasoline was available in 4 gallon tins and 65 gallon drums. the harbor. The least charted depth in the track over the bar is The Jesselton Ice and Power Company, Ltd. provided Jessel- 24 feet, but nothing less than 30 feet has been reported. On ton with ice, electric light, and power. It was located near the 22 March 1931, the Cunard liner Franconia, drawing 26 feet, shore between the pier and the town. entered the port at high water spring tide. (e) Repair Facilities. There were no ships' repair facilities Shelter is excellent throughout most of the harbor. at Jesselton. However, there was a railway repair shop where North of Pulo Bai, the harbor widens into a spacious basin minor repairs might be accomplished. There was an electric about three miles in diameter and this constitutes the usual an- spot welding plant at the Jesselton Ice and Power Company. chorage. Elton Bank immediately north of Pulo Bai has depths (2) Sandakan (5° 50' N, 118° 07' E HO 2797). of from 6 to 18 feet at mean lower low water, but throughout Sandakan on the northeast coast of Borneo, is on the northern most of this basin depths are from 30 to 54 feet. In this basin shore of Sandakan harbor % of a mile inside of Tanjong Papat there is room for about 40 first-class berths. The most convenient (FIGURE VI . 29). It was the principal town of North Borneo anchorage is about 2,100 to 3,600 feet south of the government and the headquarters of the British North Borneo Company. pier. Depths here are from 42 to 54 feet. The port could handle general cargo. On the main wharf (5° 50' N, 118° 07' E) there was a There was a radio station and a local automatic telephone fixed red light with a green vector (100 candlepower) on a system. tower 38 feet high. This light was visible for 7 miles. The red (a) Harbor. The harbor is large, 11/2 miles wide at its sector was visible east of Atjeh Rock; the green, west of Atjeh entrance between Bahala Island and Tanjong Aru, and more Rock. than four or five miles long. According to the Pilot, the port A light buoy, painted red, flashing a white light every 3 consists of the whole of Sandakan Bay which is defined as those seconds marked the western side of Atjeh Rock. This rock was waters bounded (1) by a line drawn in a west southwesterly the only detached danger off the town of Sandakan. It bears direction from the north point of Bahala Island to the main- 110° from the eastern extremity of the south pier and is 2,100 land, (2) by another point drawn from the north point of Ba- feet distant. FIGURE VI 27. Jesselton. Looking west at the pier. The buildings are the customhouse, warehouses and quarters for coolie labor. No date. ONI 129-247. Page VI 28 PORT FACILITIES warehouse No. 1 measured 59 by 50 feet, No. 2, 45 by 37 feet, and No. 3, 50 by 46 feet. There were 26 lighters with a total capacity of 8,000 tons which could be used for loading ships anchored in the stream. (c) Clearance facilities. The roads at Sandakan were as- phalt and well-kept. They were 20 feet wide. The two longest were Leila Road which ran almost west from Sandakan for sev- eral miles, and a road which ran about 17 miles north by north- west into the jungle. There was a small narrow-gauge railway on the pier north- west of the government wharf. Another short line ran 8 miles into the jungle. There was a weekly steamship service to Singapore and local ports, a monthly service to Hong Kong and Australia and bi- monthly service to Manila, Australia, and Hong Kong. The discharge capacity of the port is estimated to have been about 450 short tons (2,000 pounds) per day. (d) Availability of supplies. Water for drinking purposes could be obtained from a hydrant on the government wharf. Beef, bread, and vegetables could be normally obtained in small quantities. Engineering and deck supplies were obtainable. A stock of 160,000 gallons of gasoline was maintained. No oil was avail- able. (e) Repair facilities. There were no drydocks available at Sandakan. There was a patent slip belonging to the British Borneo Timber Company near the pier. It had an extreme length of 400 feet, and a cradle 150 feet long. The draft on the keel blocks was 5.6 feet forward and 10.6 feet aft at mean high water springs. The lifting power of the slip was 500 tons. Near the patent slip was a small foundry and a shipbuilding yard with two launching berths. The yard was about 1,800 feet FIGURE VI 28. Jesselton. northeast of the government wharf. Lighters up to 100 tons dis- Looking southwest at the railroad tracks on the pier. placement had been built in this yard. No date. ONI 129-452. (3) Linkas (Tarakan) Tarakan Island (3° 17' N, 117° 35' E, BA 3577, HO 3095). A cone and ball tide signal was hoisted on a small mast on The port of Linkas is on Tarakan Island 2 miles from the center of the government pier to show the state of the tide to Tarakan (FIGURE VI - 32) and was primarily an oil exporting approaching vessels. The cone point down indicated flood tide; port. the cone point up, ebb tide; the ball, slack water. There was a radio station 3 miles from the landing in a At Sandakan the spring range is 4 feet. The tidal currents slight depression 900 feet northeast of the road from Linkas turn with the time of high and low water by the shore, At to Pamoesian. springs the ebb artains a maximum velocity of 11/4 knots. (4) Harbor. Depths are ample, and deep draft vessels (b) Landing facilities. The only important wharf was (drawing at least 30 feet) could come alongside the oil docks at the property of the government (FIGURE VI - 30). It was sub- all times. There were no bars in the channel and the entrance stantially built, 450 feet long, and for 225 feet had a width of was well marked. In normal times pilotage was compulsory. 44 feet. The remainder was built against reclaimed land. The The limits of the port of Linkas are defined as follows: those depth alongside was 19 feet at mean low water springs. Twenty waters within a circle with a radius of 1.5 miles described from feet in front of the wharf there was a depth of 23 feet at mean the head of the north wharf. low water springs. By breasting off for this distance vessels The harbor is seçure in all weather. drawing 26 feet could use the wharf at high water. Vessels Ships could anchor safely in 66 to 72 feet of water close to loaded or discharged either alongside or by lighter. Electricity the pier, and further offshore there is reported to be space for was available. 12 to 15 1,800 foot berths in 42 feet and many berths in 24 Near the shipyard about 1,800 feet northeast of the govern- to 30 feet. These depths are believed to be at mean lower low ment wharf there was a pier with a depth of 11 feet at its head water. (FIGURE VI . 31). On it was a 15-ton fixed hand crane. The Another anchorage north of Linkas can accommodate a large coal dock west of the government wharf has been demolished. number of destroyers or submarines. The entrance has two In addition, near Sandakan, there were four small jetties, pri- channels. The least depth in either is 36 feet, the least width vately owned. 1/2 a mile. There were good storage facilities at the wharf. A bonded The port was well marked by a light vessel, 3 lights, a store under the customhouse measured 70 by 61 feet. The wharf beacon, and 2 light buoys. They were as follows: FIGURE VI 29 JANIS 155 PORT OF FROM: SURVEY OF NORTH BORNEO, BRUNEI AND SARAWAK, WAR DEPARTMENT, 530-676, JUNE 15, 1943 SANDAKAN 0 200 400 600 800 1000 YARDS RESIDENCY 0 MEMORIAL - - a. ROAD A T HOSPITAL * ****** BARRACKE as - - / se SCHOOL J ROMAN CHTHOLIC I FAB OFFICE seve JALAN AMPAT POLICE STATION READ YORK STATE Buier They - GOVERNMENT Saluting OFFICER littery COURT NONE STATE o FORT PRYER / Department MARKET DRAME OF RECREATION E JALAN BRITISH BORNED COS BLIPWAY AND ENGINEERING WORKS - GROUND court AND VICARAGE HOUSE - LANDING STAM 110° 120° 130° MYNY SHOWN PRAYA SANDAKAN BARRACKE I $ LANDING PHILIPPINES Menika HARBOR 0 I LICENSE \ LANDING STAGE custime OFFICE as CUSTOMS BOAT suit 10 OFFICE 10" LEGA ROAD LANDING STAGE N SALTING BORRIO Sendagen LANDING START 0 BORNEO 110° 120 130° NO. A-3226-RA oss LITHOGRAPHED IN THE REPRODUCTION BRANCH. oss 4 APRIL 1944 FIGURE VI 29. Sandahan. Map of Port of Sandskan. FIGURE VI - 30. Sandakan. Air view of the government wharf looking NNW. 1935-1936. ONI 130-208. FIGURE VI - 31. Sandakan. Looking ESE at the shipyard pier. 1936. ONI 187-994. Page VI 30 PORT FACILITIES Tarakan Pilor Light Vessel 14' 30" N, 117° 52' 30" E). at Linkas. The northern pier was about 1,050 feet long with a a two masted black vessel with "Tarakan" painted in white letters depth at the head of the pier of 30 feet at mean low water on the side. It showed a flashing white light (220 candlepower; period 15 seconds, flashing 3 seconds, eclipsed 12 seconds) 59 feet springs (FIGURE VI - 33). The southern pier was 1,362 feer above high water and was visible for 12 miles. A fixed red light long with a depth of 33 feet at mean low water springs along over a fixed white light indicated that pilots were not available. side its seaward face (FIGURE VI - 34). However, one report Linkas approach range-front (3° 14' N, 117° 37' E), a fixed red light (30 candlepower) on a white iron framework 33 indicates that the depths given above may have been increased feet high, visible for 7 miles. by dredging to 39 feet. Both piers were 6 feet above water at Linkas approach range-rear, a flashing white light period 3 high tide. Ships lay at the head of the T-shaped piers and tied seconds, flashing 1 second, eclipse 2 seconds, 130 candlepower) on a white iron frame 59 feer high. The light was visible for 12 up to mooring pilings on each side. miles. On the south pier there was a crane of 10-ton capacity mount- The 2 range lights were 3,000 feet apart. ed on tracks, and a boat hoisting gear capable of lifting a 50. Mengachu point light, a fixed red light (20 candlepower) on a white iron framework 26 feet high. It was on the edge of a reef foot motor launch. A floating crane of 15-ton capacity was on the west side of the point at 3° 15' N, 117° 37' E and was normally moored between the piers. visible for 6 miles. A warehouse had been built at the end of the north pier. It A black concrete beacon with a truncated cone top marking a extended south for about 60 feet along the water front. shoal with a depth of 18 feet and about 2,025 feet west from the head of the northern pier. (c) Clearance facilities. There was good road about 5 A light buoy, painted white, moored on the eastern side of a miles long which connected the piers and the town to the oil shoal with a depth of 19.5 feet which lay about 1,500 feet south fields. of the outer end of the northern pier at Linkas. A light buoy painted black, marking a shoal with a depth of A narrow-gauge railroad, on the south pier, led to the oil 19.5 feet of water about 1/2 mile south of the northern pier. fields. There were no railroad tracks on the north pier. Tides vary but are dominantly semi-diurnal. The spring Weekly steamship service to Surabaya was maintained by range is 93 feet. During May and June and November and steamers of 1,500-2,500 gross tons. December the highest possible tide that can be expected is 2.2 Linkas was almost entirely an oil port but discharge capacity feet above the mean level. The lowest possible tide that can be for general cargo is estimated to have been about 225 short tons excepted is about 4.5 feet below the mean level and occurs at all (2,000 pounds) per day. semi-diurnal spring tides. (d) Availability of supplies. Water for domestic purposes (b) Landing facilities. There were two T-shaped piers was obtained from rainfall, each house having its own supply FIGURE VI - 33. Tarakan. Looking south-southeast at the North pier. The vessel is the Resolute with a draft of 28,1 feet. No date. OSS 56584. FIGURE VI 32 IANIS 155 117°36' SOUTH TARAKAN ISLAND FROM: TOPOGRAFISCHE DIENST, BATAVIA, 1936 PRINCIPAL HIGHWAY SETTLED AREA Djoewata SECONDARY ROAD OIL FIELD TRAIL OIL TANKS A 176 SPOT HEIGHT ON FEET) 1' 12 : e 176 . EXOMETERS 117°N' A 334 A 344 3" 201 A 220 % AIRFIELD Peningki-baroe Karanganjar Simpangtiga Terakan Klapa District A 295 7 Lingkas Sibengkok RR 3" 5. Latange 18° : A Peningki 117°W 117"38 NO. 8876 COMPLED AND DRAWN - THE BRANCH OF RESEARCH AND ANALYSIS, cas 19 APRIL - LITHOGRAPHED - THE REPRODUCTION BRANCH, oss FIGURE VI + 32. Linkas (Tarakan). ,Map of Tarakan. PORT FACILITIES Page VI 31 FIGURE VI 34. Tarakan. Looking southwest at the South pier. The liner is bunkering from the Shell installations. No date, ONI 165-053. reservoir. The industrial supply was pumped from the Pamoe- 123°5'10"E sian River to a reservoir on the top of a hill 1/4 of a mile south of the pumping station. This water was not suitable for drink- ing purposes. Water was piped onto both piers. The connec- Gorontalo R. tions were of 3-inch caliber. Salt water for fire fighting was sup- I plied by a pump house on the north pier. GORONTALO BONE Food supplies were available in small quantities. At the north pier fuel oil could be obtained through two 6- inch lines and one 4-inch line (standard fittings); on the south pier there were two 10-inch lines and one 6-inch line. The pipeline was laid alongside the road which ran from the pier to Botu VICINITY MAP SCALE OF MILES the oil field. The maximum simultaneous discharge to both Lojar piers was 7,200 pounds per hour. The maximum discharge to the south pier alone was 4,800 pounds per hour. It was dis- Roads o Lighthouse charged by gravity, forced feed, or both. No gasoline was pro- duced at Tarakan; that needed for local consumption was ob- tained at Balik Papan. There was a good ice plant and a distillery. Power was ob- tained from the electricity plant. Gorentale (e) Repair facilities. The only repair facilities available were at the oil field (Pamoesian). There were no drydocks at Linkas. PORT FACILITIES AT E. Northern Celebes Sector. GORONTALO, CELEBES SCALE OF FEET 123°3'10"E 300 o 300 600 1200 (1) Gorontalo, Celebes Island (0° 30' N, 123 03' E). Propared by the Board of Engineers For SOURCE N.H. CHART Rivers and Marbors, Corps of Engineers NO. 305 Gorontalo is on the north coast of the Gulf of Tomini, 2 APRIL 1944 miles northward of Gorontalo roads, on the tongue of land at FIGURE VI 35. Gorontalo. the confluence of the Bolango and Bone Rivers, the united flow Sketch showing location of Gorontalo (inset) and port plan showing of which forms the Gorontalo River (FIGURE VI . 35). The location of facilities. Gorontalo River discharges into the head of Gorontalo Roads. There are steep mountains on both sides of the mouth, with a the lighthouse on the east shore, is 425 yards wide and has wide plain between them at the junction of the Bolango and depths of 70 fathoms, decreasing to 30 fathoms near the head, Bone rivers. where it is about 200 yards wide. Silt deposited by the Goron- talo River has reduced the depth to 3 feet or less at the ex- (4) Harbor. Gorontalo roads, the harbor for Gorontalo, treme north end of the inlet. is a natural inlet in the mountainous coast, receding northward The roadstead affords poor anchorage on account of the about 530 yards. The entrance, between Batoe Lajar and great depths, limited space for maneuvering, and the strong Page VI 32 PORT FACILITIES current from the river. There were 3 mooring buoys on the east (2) Manado, Celebes Island (1° 30' N, 124° 50' E). side, and 4 buried anchors on the east shore for shore moorings. Manado is at the head of Manado Bay, on the southern side Vessels should not pass northward of the northernmost buoy, of the mouth of the Manado River, near the northeastern as the depths in 1925 were considerably less than shown on the extremity of Celebes Island (FIGURE VI - 39 and PLAN 62). It chart. During the south monsoon, strong winds cause a heavy was the principal town of the Minahasa district, exporting about sea and allow little opportunity for vessels to anchor on the 3,000 tons of copra monthly, in addition to coffee, rubber, and west side of the anchorage. On the east side vessels obtain shel- other commodities. There were no wharves for large vessels. ter by lying as close as possible to the shore. The best berth is in Landing facilities consisted of a basin for praus, inside the river a small bight on the east side, off the sheds of the K. P. M., mouth, and a wharf south of the river entrance. where vessels bring a stern hawser to the buried anchors, haul- (a) Harbor. The port is an open roadstead at the head ing close under the shore (FIGURE VI 36). Small coastal ves- of Manado Bay. The prau harbor is an artificial basin located sels moor southward of this place. Vessels can moor farther in- on the left bank of the Manado River at its mouth. side close to the bank of the river, dropping the starboard anchor Manado Bay is about 7 miles wide between Pisok Point and in 8 to 10 fathoms, veering 45 to 60 fathoms of chain, and Kalasei Point and extends eastward about 4 miles. Depths are dropping the port anchor in about 30 fathoms. A small stern great except close under the shore. There are no outlying shoals hawser may be brought ashore. There is also anchorage out- or dangers. The reef projecting 800 yards westward of Pisok side the river with the lighthouse bearing from 12° to 34°, Point is steep and the greater part dries at low water. Sario distant 200 to 300 yards. The coast reef here is very steep Reef, 1/2 mile southward of the light, extends about 700 yards (FIGURE VI - 37). offshore. The 10-fathom contour is close to the coast reef. The bay is open to the west and northwest. High hilly land flanks it on the northeast, the higher mountains on the east and south. Manado River is shallow, but can be entered at high water by craft drawing 5 feet. After heavy rains there is generally a very strong current from the river. A stone breakwater, at the mouth of the Manado River on the right bank, was 498 feet long. Another, on the left bank, was 205 feet long. The prau harbor, about 350 feet long and 150 feet wide, was used by sea-going praus drawing 61/2 feet. Although the bay is spacious and free from danger, it affords an insecure anchorage during the northwest monsoon, particu- larly from December through February. A group occulting white light, 39 feet above high water and visible 10 miles, was located near the beach south of the Manado River. Fixed green and red lights were shown from the heads of the north and south breakwaters, respectively. FIGURE VI 36. Gorontalo. The tide varies from 2 to 7 or 8 feet. View showing vessel at anchor on east side of Gorontalo Roads. The climate is healthful. The mean temperature is 79°, maximum 97°, and minimum 65°; the average annual rainfall A flashing white light was shown from the east bank of the is 104.8 inches. The driest months are August and September roadstead, and the wettest from December to February. From December Tides are both diurnal and semi-diurnal, the latter predomi- through February, winds from northwest and west-northwest nating. Spring springs rise 2½ feet, and neaps, from I to 1½ raise such high sea and swell that communication with the shore feet. is entirely interrupted. During the south monsoon the temperature is generally be- low 70° in the morning and seldom rises to more than 85°, (b) Landing facilities. There were no wharves for large During the north monsoon the temperature is higher. The aver- vessels. Alongside the prau basin there were 2 sets of landing age annual rainfall is 47,8 inches. steps, with a depth of 2 feet alongside. The basin was served by (b) Landing facilities. A pier was located on the west side a 1-ton crane. of the roadstead. A wharf, about 210 feet long, was located on the southern The K. P. M. had some sheds on the east side of the harbor. side of the river entrance, which could be used from 3 hours Warehouses on the west side were damaged by enemy planes on before to 3 hours after high water. December 27, 1941. On the west side of the prau harbor was the K. P. M. ware- Lighters were available (FIGURE VI - 38), but no tugboats. house. On the east side and also on the opposite side of the river A small steamer of the Gorontalo Commercial Association were large copra sheds. A Socony warehouse was located on would render assistance, if necessary. the right bank of the river, near the root of the northern break- (c) Clearance facilities. Vessels of the K. P. M. called water. regularly. The roads were well-kept and lighted. A lighterage company owned 24 lighters of from 4 to 15 (d) Availability of supplies. Water was bad and difficult tons capacity. There was a Government wrecking tug of about to obtain. There were no facilities for supplying it to vessels. 150 horse-power, and a steam waterboar of 18 tons capacity. PORT FACILITIES Page VI - 33 FIGURE VI - 37. Gorontalo. View of Gorontalo Roads, looking south-southeast, showing pier. 1942. Page VI 34 PORT FACILITIES FIGURE VI 38. Gorontalo. View of harbor showing type of lighters based at Gorontalo. 1937. " - - for - - Corpo SOCONY il was N Tondano River KRM Whos (c) Clearance facilities. K. P. M. and Java-China-Japan What line vessels called regularly. The roads were good. Coolies were M AN A D o used to load lighters. (d) Availability of supplies. Drinking water was avail- ICH 10 able. A waterboat of 18 tons capacity could deliver about 10 tons per hour, but with any sea running this operation was diffi- cult. l'at' Five #: Fuel oil was scarce and could be obtained only in small quan- tities. At the Shell yard, 3,600 feet south of Manado River, short pipes extended down the shore into the sea and were con- MANADO BAY Cre MANADO nected to submarine pipe lines, permitting ships to discharge same REEP MANADO, CELEBES SCALE OF FEET and refuel about 900 feet offshore. Coal was not obtainable. 500 o soo 1,000 Relessi VICINITY MAP (e) Repair facilities. About 1,200 feet east of the south . SCALE of eun 1 OBJECTIVE FOLDER NO. 49 order APRIL 1944 breakwater was the K. P. M. slipway. On the open beach, 1,050 FIGURE VI 39. Manado. feet north of the north breakwater, was the former Japanese Map showing location of Manado (inset) and port plans showing slipway. Repairs to small boats and small metal castings could location of facilities. be made. PORT FACILITIES Page VI 35 62. Minor Ports VI 41). It was the principal trading center on the north coast of Weda Bay. A small pier provided the only facilities for land- A. Halmahera Sector. ing. (1) Weda, Halmabera Island (0° 20' N, 127° 52' E). Weda is on the western shore of Weda Bay, at the base of the southern arm of Halmahera (FIGURE VI 40). It was im- portant as a storage place for copra and jungle products. Port facilities consisted of a wharf, with a warehouse, located about 1/4 mile northeast of the village. (a) Harbor. Weda roads, the habor located in the northwestern corner of Weda Bay, is entirely open and affords no shelter during the southeast monsoon. Jef and Koelefoe is- HALMAHERA lands, as well as the mainland shore, are fringed by drying reefs. Beacons mark the edges of the reefs adjacent to the channels CASH and detached shoals south and southeast of Koelefoe. Depths in the harbor are from 6½ to 11 fathoms. WEDA ⑉ HALMAHERA VICINITY MAP REALE OF WILES - = GAMBOENGI, HALMAHERA St... stone Maidi Day Co., seral SCALE OF MILES send to the - of Englosers Fax - BAT SOUNDINGS . FATHOMS - - Members, Cerge - Registers SOURCE CHART NO.SOBE APRIL 1944 VIGINITY MAP JEF SEALE IF WILES FIGURE VI 41. Gamsoengi. Map showing location of Gamsoengi (inset) and port plan showing location of facilities. (a) Harbor. The harbor is in Gamsoengi (Patani) KOCLEPOE 1. roads, an open roadstead on the north shore of Weda Bay, 9½ miles west-northwest of Ngolopopo Point, the southeastern WSDA extremity of Halmahera. It is exposed to winds from east-south- PORT FACILITIES AT east, through south, to west-northwest. The shore is bordered WEDA, HALMAHERA SCALE OF FEET by a drying reef. The bottom slopes steeply, the 10-fathom o 1500 3000 contour being about 200 yards from the beach. A 1-fathom TERRAIN STUDY NO. TI APRIL 1944 patch lies close off the village. FIGURE VI 40. Weda. Weda Bay is described under Topic 62, A, (1), (a). Map showing location of Weda (inset) and port plan showing Anchorage is available in 30 fathoms, over coral bottom, location of facilities. with the pier bearing northwest. There is both a diurnal and a semidiurnal tide. The spring Weda Bay is the large indentation in the coast line between highs of the 2 tides may coincide. The highest water level OC- the southeastern and southern peninsula. curs in June and December. The maximum rise and fall that Small vessels can anchor in front of the wharf in depths of can be expected are, respectively, about 2 feet above and 1 foot 6½ to 8 fathoms. Larger ships can anchor off the town in 18 below mean sea level. Tidal currents set along the coast but are fathoms, over coral. These anchorages are not protected from not strong. southerly or southeasterly winds. (b) Landing facilities. A small wooden pier extended out The currents, setting northward along the shore with a rising on the drying reef abreast the village. tide and southward with a falling tide, are weak. (c) Clearance facilities. Vessels of the K. P. M. called No data are available concerning tides. regularly. Rainfall is comparatively heavy during every month of the year. The annual rainfall is 86 inches with 14 inches in July, (3) Inggelang, Inggelang Island (0° 34' N, 128° 28' the wettest month, and 3 inches in November, the month of E). least rainfall. Inggelang is on the south shore of Inggelang Island, off the (b) Landing facilities. A wharf extended from the shore east coast of Halmahera, near the southern entrance point of about 1/4 mile north of town. A warehouse was located near Boeli Bay (FIGURE 42). The only facility was a pier for the wharf. proas. (c) Clearance facilities. Vessels of the K. P. M. called reg- (a) Harbor. The harbor is in the narrow channel along ularly. A trail connected Weda and Saketa, across the island. the south side of Inggelang Island, about 11/2 miles northwest of Inggelang Point, the southern entrance point of Boeli Bay. (2) Gamsoengi (Patani), Halmabera Island (0° 16' N, The channel, with controlling depths of about 3½ fathoms, is 128° 45' E). about 300 yards wide. It is well sheltered, but the western end Gamsoengi is on the north shore of Weda Bay, near the ex- was not marked and is dangerous. tremity of the southeastern arm of Halmahera Island (FIGURE Boeli Bay, which is 31 miles wide at the entrance between Page VI. 36 PORT FACILITIES 13 is II N II BOELI II & 10 7 43 7 7 8 e 6 A INGGELANG 106 22 32 23 16 4d 65 22 INGGELANG 39 24 Tjef 42 at it di 42 st N 22 D 6 Pier 5. 46 It 2L 7 . 22 a it of F at at 13 21 25 2 at N 24 22 of If 65 4 54 Seal 2) 24 24 13 5 21 - 54 7 44 26 6 4d at WATAM / Inggelang Point BOELI-SERANI BOELI BAY HALMAHERA INGGELANG PORT FACILITIES AT INGGELANG, HALMAHERA 0°34'N., 128° 39'E. SCALE OF MILES WEDA WEDA BAY o VICINITY MAP SCALE OF MILES 10 0 IO GAMSOENGI SOURCE: H.O. CHART NO. 3081 APRIL 1944 Prepared by the Board of Engineers For Rivers and Harbors, Corps of Engineers SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS FIGURE VI 42. Inggelang. Map showing location of Inggelang (inset) and port plan showing location of facilities. Inggelang and Wajamli points, has numerous shoals and reefs east coast of Halmahera (FIGURE VI - 43). The village is di- inside the 100-fathom curve. vided into 2 sections, Boeli-serani and Boeli-islam, It was a Well sheltered anchorage may be found in the channel off shipping center for copra and jungle products. The landing the town. place was at a pier about 1/2 mile north of the village. Tidal currents in the channel off the "village may attain a (4) Harbor. The harbor is in Boeli roads, an open road- velocity of 1½ knots. In Boeli Bay, tides are both diunnal and stead in the northwestern corner of Boeli Bay, north of Pakal semidiurnal, but the latter predominates. and Gei islands. The store is fronted by patches of drying reef. The spring lows of the two tides almost coincide at times. The A channel, formerly marked by beacons, leads through the dry. lowest water level occurs in June or July, and in December or ing reefs to the pier. The channel is about 4½ fathoms deep January. The maximum rise and fall that can be expected are, over a bottom width of about 75 yards. respectively, about 2 feet above and 3 feet below mean sea level. Boeli Bay is described under Topic 62, A, (3), (a). The best The high water interval is 6 hours 8 minutes, and the spring anchorage is in 11½ to 131/2 fathoms, west of the 5- range is 5 feet. In the inner parts of Boeli Bay, tidal currents fathom shoal lying south-southeast of a conspicuous shed near are noticeable but they do not exceed one knot. The average the boat pier. The annual rainfall is about 100 inches, with annual rainfall at Inggelang is 81 inches with 9 inches in July, 12½ inches in June, the wettest month, and 4 inches in Octo- the wettest month, and 3½ inches in October, the month of ber, the month of least rainfall. least rainfall. (b) Landing facilities. A small pier for native vessels ex- (b) Landing facilities. A pier for proas was located in tended about 100 feet across the fringing reef, about 1/2 mile front of the village. north of the town. (4) Boeli-serani, Halmabera Island (0° 52' N, 128° A large shed was located near the shore end of the pier. 18' E). (c) Clearance facilities. Vessels of the K. P. M. called at Boeli-serani lies on the northwest shore of Boeli Bay, on the Boeli. PORT FACILITIES Page VI 37 (5) Lolobata, Halmabera Island (1° 15' N, 128° 06' front of town drops off steeply to 16 fathoms, with the 5. E). fathom contour within 1/4 mile of shore. A fringing reef bor- Lolobata is on the north shore of Wasile Bay, an arm of Kaoe ders the shore in front of the village. Anchorage is available Bay, on the north coast of Halmahera (FIGURE VI - 44). It in front of the town in depchs of 16 to 20 fathoms over mud had no commercial importance until recently, when consider- and sand. able shipping activity was observed. On 24 November 1943, at (b) Landing facilities. Photographs of 15 February 1944 least 11 freighters and transports, totalling about 30,000 tons, show 3 new piers in the vicinity of Lolobata (FIGURE VI . 45). and on 15 January 1944, 19 ships were reported in the area. The landing facilities were located east of the village. (6) Goeroea, Halmabera Island (1° 08' N, 128° 05' (a) Harbor. The harbor is an open roadstead. There was E). no port as such. The harbor consisted merely of such anchorage Goeroea is on the south side of Wasile Bay, an arm of Kaoe facilities as might be offered by Wasile Bay, which in itself pro- Bay, on the north coast of Halmahera (FIGURE VI - 44). It vides protection in general from most weather. The bottom in was of no commercial importance, but considerable shipping shed BOELI-SERA BOELI- ISLAM, PORT PLAN SCALE OF FEET 1,000 o L000 2,000 BOELI-SERAN / / a BOELI BAY VICINITY MAP BOELI-SERANI, HALMAHERA SCALE OF MILES as o 5 2 SOURCE: H. o. CHART NO. 3084 APRIL 1944 Proporal " - seart of Implosers For - aren, comps et Englosers SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS Ce Cersi, # 1 , Sond, SI Stees . FIGURE VI 43. Boeli-Serani. Map showing location of Boeli-Serani and port plan showing location of facilities (inset). Page VI. 38 PORT FACILITIES depth of 3½ fathoms. This bank is separated from the reefs HALMAHERA along the eastern shore of the entrance by another deep but narrow channel. The channel west of Boebale Island is not SEA recommended because of several shoals and the currents. The maximum velocity of the current on both sides of Boebale Is- I land is 11/2 knots. When the winds blow from the direction opposite to the set of the current, a difficult sea is experienced. Anchorage is available in 22 fathoms, over mud and sand, southwest of Babem Island. Small vessels can anchor in 9 4 LOLORATA fathoms or less behind Babem Island. may BAY (b) Landing facilities. No facilities are reported. Land- KAGE ings were probably made on the beach. GOENDEA (c) Clearance facilities. Vessels of the K. P. M. called & regularly. 0 FAKEBELAKA Res (8) Bobaneigoe (Bobane Igoe), Halmabera Island (0° 52' N, 137° 40' E). PORTS ON Bobaneigoe is at the head of Kaoe Bay on the north coast of KAOE BAY, HALMAHERA Halmahera (FIGURE VI 44). The town is strategically lo- SCALE OF MILES e 6 is cated on the northeastern side of the narrow isthmus which IDENTE APRIL 044 - " - - of Engineers - Risers - - less of separates Kaoe Bay from Dodinga, on the west coast of Hal- mahera, distant about 2 miles. There was a pier in front of the FIGURE VI 44. Kaoe Bay. village. Map showing location of ports. 12875 , NF 10 activity has been observed recently, details of which are dis- 10 6 st Name Tabako 00 CORAL, M MUD, is cussed under Topic 62, A, (5). The landing was in front of the 04 21 5 SAND. - village. is - 5) LOLOBATA IS 10 (a) Harbor. The harbor includes Goeroea Bay and the 21 17 16 12 open roadstead in Wasile Bay, off the village. Goeroea Bay is a 16 LOLOBATA PT. 20 13 - Piers small bight on the south side of Wasile Bay, immediately south 12 19 13 of Goeroea Point and about 5 miles inside the entrance to 22 27 & Wasile Bay. 22 31 22 Wasile Bay is described under Topic 62, A, (5), (a). 37 IS Id N 31 Vessels can anchor in Wasile Bay in depths of 16 to 22 27 WASILE BAY fathoms over mud. 32 28 21 (b) Landing facilities. Photographs of 15 February 1944 32 14. show a new pier at Goeroea village (FIGURE VI- 45). ID 27 is 31 6 (7) Akeselaka (Ake Selaka), Halmabera Island (1° 02' 34 24 Dodage N, 127° 57' E). GOEROEA Pier 10 34 z e Akeselaka is on the southeastern shore of Kaoe Bay, an in- II GOEROEA BAT 16 dentation in the north coast of Halmahera (FIGURE VI- 44). 10 GOEROEA Sosbeim It was a village of some importance and the storage place for jungle products. No landing facilities are reported. (4) Harbor. The harbor is in Akeselaka roads, about € 2 miles north of Roni, a small islet lying close to the eastern 30° shore of Kaoe Bay. The bottom drops off somewhat steeply 5 5 with the 10-fathom contour about 250 yards offshore. A reef is reported to lie 1 mile north of Babem (Akeselaka) (Babing) LOLOBATA and GOEROEA Island and about 870 yards offshore. The channel behind HALMAHERA Babem Island is about 9 fathoms deep and about 150 yards SCALE OF MILES wide, 0 2 3 4 5 Kaoe (Kau) Bay is entered at Boebale (Bobale) Island SOURCE: H. 0. CHART NO. 3083 where it is 4½ miles wide, extending 33 miles southwestward SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS to its head, where it is separated by a narrow isthmus from Do- APRIL 1944 dinga Bay, on the west coast of Halmahera. The inner part of Prepared by the Board of Engineers For Rivers and Marbors, Corps of Engineers the bay has a maximum depth of 270 fathoms. The main chan- r 126's ID nel into Kaoe Bay is close east of Boebale Island. It is deep in the fairway, but there is a 5½ fathom patch on its western FIGURE VI 45. Lolobato. side, and the eastern side is formed by a shoal bank with a least Port plan showing location of facilities at Lolobato and Goeroes. PORT FACILITIES Page VI 39 (a) Harbor. The harbor is in Bobane Bay, a small but = well-protected inlet at the head of Kaoe Bay. The bay is about Kame £ 1 mile long, southeast-northwest. The entrance, opening north- I northeasterly, is about 1/2 mile long and 350 yards wide. Chart- a " it ed depths are from 5 to 12 fathoms in the bay and from 12 Kimsisha N 34 M to 18 fathoms in the entrance. Except for a small drying reef 21 I in the northeastern corner the shores of the bay are fronted by white mark I I 22 rt mud shoals. 12 Kaoe Bay is described under Topic 62, A, (7), (a). Djest N 44 a I 4) N IS Anchorage is available in either end of the bay in 6½ 34 x 7 41) is 21 10 Pier to 9 fathoms, over mud. The recommended anchorage is in 6½ 21 21 31 6 & # 44 fathoms, over mud, in the eastern end with the entrance points KAOE I 16 22 I 24 in range and the pier at Bobaneigoe bearing somewhar east of at 32 42 8 IS south. S a a (b) Landing facilities. A small pier extended from shore I = : 56 in front of town to a charted depth of 3 feet in the mud shoal 7 (FIGURE VI 46). 4) is hrd hard 17 (c) Clearance facilities. A road led from the pier to Pasir- M mud poetih (Pasir Poetih), east of the entrance to Bobane Bay, and - = 7 10 SOUNDINGS a trail led to Dodinga, on the opposite side of the isthmus. Tg. Boleo IN (9) Kaoe, Halmabera Island (1° 10' N, 127° 54' E). 10 FATHOMS 4 Kaoe is on the west shore of Kaoe Bay, which indents the north coast of Halmahera (FIGURE VI 44). The village was PORT FACILITIES AT the most important trading center for Kaoe Bay. There was a pier at Kaoe. KAOE, HALMAHERA l* 10 N., 127* 54' E. (a) Harbor. Kaoe (Kau) roads, the harbor, is an open SCALE OF MILES roadstead about 9 miles southwest of Boebale Island, which is 1/2 o SOURCE: H. o. CHART NO. 3083 APRIL 1944 M Mud N Tg.Bori SOUNDINGS IN 36 59 FATHOMS 22 FIGURE VI 47. Kaoe. 75 42 Port plan showing location of facilities at Kaoe. 12 42 located at the entrance to Kaoe Bay. The pier is approached by a 94 channel which follows the shore to the northward. The en- 33 32 trance, about 1/2 mile north of the pier, was marked by a bea- con on the shore. The bank on the east side of the channel was Koosée 27 22 42 usually marked by poles. The water is shallow near shore and 16 is 25 the bottom slopes gradually to the 5-fathom contour, more than 1 mile offshore in front of the pier. Bigs Pasir Poetih Kaoe Bay is described under Topic 62, A, (7), (a). An- chorage may be had about 1½ miles off the pier in depths of more than 5 fathoms over mud and sand. Vessels must approach 34 slowly while sounding and anchor when 5½ fathoms is ob- Pier tained. There is both a diurnal and semidiurnal tide, but the BOBANEIGOE latter predominates. The spring lows of the two tides may co- PORT FACILITIES AT incide. The lowest low water level occurs between January and BOBANEIGOE, HALMAHERA March and berween July and October. The maximum rise and '0° 52 N., 127° 40'E. fall that can be expected are, respectively, about 2.6 above and SCALE OF MILES o 3.9 below mean sea level. The high water interval is 7 hours, 21 minutes. SOURCE: H.O. CHART NO. 3083 APRIL 1944 (b) Landing facilities. A pier extended from shore at the Prepared by the scard of Engineers For north end of the village to a charted depth of 11/2 feet of water Rivers and Marbors, Corps of Engineers (FIGURE VI 47). FIGURE VI 46. Bobaneigoe. (c) Clearance facilities. A road ran northward for over Port plan showing location of facilities at Bobaneigoe. 15 miles. Vessels of the K. P. M. called regularly. Page VI 40 PORT FACILITIES (10) Miti Island (1° 34' N, 128° 04' E). (11) Tobelo, Halmabera Island (1° 44' N, 128° 01' E). Miti Island lies about 1 mile off the eastern shore of the Tobelo is on the east coast of the northwestern arm of Hal- northwest arm of Halmahera about 9 miles south of Tobelo mahera (FIGURE VI 48). It was an important export point for (FIGURE VI 44). The town of Miti is on the western shore, copra. There were 2 piers, one north and the other south of near the southern end of the island. the village. (a) Harbor. The harbor is on the west side of the island. (a) Harbor. The harbor in Tobelo roads is formed and The best approach to the island is around its northern end, be- sheltered by Koemoekoemoe (Koemoe) Island and the reef tween Miti and the drying reefs to the northward. The shoals which connects it with Halmahera. Charted depths are 6 are well marked by discoloration. Proas enter from the south- fathoms or less with controlling depths in the passages of 31/4 ward, between Magalihoe (Makaliso) and Goemoelamo fathoms. (Goemi Lamo), 2 small islets between Halmahera and the A fringing reef borders the shore between piers. Several southern end of Miti. shoals are located in the roads and 2 drying reefs lie southwest There is suitable anchorage in 14 fathoms sheltered against of Koemoekoemoe Island. The detached reefs and the shore all but northerly winds, between Miti village and Mawes, on reef on the southeast side of Koemoekoemoe were marked by Halmahera. beacons. (b) Landing facilities. There were no landing facilities Large vessels anchor south of Madode (Toelang) Is- at Miti village, but a jetty is reported to be near the northern land, in depths of 8 to 10 fathoms, approached by channel be- end of the island. tween Koemoekoemoe and the detached drying reef southeast N GALELA MOMOW RFS BAY GALELA OEWARI PT. TOBELO TOBELO ISLANDS SMITIL KATANAS 1°30'N Channel for boats 126°0'E Pier VICINITY MAP SCALE OF MILES 10 o 10 Tobelo 1 KoeMoeKoeMoe Roads ISLAND TOBELO 17 1 Pier 1 OEBOE OEBOE PORT FACILITIES AT TOBELO, HALMAHERA 1 SCALE OF FEET 500 o 500 1500 Prepared by the Board of Engineers For Rivers and Harbors, Corps of Engineers SOURCE:TERRAIN STUDY NO.71 APRIL 1944 FIGURE VI. 48. Tobelo. Map showing location of Tobelo (inser) and port plan showing location of facilities. PORT FACILITIES Page VI 41 of it. Small vessels will find anchorage in the inner harbor. This 3-farhom contour, the basin is about 75 yards wide at its mouth anchorage is approached by way of the channel between Koe- and 110 yards at its widest part by about 250 yards long. In moekoemoe and the two drying reefs southwest of it. front of town the drying reef is about 150 yards wide. The (b) Landing facilities. At the southern end of the village shore in the vicinity drops off steeply. There was a beacon there was a small pier, alongside which there was sufficient on the western side of the entrance and another ashore at the water for boats. North of the village there was another pier head of the basin, with 8 feet of water alongside. Anchorage is available in the basin in depths of 3½ to 5 A building at the southern end of the town, abreast the fathoms over mud or sand. Anchorage is also available outside southern pier, was probably a warehouse. the basin in 16 to 22 fathoms, over sand, but rollers are usually (c) Clearance facilities. A road connected Tobelo with experienced. nearby coastal villages. Vessels of the K. P. M. called regularly. (b) Landing facilities. No piers are reported at Sangowo. Boats can always land safely in the basin. (12) Galela, Halmabera Island (1° 50' N, 127° 51' E). (c) Clearance facilities. Vessels of the K.P.M. called Galela is at the southwestern corner of Galela Bay, on the occasionally. eastern coast of the northwest arm of Halmahera (FIGURE VI- 49). It was the only important village, in the Galela Bay area. (14) Djiko (Wajaboela), Morotai Island (2° 16 N, There were 2 piers south of the town. 128° 12' E). Djiko is at the western extremity of Morotai Island, which INTE lies northeast of Halmshera (FIGURE VI 52). It was the ship- ping port for the entire west coast of Morotai. There was a pier Monte at Djiko on the south side of Wajaboela Point. Wajaboela vil- Tobale TOBELOR lage lies on the northern side of the point, northwestward of the port. MAP (a) Harbor. The harbor is an open roadstead in Waja- boela Bay (roads), which lies south and southwest of Waja- boela Point. The shore is fringed by drying reefs. The water area is obstructed by several drying reefs that offer some pro- GALELA tection against seas from the south. The harbor affords good protection against northerly and easterly winds. The useful water area is small and of irregular shape, the greatest dimen- Case Banga sion being about 1 mile. Depths range from 1 to 8 fathoms in PORT FACILITIES AT front of town and from 8 to 22 fathoms in clear areas among GALELA, HALMAHERA SCALE OF FEET the reefs. 1000 have is - Employers cargo SOURCE APRIL Anchorage is available southeasterly of the pier, inside the drying reefs, in depths of 18 to 22 fathoms, over stone. Small FIGURE VI 49. Galela. craft can probably anchor in the comparatively shallow waters Map showing location of Galela (inset) and port plan showing location of facilities. immediately in front of town. (b) Landing facilities. A pier extended across the drying (a) Harbor. The harbor is in Galela roads at the south- reef in front of Djiko to a charted depth of 2% fathoms (FIG- west corner of Galela Bay. Depths range from 11 to 17 URE VI - 52). The inshore end was built of stones and sand, fathoms. It is sheltered during the southeast monsoon, but is and the seaward end was timber. not safe during the northwest monsoons. (c) Clearance facilities. Vessels of the K. P. M. called Vessels that can use the limited swinging area can anchor in regularly. the bight in depths of 11 to 17 fathoms over fine sand. (d) Availability of supplies. Drinking water can be ob- Tides are both diurnal and semidiurnal but the latter pre- tained, but it is brackish and unclean. dominates. Neither the spring highs nor the spring lows of the 2 tides coincide. The lunitidal interval is 6 hours and 2 min- (15) Djailolo, Halmabera Island (1° 04' N, 127° 28' utes and the spring range is 4 feet. Tidal currents are negli- E). gible. Djailolo is on the west coast of Halmahera (FIGURE VI (b) Landing facilities. A photograph of 17 October 53). The main village lies inland and cannot be seen from the 1943 shows 2 piers projecting from the shore, south of the sea. The beach portion is south of the village, near the pier town (FIGURE VI - 50). (FIGURE VI 54). (c) Clearance facilities. Vessels of the K. P. M. called (a) Harbor. The harbor is a basin on the north side of regularly. Djailolo (Jailolo) Bay, formed and protected by 2 drying reefs. It is about 150 yards wide across its mouth and about 200 yards (13) Sangowo, Morotai Island (2° 06' N, 128° 33' E). long, with depths of 1/2 to 16 fathoms. The controlling depth Sangowo is on the southeast coast of Morotai Island which at the inner end of the harbor is 1/2 fathom. lies northeast of Halmahera (FIGURE VI 51). No landing Djailolo Bay is 31/4 miles wide at the entrance between Ksi- facilities are reported. loepa (Kailupa) and Goeai (Gusi) points. Drying reefs ex- (a) Harbor. The harbor is a small basin in the drying tend more than 300 yards from shore. The bay is open to west reef in front of town with depths of 3½ to 5 fathoms. At the winds. Small vessels anchor in the harbor in 16 fathoms. Large Page VI 42 PORT FACILITIES FIGURE VI 50. Galela. Aerial view of Galela showing location of port facilities. 17 October 1943. vessels can anchor outside the harbor in 16 to 22 fathoms, over (b) Landing facilities. There was a small pier at Mare sand and coral. (FIGURE VI 57). (b) Landing facilities. There was a pier at the head of the harbor, about 590 feet long, with a charted depth of 3 feet (17) Ngofakiaba, Makian Island (0° 22' N, 127° 25' at its head (FIGURE VI - 55). The inshore end for about 540 E). feet was of stone construction. The outer 50 feet was timber. Ngofakiaha is on the northwest shore of Makian Island, (c) Clearance facilities. A good motor road led northward which lies off the west coast of Halmahera, about 8½ miles for about 10 miles. south of Mare Island (FIGURE VI - 56). There was a small pier (16) Mare, Mare Island (0° 35' N, 127 24' E). at the village. Mare is on the cast coast of Mare Island, which lies off the (a) Harbor, The harbor is an open roadstead, on the west- west coast of Halmahera, 2 miles south of Tidore Island (FIG- ern side of the strait between Makian and Halmahera islands. URE VI - 56). There was a small pier at the village. The bottom drops off steeply, with the 10-fathom contour less (a) Harbor. The harbor is an open roadstead, on the than 40 yards offshore. western side of the channel between Mare and Halmahera Is- There is good anchorage in 16 to 33 fathoms, over sand, off land. The shore in the vicinity of the town is bordered by a the village. tringing reef. The bottom of sand and rocks, drops off steeply (b) Landing facilities. A small pier for boats extended with the 10-fathom contour about 100 yards offshore. approximately 50 feet in front of the village (FIGURE VI - 58). Anchorage is available in 27 fathoms off the village. Rollers may be troublesome at this landing at times. PORT FACILITIES Page VI 43 (18) Batoela, Halmahera Island (0° 01' S, 127° 42' E). (19) Waisabatang (Sabatang), Batjan Island (0° 26' S, Batoela is on the west coast of Halmahera Island, abrease the 127° 39' E). southern part of Kajoa (Ngailo) Island (FIGURE VI - 56). Waisabatang is on the northeast coast of Batjan Island, west- The town is not visible from seaward. From the charts, there ward of the south arm of Halmahera (FIGURE VI. 56). There appears to be a landing place southwest of the village. was a small pier at the village. (a) Harbor. The harbor is an open roadstead on the west- (a) Harbor. The harbor is in Batoela roads, an open ern side of Patinti Strait, about 2 miles northwest of Toeada roadstead 2 miles south of Tandjoeng Mari-toesa. (Ruige) Point, the northeastern extremity of the island. Patinti The roads affords good anchorage in 16 fathoms. Shelter is Strait separates Batjan and Halmahera islands. The bottom provided against winds from the east. slopes gradually, with the 10-fathom contour about 300 yards from the pier. The shore in front of town is fringed by a drying (b) Landing facilities. A shore installation, having the reef. Except for 2 shoals in front of town, the area is free of appearance of a small pier, is charted southwest of the town. A dangers. shed was available for storage (FIGURE VI. 59). Anchorage is available in 7½ DO 9 fathoms between a drying reef north of the flagstaff and a 3 1/4-fathom patch located outside (c) Clearance facilities. Vessels of the K. P. M. called the 10-fathom contour. There is both a diurnal and a semidiur- regularly. nal tide. The spring highs and the spring lows of the two tides M 128" II 1 336 1 C. Pedangi Sept / 3323 (25 / 1 I Loloda la MOROTAI 4200 << SANGOWE ai HALMAHERA 399 258 Gila of 92 / Momor as 1143 S.Loloda la Tobalo VICINITY MAP SCALE OF MILES - o 2 3 4 5 SANGOWE 95 206 If Godi I Tg. Posi Posi 4 Sambiki 12 < 30 is his 2 23 46 Il 44 & 52 & 34 34 20 40 103 over JARIATION " 29 97 ITS ORDER 142 + 43 NOT INCREASING 130 22 ANNUALLY & s Tg. Baroe ie 73 & - 180 5 5 167 55 32 a M - 128° 37 SANGOWE, MOROTAI I. SCALE OF MILES o S sond Prepared by the Board of Engineers For Rivers and Harbors, Corps of Engineers SOURCE: H.O. CHART NO. 3084 SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS APRIL 1944 FIGURE VI 51. Sangowo. Map showing location of Sangowo (inset) and plan of port. Page VI 44 PORT FACILITIES off aux PSI RADE MINO ISLAND I ? SUAILOLO I sale - par MOROTAI 2019 - N° I Termate - Tidore VICINITY MAP E DIALOLO - BJA/LOLO Deredere " Pier - VICINITY MAP SCALE or MILES cases , 0 1 o Are DJAHOLO KAILOEPA PT BAY DJIKO PORT FACILITIES AT PL DJAILOLO, HALMAHERA SCALE OF MILES 3 GOEAI PT SOURCE OTERRAIN STUDY NO.71 APRIL 1244 - - - - - --- of Englishere FIGURE VI 53. Djailolo. Map showing location of Djailolo (inset) and port plan showing location of facilities. WAJABOELA BAY may coincide. The highest water level occurs in May or June PORT FACILITIES AT and in November or December. The maximum rise and fall DJIKO, MOROTAI ISLAND that may be expected are, respectively, about 2.6 feet above and SCALE OF FEET 1,000 0 1,000 2,000 1.3 feet below mean sea level. SOURCE TERRAIN STUDY NO 71 1419 at (b) Landing facilities. A small pier for boats extended APRIL 1944 across the fringing reef in front of town (FIGURE VI . 60). FIGURE VI 52. Djiko. Map showing location of Djiko (inset) and port plan showing location (20) Laboeba, Batjan Island (0° 38' S, 127 28' E). of facilities. Laboeha is at the head of Laboeha Bay, on the west coast of Batjan Island (FIGURE VI - 56). It was the center of trade for the bay area. There was a pier at Laboeha and another at the ad- joining village of Amasing. FIGURE VI - 54. Djailolo. View showing pier at Djailolo. 1939. PORT FACILITIES Page VI 45 FIGURE VI 55. Djailolo. Aerial view of Djailolo showing location of port facilities. 20 January 1943. (a) Harbor. The harbor is an open roadstead in the north- southwest may occur occasionally, but it never lasts more than east corner of Laboeha Bay. In front of the town, depths are 20 minutes. Otherwise conditions are favorable. generally from 9 to 11 fathoms. The 5-fathom contour is with- (b) Landing facilities. A pier extended about 75 feet in 200 yards of the pier at Laboeha, and within 100 yards of from shore in front of Laboeha to a charted depth of 9 feet. the south end of the village. Shelter is offered from northerly Another pier was located at Amasing, immediately adjoining and easterly winds but the southern monsoon may cause dan- Laboeha on the northwest (FIGURE VI - 61). gerous breakers on shore. Vessels may anchor within 600 yards (c) Clearance facilities. Vessels of the K. P. M. called of the pier in 6½ to 10 fathoms, over soft mud. There is both regularly at Laboeha, which was also a port of call for inter- a diurnal and a semidiurnal tide, but the latter predominates. island vessels. A road led across the island from the village. The tidal range is small and does not affect navigation. During the south monsoon, in July and August, the wind can blow with (21) Penamboean, Batjan Island (0° 43' S, 128° 27' E). considerable strength and cause breakers, rendering communi- Penamboean is about 3 miles south of Laboeha Bay, on the cation with shore difficult at times. During the west monsoon, west coast of Batjan Island (FIGURE VI . 56). It was the site of in January and February, a squall of great strength from the a large plantation. There was a small pier at the settlement. Page VI- 46 PORT FACILITIES ANT HALMAHERA 127'25' be 20° 45° o & 67 los Rabodalo Co CORAL N я S SAND 43 87 54 SOUNDINGS 12 IN I 45 FATHOMS WEDA BAY 10 el 87 R 57 1 0° 32, o 22 7.5.0 Pier § 22 3d PORTS OF # NGOFAKIAHA of SOUTHERN HAL MAHERA 12 have to the have all Englange for SCALE OF MILES 8 - - - impo of - a 104 FIGURE VI 56. Southern Halmabera. § Mosique 10 se 107 Map showing location of ports. PORT FACILITIES AT NGOFAKIAHA, HALMAHERA SCALE OF MILES N° o 1/4 1/2 25 SOURCE: H.O. CHART NO. 3082 APRIL 1944 Prepared by the Board of Engineers For Rivers and Marbors, Corps of Engineers 127'25' Soa Sice € Tolum TIDORE ISLAND flideral Jemy FIGURE VI. 58. Ngofakiaba. 24 43 Toegoesi Port plan showing location of facilities. Soe Dare BI Toleemace 54 As Sela 103 22 52 , 37 21 of = 72 84 109 65 IS 7 16 70 a 20 2 109 BATOELA 141 N 70 50 50 87 los N 24 Pier 7.5 ST A 98 109 R 0 Tree N ss 92 is PORT FACILITIES AT MARE STRAIT N. BATOELA, HALMAHERA 114 43 31 0° 01' 5., 127° 42'E. 109 0 SCALE OF MILES o 1/4 1/2 59 117 21 41 48 104 SOUNDINGS SOURCE: H.O. CHART NO. 3082 45 27 IN APRIL 1944 64 Jerry FATHOMS 974 325 Prepared by the Board of Engineers Far 29 53, M A R E Rivers and Marbors, Corps of Engineers Doe 23 43 65 FIGURE VI- 59. Batoela. 170 Kove 32 70 40 117 64 Port plan showing location of facilities. # 43 TA Kore 54 45 65 % 48 # (a) Harbor. The harbor is a bight, 1/4 mile wide and 65 54 48 51 opening northward, on the eastern side of Batjan Strait, which MARE, MARE ISLAND is used as a protected anchorage. 0° 35'N, 127° 24E. (b) Landing facilities. A small pier, suitable for boats, SCALE OF MILES was located at Penamboean. o 2 (22) Waja, Mandioli Island (0° 43' S, 127° 17' E). SOURCE: H.O. CHART NO. 3081 Waja is on the east coast of Mandioli Island, which lies south- SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS APRIL 1944 west of Batjan Island (FIGURE VI - 56). There was a small Prepared by the Board of Engineers For pier at the village. Rivers and Harbors, Corps of Engineers (a) Harbor. Waja Bay, opening to the eastward off Batjan Strait, used as a boat anchorage and harbor, is compara- n FIGURE VI. 57. Mare. tively shallow. It is about 400 yards wide at its mouth and about Port plan showing location of facilities. 600 yards long, outside the 5-fathom contour. A small area of PORT FACILITIES Page VI 47 lesser depth lies inside the 5-fathom contour. Good shelter The best anchorage was on the axis of-the pier in a depth is offered from all weacher. of 38 fathoms, over mud and sand, but the bottom is steep. Anchorage is available in Waja Bay in depths of 10 to 3 A fixed red light, 11 feet above high water and visible 2 fathoms, over mud and sand. miles, was shown from the head of the pier. (b) Landing facilities. There was a stone pier 426 feet 10" 29' of la 45 127'wo' long, with a depth of 5 feet at the head (FIGURE VI- 63). 39 (c) Clearance facilities. Vessels of the K. P. M. called . 13 SOUNDINGS regularly. IN Substang (d) Availability of supplies. Provisions could be obtained. FATHOMS N 11 (2) Liroeng, (Lirung) Taland Islands (3° 57' N, 126° 20 33 42' E). Liroeng is on the northeast coast of Salebaboe Island, the 4i middle island of the Talaud group (FIGURE VI - 62). There 34 were no piers. Landing was made on the beach. 45 (a) Harbor. The harbor, Liroeng road, is an open road- 14 stead between Salebaboe Island and Sara Ketjil and Sara-besar 21 0° 17 26 34 islands. The 5-fathom curve is about 100 yards off shore at 0° Liroeng. Depths near the center of the roadstead are from 20 R 19 26 to 40 fathoms. % 27 Good anchorage in 16 fathoms, over mud, sand and rocks, , 33 14 is available with the flagstaff at the village bearing 198°. It is 6. safe during both monsoons. 27 Pier At Liroeng road, there is both a diurnal and semidiurnal 21 is WAISABATANG F.S. tide, but the latter predominates. Neither the spring highs nor Tree the spring lows of the 2 tides coincide. The highest water level 29' 127'40' occurs in April or May and in October or November; the low- est, in January or February and in July or August. The maximum PORT FACILITIES AT rise and fall that can be expected are, respectively, about 3 feet WAISABATANG, HALMAHERA above and 3 feet below mean sea level. The currents caused by SCALE OF MILES o 1/4 1/2 the semidiurnal tides set northwestward along the coast around high water and southeastward around low water. They can at- SOURCE H. 0. CHART NO. 3082 APRIL 1944 tain a velocity of 2 to 3 knots. Prepared by the Board of Engineers For Rivers and Marbors, Corps of Engineers 127 28" E. N Osmiti FIGURE VI 60. Waisabatang. Amasing Port plan showing location of facilities. 1 4 4 FABR Suban's F.S. 4 I # Pier P. I = Il 12 (b) Landing facilities. A small pier for proas extended II 24 2121 Tree 24 from shore in front of the town for about 400 feet. st 4d LABOEHA 7 9 7 24 locasi) 8 N 10 . 6 9 Custome shede B. Sangihe-Talaud Sector. a # ID II Pier . 13 10 L A B (1) Beo, Taland Islands (4° 14' N, 126° 49' E). OEHA 9 10, 0°38'N. # II Beo is on the western side of Karakelong Island, the north- jo il 10 10 - B Kelage Pendak ernmost of the Talaud Islands (FIGURE VI- 62). There was a 10 - 10 10 8 pier at the village. 10 12 (a) Harbor. The harbor is an open roadstead on the Prepared by the Board of Engineers For south side of Beo Bay. The bay is about 2 miles wide at the en- Rivers and Harbors, Corps of Engineers trance and recedes about % mile. It is fronted by a drying shore bank, which is coral in the southern part of the bay. Co CORAL PORT FACILITIES AT M MUD There are no dangers outside the 5-fathom curve, but within LABOEHA, HALMAHERA this curve the depths shoal rapidly to from 10 to 3 feet. At SCALE OF FEET SOUNDINGS 1000 0 1000 2000 Beo, the 5-fathom curve is about 500 yards off shore, while 1/2 IN mile north it is within 200 yards of the shore, and in the north- FATHOMS SOURCE 1 H.O. CHART NO.3082 APRIL 1944 ern part of the bay, it is 1,000 yards from shore. The bay is en- tirely open to the sea and wind from the southwest and north- FIGURE VI. 61. Laboeha. west. Port plan showing location of facilities. Page VI 48 PORT FACILITIES reefs. The reef on the southeastern side is fronted by a sand 40' 127* shoal. The beach in front of the town is sandy. It was possible to load or unload cargo at any time. Vessels over 360 feet are advised to anchor outside. Vessels more than 195 feet long require local knowledge. Vessels anchored in 12½ fathoms in the inner part of the bay with a mooring line secured to an iron ring near a ware- house on shore. There is danger of drifting on to the shore reef 20' 20 if mooring is not quickly executed. There is both a diurnal and KARAKELONG a semidiurnal tide, but the latter predominates. The spring ISLAND highs of the two tides coincide. The highest water level occurs Beo in May and November. The maximum rise and fall that can be expected are, respectively, about 4.3 feet above and 3 feet be- low mean sea level. A fixed red light, visible 3 miles, was shown at the head of the bay. 4° 4º. Liroeng SOUNDINGS 2 Bantik SALEBABOE I. IN FATHOMS 45 KABOEROEANG I. # of 4 4 al R a 40' 40 IP 22 K a N E PORTS ON THE 35 22 1 TALAUD ISLANDS a as R SCALE OF MILES 5 o 5 10 15 20 N SOURCE: H. 0. CHART NO. 1727 APRIL 1944 G a Prepared by the Board of Engineers For ao Rivers and Marbors, Corps of Engineers 4 FIGURE VI 62. Taland Islands. 29 Location of ports. BEO S (b) Landing facilities. No piers are reported at Liroeng. The best landing place was near the flagstaff, where the beach is free from rocks. (c) Clearance facilities. Vessels of the K. P. M. called regularly. Horse paths led along the shore to the north and south. (d) Availability of supplies. Provisions could be obtained. BEO, TALAUD ISLANDS (3) Peta, Sangibe (Sangi) Island (3° 39' N, 125° 33' SCALE OF FEET E). 1000 0 1000 2000 Peta is at the head of Peta Bay, on the east coast of Sangihe Island, which lies southwest of the Talaud Islands (FIGURE VI- SOURCE: H.O. CHART NO. 3061 64). No piers or other landing facilities are reported. APRIL 1944 (a) Harbor. The harbor is in Peta Bay, a small bight used Prepared by the Board of Engineers For as an anchorage, opening northeast. The entrance to the bay Rivers and Harbors, Corps of Engineers was marked by buoys. The harbor is about 350 yards wide be- rween dangers and about 1,500 yards long, with depths of 334 FIGURE VI 63. Beo. to 24 fathoms. The shores on either side are fringed by drying Port plan showing location of facilities. PORT FACILITIES Page VI 49 126° 30' so' (b) Landing facilities. No piers are reported. Landings are probably made on the beach in front of the town. There was a warehouse at the port. (c) Clearance facilities. Vessels of the K. P. M. called 40' 4d regularly. A good road led northward from the town, and a Peta trail crossed the island. Tahoena (4) Taboena (Taroena), Sangibe Island (3° 37' N, 125° 29' E). SANGIHE Tahoena is on the west coast of Sangihe Island (FIGURE VI- 64). It was the principal village and export centre of the San- Tamoko Dago gihe Islands. There was a small pier at the village. (a) Harbor. The harbor is in Tahoena Bay which opens westerly. It is about 1/2 mile wide and 1½ miles long. It is deep and, except for a fringing reef on the south shore and a 20 20 shoal in the northeast corner, it is free of danger and can be en- tered at night in clear weather. At the northeast corner of the bay is the entrance to a lagoon that is used as a proa harbor during bad weather. Behongang Anchorage is available in the eastern end of the harbor in 19 KAHAKITANG I. to 30 fathoms, over black sand. There is both a diurnal and semidiurnal tide, but the latter predominates. The spring highs of the 2 tides coincide. The highest water level occurs in May and November. The maxi- mum rise and fall that can be expected are, respectively, about 3° 3º 3.6 feet above and 2.6 feet below mean sea level. The high water interval is 5 hours, 47 minutes. The spring range is 5.8 feet. The bay is usually calm, but during the north monsoon sea- son, westerly winds may spring up and last from 1 to 4 days. They are not dangerous to vessels but cause much surf on the beach. Westerly winds, which occur at other times of the year, as well as frequent strong southwest winds, are of shorter dura- SIAOE I. tion and less intensity, but they often hinder loading or un- Oeloe loading. (b) Landing facilities. There was a small pier with 3 40' 40' feet alongside at low water. The pier consisted of a stone ap- proach, with an open pile and timber extension (FIGURE VI - 65). (c) Clearance facilities. Vessels of the K. P. M. called regularly. Trails led to other villages on the island. (5) Tamako, Sangibe Island (3° 28' N, 125° 30' E). "Tamako is on the west coast of Sangihe Island (FIGURE VI- Tahoelandong 64). No landing facilities have been reported. (a) Harbor. The harbor is in Tamako roads. G 20' TAHOELANDANG I. Anchorage is available in 30 fathoms in front of the village, 20 but it is advisable to anchor farther out, in 33 fathoms, with the Roeang Channel flag pole on shore bearing 80°. (b) Landing facilities. No piers are reported. (c) Clearance facilities. Vessels of the K. P. M. called regularly. A trail connected Tamako with other nearby villages. PORTS ON THE (6) Dagbo, Sangibe Island (3° 27' N, 125° 33' E). SANGIHE ISLANDS BIARO I. SCALE OF MILES Dagho is at the head of Dagho Bay, on the southwest coast of 5 o 5 10 15 20 Sangihe Island (FIGURE VI - 64). There was a pier at the vil- SOURCE: H.O. CHART NO.1727 lage. 2° APRIL 1944 (a) Harbor. The harbor is a sheltered basin in the head of Prepared by the Board of Engineers For Dagho Bay, about % mile wide between the 5-fathom contours Rivers and Marbors, Corps of Engineers at the entrance and % mile long, with depths of 26 fathoms FIGURE VI- 64. Sangibe Islands. in the middle. There are 2 shoals on the northwest side. The Map showing location of ports. Page VI 50 PORT FACILITIES (b) Landing facilities. A stone pier, about 600 feet long, extended from shore across the drying reef in front of the town (FIGURE VI - 66). (c) Clearance facilities. Vessels of the K. P. M. called regularly. A trail connected Dagho with other villages along the coast. (7) Bebongang, Kabakitang (Karakitang) Island (3° 10' N, 125° 31' E). Behongang is at the head of Behongang Bay, on the north coast of Kahakitang Island, which lies close southward of San- gihe Island (FIGURE VI . 64). There was a pier at the village. (4) Harbor. The harbor is in Behongang Bay, which is about 700 yards wide at its mouth and recedes about 11/2 miles. FIGURE VI 65. Taboena. The shore is bordered by a fringing reef, the extremities of View of pier showing type of construction. 1939. which are easily distinguished. shores are bordered by fringing reefs, the one on the southeast Sheltered anchorage is available in a depth of 44 fathoms in shore being narrow, but on the northwest shore the reef in front of the village. places extends out for as much as 300 yards. The bay is about (b) Landing facilities. A stone pier, with wooden super- 11/4 miles wide at its mouth and about 2½ miles long (FIGURE structure and a depth of 6½ feet alongside, was a good landing VI 66). place for boats. Good anchorage with protection from all weather is avail- able above Sama Island in depths up to 26 fathoms, over mud (8) Hoeloe (Ulu), Siaoe (Sian) Islam(2) 44' N, 125 and sand. Immediately below Sama Island, fair weather an- 25' E). chorage is available in depths from 15 to 40 fathoms, over Hoeloe is near the northern end of a large bight on the east mud and sand, with room for one large vessel and several small- coast of Siaoe Island, one of the Sangihe islands (FIGURE VI er craft. 64). There was a wharf in front of the village. 37 13 DAGO SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS PIER SAMA I. 27 27 500 VARIATION & 230 8 140 3' & & 150 IBO Mahome PORT FACILITIES AT DAGO, SANGIHE ISLAND SCALE OF FEET 1000 0 2000 4000 Rivers Prepared by the Board of Engineers For and Harbors, Corps of Engineers SOURCE H.O. CHARTNO.3061 N. APRIL 1944 as FIGURE VI Dagbo. Port plan showing location of facilities. PORT FACILITIES Page VI 51 (a) Harbor. The harbor is an open roadstead on the 126°30'E northern side of a large bight which opens between Boeloede (Bulude) and Pihise points. Lombajon Pt. There is anchorage about 330 yards offshore in a depth of BAGANGA BAY BAGANGA Lokud PL 44 fathoms, with a conspicuous white pillar on shore bearing 0°. During westerly storms good anchorage may also be found in 26 fathoms, with the white pillar bearing 10° and the flag- 7°30'N 7°30'N pole bearing 296°. From the beginning of January to the mid- die of April this road is not safe on account of the northeast and Bocutin PL east winds. BACULIN BAY A fixed red light, visible 3 miles, was shown from the Gov- Bocul Pt. ernment Wharf on arrival of vessels. (b) Landing facilities. A Government wharf was located CARADA Alisud PL at Hoeloe. CARAGA BAY Puson PL (c) Clearance facilities. Vessels of the K. P. M. called regularly. Roads led north and south along the shore and across the island. (d) Availability of supplies. Provisions could be obtained MATER MINDANAO BAY in limited quantities. SANTA CRUZE Casoumon PL. Buan Pt. (9) Taboelandang (Boebias), Taboelandang Island (2° 21' N, 125 24' E). Yoco Pt. Tahoelandang is on the southwest side of Tahoelandang TARRAGONA (Tagoelandang) Island, one of the southern Sangihe islands (FIGURE VI 64). There was a pier in front of the town. 7°0'N Tugubun Pt. 7°0'N (a) Harbor. The harbor is an open roadstead. The shore MATI MAYO BAY from the pier southward is bordered by a narrow fringing reef, Gorde Pt. but at a point about 11/4 miles north of the pier the reef is % mile wide. The bottom drops off sharply from the reef. The 10- FUJADUA SALE GUANGUAN fathom contour is close inshore. Roeang Channel between Roeang and Tahoelandang islands, which is of little importance PENINSULA to navigation, has depths of 1 to 8 fathoms over a width of Lamigon Pt. about 1,000 yards. PORTS ON In Roeang Channel, strong currents set to the southeastward Tumodgo Pt. SOUTHEAST COAST with the flood tide and to the northwestward with the ebb. OF MINDANAO Anchorage is available close inshore near the lighthouse in SCALE OF MILES 10 2 0 9 44 fathoms, over sand. There is anchorage in 38 fathoms some- APRIL 1944 what more northwestward and farther from the reef, where Prepared " the of Engineers for Rivers and Markers, Corps of Engineers currents which set through Roeang Channel are less trouble- FIGURE VI 67. Mindanao, SE Coast. some. Map showing location of ports. (b) Landing facilities. A pier extended from the shore in front of town near the lighthouse. Customs sheds or ware- houses were available. No other data concerning landing facili- Pujada Bay is too deep for good anchorage, although well ties are at hand. sheltered and protected. There is anchorage off Mati in 15 to 18 (c) Clearance facilities. Vessels of the K. P. M. called fathoms of water, over sand bottom, about 400 yards from shore. regularly. A road extended southeasterly and northwesterly from the town. A fixed red light, 36 feet above high water and visible 7 miles, was shown from the shore end of the pier. The high water interval in Pujada Bay is 6 hours 12 minutes. C. Mindanao Sector. The higher high water height is 4.8 feet and the lowest tide is (1) Mati, Mindanao Island (6° 57' N, 126° 13' E). 1.5 feet. Mati is at the head of Pujada Bay, on the southeast coast of (b) Landing facilities. Landing facilities consisted of a Mindanao Island (FIGURE VI. 67). It was the most important rock and earth causeway, 23 feet wide and 530 feet long, from of this section and an important shipping center for hemp and which a reinforced concrete pier, 29.5 feet wide, extended 39.5 copra. There was a pier at the town. feet to a reinforced concrete T-head landing, 39.5 feet wide and (a) Harbor. The harbor is in Pujada Bay, which is 6 miles 147 feet long. There was a depth of 20 feet alongside the head wide at the entrance berween Lamigan and Tumadgo Points, at low water. This wharf provided 1 berth for a 200-foot vessel and recedes 12 miles northwestward. The entrance narrows to with 12-foot draft. 4 miles in width and is divided into 2 deep, clear channels by (c) Clearance facilities. There was regular steamship serv- Pujada Island. The shores are fringed by coral reefs. ice with other ports on Mindanao and with Manila. There were Page VI 52 PORT FACILITIES no railroad connections. Roads and trails connected the towns during heavy weather. Anchorage, protected in easterly and along the coast and the eastern shore of Davao Gulf. southeasterly weather, may be found in the southwest corner in (d) Availability of supplies. There was no fresh water front of Santiago village. at the pier. Food supplies could be obtained in the town. At Caraga Bay, the high water interval is 6 hours 13 minutes. The mean range of tide is 4.1 feet and the diurnal range of tide (2) Tarragona, Mindanao Island (7° 03' N, 126° 27' is 5.0 feet. E). The lowest tide is 2.0 feet below mean lower low water. Tarragona is on the southeast coast of Mindanao Island Even in moderate weather heavy rips and swirls are encoun- (FIGURE VI 67). It was a port of call for coastwise steamers. tered off Pusan, apparently caused by the constant 2.2-knot No landing facilities are reported. southerly current which exists off the east coast of Mindanao. (a) Harbor. The harbor is in a bay formed between Yaco (b) Landing facilities. No piers are known to exist. and Tugubun points. Depths at the entrance are 45 to 116 (c) Clearance facilities. Caraga was a weekly port of call fathoms and 16 DO 21 fathoms close in. Off the shore reef there for coastwise steamers. are depths of 41/4 to 8 fathoms. The approach is clear except for a 1½ to 4% fathom shoal which extends about 1 mile from (d) Availability of supplies. Supplies of any kind were shore, about 11/4 mile southeast of the town. scarce. Heavy seas frequently prevail along this coast and there is a (5) Baganga, Mindanao Island (7° 35' N, 126° 34' E). strong constant southerly current of about 2.2 knots with heavy tide rips at the points. Tidal currents are weak. Baganga is on the southeast coast of Mindanao on the south- western shore of Baganga Bay, at the mouth of the Baganga The bay affords indifferent anchorage open to eastward and southward. River (FIGURE VI 67). It was the only important town in this area. No landing facilities are reported. (b) Landing facilities. No piers are reported. The Baganga River, close northwestward of the town, can- (c) Clearance facilities. Tarragona was a port of call for not be entered at low water. coastwise steamers. (a) Harbor. The harbor is in Baganga Bay which indents (3) Holy-Cross, Mindanao Island (7° 09' N, 126° 31' the coast about 11/4 mile. The entrance is about 2 miles wide E). between Lambajon (Lambayon) and Lakud Points, with depths Holy-Cross is on the southeast coast of Mindanao, at the head of 25 to 113 fathoms. The bay is open to the eastward. A coral of a small bay (FIGURE VI 67). It was a port of call for coast- reef extends 1/3 mile southward of Lambajon Point and a de- wise steamers. No landing facilities are reported. tached breaking reef lies 1/2 mile 228° from the point. (4) Harbor. The harbor is in a small bay which is 1½ There is good anchorage, protected from all but southeasterly weather, in 7 fathoms, over mud bottom, about 1/2 mile west- miles wide at the entrance between Casauman and Buan Points, ward of Point Lambajon and 1/4 mile offshore. The reef which and recedes westward about 2/3 mile. The bay is clear of dangers. Depths are 39 to 103 fathoms in the bay and 18 to 31 fathoms divides the approach to this anchorage into 2 channels is visible off the town. The shore appears to be free of fringing reef but at low tide, but breaks only in rough weather. The western there is a broad shoal, with 2½ fathoms, along the shore in channel is the better, being wider and having an even bottom. front of the town. Anchorage, protected from all but northeasterly winds, may be The bay is open to the east and southeastward affording in- found in the southern part of the bay in 5 fathoms, over sand bottom 1/4 mile offshore. different anchorage. Heavy tide rips frequently exist off Casauman Point. (b) Landing facilities. No piers are known to exist. (b) Landing facilities. No piers are reported. (c) Clearance facilities. Small vessels called weekly from (c) Clearance facilities. Holy-Cross was a port of call for Davao and Cebu. coastwise steamers. (d) Availability of supplies. Some food, but no gasoline or oil, could be obtained. (4) Caraga, Mindanao Island (7° 20' N, 126° 34' E). Caraga is on the southeast coast of Mindanao Island on the (6) Hinatuan, Mindanao Island (8° 22' N, 126° 20' north side of the entrance to Caraga Bay, at the mouth of the E). Caraga River (FIGURE VI 67). It was an important shipping Hinatuan is on the east coast of Mindanao, at the mouth of point for local products. No landing facilities are reported. the Hinatuan River, in the northwest corner of Hinatuan Bay The Caraga River, which discharges into the northern part (FIGURE VI - 68). It was an important shipping center for this of Caraga Bay, just west of the town, can be entered by small section of the island. The landing was along the river bank, on boats at half or full tide. Heavy breakers extend across the en- the eastern side of the town. trance, even in moderate weather. There are charted depths of only 1/2 fathom in the Hinatuan (a) Harbor. The harbor is in Caraga Bay which is about River entrance, but vessels drawing 7 feet cross the bar at high 21/2 miles wide at the entrance between Alisud and Pusan Points water and go alongside the wall along the river bank. About I and recedes westward about 11/2 miles. It is open to northeast- mile above its mouth, rocks obstruct the passage of larger boars, ward, with depths of 39 to 232 fathoms at the entrance and 49 but native craft ascend the river for more than 20 miles. to 53 fathoms inside. Two small coves have 4 to 9 fathoms close (a) Harbor. The harbor, in Hinatuan Bay, is open to east- in, The bay is clear of dangers. ward, and is obstructed by numerous islands, reefs and shoals. The anchorage in front of Caraga, is available in fair weather The approach is through a straight passage with depths decreas- only. The depth of water and character of bottom make it unsafe ing gradually from 25 to 5 fathoms. It narrows to about 1 mile PORT FACILITIES Page VI 53 at the inner end between the reefs of Manomawan and Maowa (7) Port Lamon, Mindanao Island (8° 28' N, 126° 23' Islands. E). The usual anchorage for Hinatuan is about 1½ miles south- Port Lamon is on the cast coast of Mindanao Island, south of east of the river mouth in 4 fathoms, over mud bottom. Better Lianga Bay (FIGURE VI 68). It was primarily a lumber port, protected anchorage may be found behind the reefs to the north- the wharf, on north side of the bay formed southward of Lamon ward in 7 fathoms, over mud bottom, with Manomawan Islet Point, was reserved for vessels calling at the mill, which was bearing 120°, distant 1/2 mile. There is good holding ground located immediately westward of the town. Interisland vessels with four 500-yard and six 300-yard berths with moderate pro- calling at the port anchored in the harbor and communicated tection except from easterly gales. with the shore by boats. At Hinatuan, the high water interval is 6 hours 21 minutes. (a) Harbor. Lamon anchorage, the harbor, is in the bay The mean range of tide is 4 feet and the diurnal range is 4.9 formed southward of Lamon Point. The bay is almost filled by feet. Strong tidal currents run in and out of the Hinatuan River, a large coral reef on which lies Bagasinan Island. Lamon an- fair with the channel, which is usually marked with stakes or chorage lies between the detached island reef and the shore reef beacons. to the northward. It is about 2 miles long, east and west, and (b) Landing facilities. Hinatuan had a small landing along from 450 to 1,100 yards wide. The entrance is about 1,000 the bank of the river where the depths are charted at 2 fathoms. yards wide between Lamon Point shore reef and the reef south- (c) Clearance facilities. Vessels called regularly. ward. Westward the harbor narrows between the reefs to 450 yards, and then widens to about 1,100 yards between 5-fathom 126°15'E curves, at the inner end. Shoals, marked by buoys, lie on the northern side of the entrance, south and southwest of Lamon *MACANGAMIL ENUNGÁN L Point. Private range beacons marked the fairway of the channel. TANDA Tondeg Pt. The harbor affords fairly sheltered anchorage in 6 to 7 fathoms, TANDAS A over mud bottom. This anchorage is open to eastward but al- though a swell makes in during northeast weather some pro- 900 TABO 9°0'N tection is afforded from the wind and sea from that direction. COVE (b) Landing facilities. The lumber mill had an L-head Lambillon Pt wharf on the north side of the bay, extending southward about CASUAIT NARBOR 1,000 feet from the shore across the wide shore reef to near the 5-fathom curve (FIGURE VI 69). The head was 150 to 180 ARANGASA is. feet long. It appeared to be about 15 to 20 feet wide. Depths at Umanum Pt. the face varied from 24 to 28 feet (1937), with the greatest depth at the western end. There was a pile cluster at the western MARIHATAGI AYNINAN L end of the L-head which provided about 300 feet of berthing space across the face. There was also a pile cluster on each side of the pier, near the edge of the reef. Depths near the reef are charted at 2½ to 3 fathoms. Jobo Pt. / (c) Clearance facilities. Interisland vessels called at the JABOL town. LIANGA LIANGA BAY (d) Availability of supplies. The wharf was lighted. Fresh water, unsuitable for boiler use, was available. Limited supplies )PANJRONGAN of food and ice were available at the mill and a small amount of Bokulin Pt diesel oil, gasoline, lubricating oil, and coal was stored for local use. 8°30'N 8°30'N (e) Repair facilities. Minor repairs could be effected at the PORT LAMON Lamon Pt. AMON ACMS. machine shop maintained by the lumber company. BAGASINAN L (8) Lianga, Mindanao Island (8° 38' N, 126° 05' E). MATURAL MAHABAL Lianga lies at the head of Lianga Bay, about % mile south of HINATUAN the mouth of the Lianga River, on the east coast of Mindanao HINATUAN BAY (FIGURE VI 68). No piers are reported. OMAWES (a) Harbor. The harbor is in Lianga Bay, formed on the east coast of Mindanao Island which is about 11 miles wide at PORTS ON THE the entrance between Jobo and Bakulin Points and extends 13 miles westward, being entirely open to the eastward. Depths EAST COAST gradually decrease from 65 fathoms at the entrance to 17 fath- OF MINDANAO oms off the town. Opposite the southern part of the town the SCALE OF MILES ID 8 6 4 o 10, shore reef is quite narrow with depths of 5% fathoms close in. APRIL 1944 On both sides a point of the reef extends about 1/4 to 1/3 mile Propared by the Seare of Engineers For Bleers and Marbors, Carps of Engineers from shore. FIGURE VI 68. Mindanso, East Coast. Anchorage sheltered only during the southwest monsoon Map showing location of ports. may be found in about 20 fathoms over muddy bottom, with Page VI 54 PORT FACILITIES LAMON POINT N à 44 a & 52 F 4d G 7 et of 6) a et 42 of G or R Se is PORT FACILITIES AT PORT LAMON, MINDANAO 21 3 3 4d 12 a SCALE OF FEET 500 o 1000 2000 3000 (20) SOURCE: C.B.G.S. CHART NO. 4627 APRIL 1944 SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS mud Prepared by the Board of Engineers For - rky..rocky Rivers and Marbors, Corps of Engineers sond FIGURE VI 69. Port Lamon. Map showing location of facilities. the church bearing 289°, and about % mile southeastward reef is narrower, with 2½ fathoms close in and 9 fathoms off from the 35-foot rock on the shore reef, 1/4 mile eastward of the the reef points. northern part of the town. Vessels usually anchor about % mile northeastward from (b) Landing facilities. There are no known piers. The Ayninan Islet and 1/2 mile southward from the outer breaking coral reef in front of the town makes landing at low water or at reef, in 16 to 18 fathoms of water. night difficult. (b) Landing facilities. There are no known piers. (c) Clearance facilities. Lianga was a weekly port of call (c) Clearance facilities. Marihatag was a port of call for for small coasting steamers from Cebu. small coastwise steamers. (9) Maribatag, Mindanao Island (8° 48' N, 126° 18' (10) Tandag, Mindanao Island (9° 05' N, 126° 12' E). E). Marihatag is on the south side of the mouth of the Tandag is on the east coast of Mindanao Island, on Tandag Marihatag River, 3 miles southwestward of Umanun Point, on Point, berween the mouth of the Tandag River and the ocean the east coast of Mindanao (FIGURE VI 68). It was a small (FIGURE VI 68). It was a place of considerable commercial port from which hemp and copra were shipped. No landing fa- importance as the shipping point for products of the Tandag cilities are reported. and Tago River valleys. There was a pier at the village but it The Marihatag River discharges through a narrow mouth could only be used by small boats (1938). Cargo was landed about 20 yards wide. It has very little water over its bar. At high on the beach. water small boats can enter the river and ascend it about 3 miles. The Tandag River discharges through a narrow channel be- (a) Harbor. The harbor is an open roadstead off the Mari- tween Lenungan Island and the mainland. The mouth is not hatag River. A reef about 1/4 mile long east-west and 300 yards visible from seaward. The entrance is approached from north- wide, which breaks in moderate weather at all stages of the tide, ward in depths of 7 fathoms. Between Lenungan Island on the lies 1 mile eastward from the mouth of the river. Immediately eastern side of the channel and an outreaching shore reef on the southward of this reef there is a small 2 1/4-fathom patch. About west, charted depths are 3 to 1½ fathoms. There is very little 1/4 mile westward from the breaking reef there is another small water on the bar, but small vessels can enter at high water. breaking reef, with a 14-fathom channel between them. Ayninan (a) Harbor. The harbor is in a small cove formed by Islet lies 1½ miles southward from the mouth of the river, Lenungan Island, an unnamed island eastward of Lenungan, with a channel about 200 yards wide and 11 to 13 fathoms deep and Tandag Point. The narrow entrance channel between Len- berween it and the shore reef. At Marihatag, two points of the ungan and the eastern island has depths of 5 to 19 fathoms. A shore reef project over 1/4 mile from shore. Between them, the shoal point usually marked by a stake, about midway through PORT FACILITIES Page VI 55 the channel and extending southeastward from Lenungan Is- Hitdop land, must be avoided. A reef surrounding the eastern island extends about 1/2 mile eastward from it and closes the opening Bood / Bille NONOG ISLAND between it and Tandag Point. Anchorage, sheltered from all but winds from north to east, Buses may be found in 7 to 10 fathoms, over mud bottom, 1/4 mile 1 westward from the north end of Lenungan Island. Vessels of 4 NIRATUAN or 5 feet draft may find sheltered anchorages at the mouth of Cog PD CAKANDO BUCAS GRANDE the Tandag River, behind Lenungan Island. PLACERS ISLAND Small interisland vessels anchor in 5 fathoms in the middle of the small cove formed by the two islands and Tandag Point. Clover PL e A heavy swell makes into this anchorage during the northeast monsoon and vessels cannot then enter due to the confused Kabe PLayers's water at the entrance. "Tugos The high water interval at Tandag is 6 hours 22 minutes. LAKE FL MAINIT Higher high water height is 4.7 feet and the lowest tide is 2.0 CARRASCAL BAY feet below mean lower low water, with an extreme range of 6.7 feet. LAMIZA CANTILAN BAY (b) Landing facilities. A stone pier extended westward PORTS ON from the south end of the eastern island, with a causeway con- NORTHEAST COAST nection to Tandag Point. The causeway was proposed to be 10 OF MINDANAO and SCALE OF MILES feet wide and 965 feet long with a cribwork landing at the end. ID . 6 4 # o ID The pier had (1938) à depth of 6 feet at its end but could APRIL 1944 PREPARED BY THE BOARD OF ENGINEERS FOR RIVERS AND HARBORE CORPE or ENG not be utilized by any but ships' boats. Cargo was landed on the beach. FIGURE VI 70. Mindanao, N.E. Coast. (c) Clearance facilities. Small interisland vessels called at Map showing location of ports. Tandag. An average of 2 vessels each week called from Cebu. (d) Availability of supplies. Food supplies, gasoline, and not attempt to pass inside the Cantilan Shoals. The anchorage a small amount of lubricating oil were available. is about 1 mile square, with 5 to 10 fathoms of water. A flashing white light, 55 feet above high water and visible (11) Cantilan, Mindanao Island (9° 20' N, 125° 59' 12 miles, was shown from Cauit Point, the southeastern en- E). trance point of Lanuza Bay. Cantilan, on the east coast of Mindanao, is on the northwest At General Island, off the northwestern entrance point of side of Lanuza Bay at the mouth of the Cantilan River, about 4 Lanuza Bay, the high water interval is 6 hours 23 minutes. miles south of Capungan Point (FIGURE VI - 70). No landing Mean range of tide is 3.8 feet and diurnal range is 4.6 feet. The facilities are known to exist. lowest tide is 2.0 feet below mean lower low water. The Cantilan River has very little water on its bar. The sandy (b) Landing facilities. No piers have been reported. point, through which it discharges, is surrounded by a reef, bare (c) Clearance facilities. Cantilan was a regular weekly at low water, to a distance of about % mile. The valley between port of call for small coastwise steamers. the Cantilan and Lanuza Rivers, which discharges into the head of Lanuza Bay, about 8 miles southeast of the Cantilan, is in- (12) Lakando (Lakandola), Masapelid Island (8° 41' N, 125° 39' E). tersected by a network of waterways forming a delta. The 4 mouths of these rivers are connected, making a through inland Lakando lies on Canal Bay, near the southwest end of Masa- waterway from Cantilan to Lanuza village, which is navigable pelid Island (FIGURE VI - 70). A pier was located about 1 for small boats. mile north of Lakandola. (a) Harbor. The harbor is an open roadstead in the north- (4) Harbor. The harbor is an open roadstead on the east- western corner of Lanuza Bay. ern side of Canal Bay, a large indentation in the southwest side The bay is about 15 miles wide at the entrance, between of Masapelid Island. The bay is about 2½ miles wide at the Capungan and Cauit Points, and extends 8 miles southwestward. entrance and extends northward about 2 miles. It is obstructed It is open to northeastward. Off Capungan Point and northeast- by numerous small islands and dangerous shoals. A small reef ward from Cantilan the bay is obstructed by General, Auqui, that bares at low water, lies 1/2 mile southeast of the southern and Unamao Islands and numerous shoals and reefs. Southward extremity of Masapelid Island. from east-northeast of the town the bay is clear, with depths of (b) Landing facilities. The pier, owned and operated by 55 to 10 fathoms. Cantilan Shoals lie 1½ to 3 miles northeast- the KM73 Mining Company, consisted of a causeway, between ward from Cantilan. There is a depth of 9 fathoms between the 400 and 500 feet long and about 15 feet wide, with a timber shoals and the outer end of the shore reef, but this passage is not T-head about 80 feet long (FIGURE VI 71). Pile clusters ex- recommended. The 5-fathom curve closely approaches the shore tended along the outer face of the wharf. There were 2 small on both sides of the projecting reef. sheds on stone projections of the causeway and a larger building Vessels usually anchor north-northeastward from the town at the outer end which were probably used for storage. in 7 fathoms, over mud bottom. Vessels approaching this an- (c) Clearance facilities. There appears to be a narrow chorage should pass close southward of Unamao Island and gauge railway track running the full length of the pier. Page VI 56 PORT FACILITIES FIGURE VI 71. Lakando. View of pier, looking northwest. (d) Availability of supplies. The pier appears to be light- Pilar. Small craft can enter the river. A shoal spot, usually ed, and there are indications of a pipeline. marked by a stake, lies in the middle of the fairway, about 300 yards south of the town. The better channel passes to the north- (13) Placer, Mindanao Island (9° 39' N, 125° 36' E). ward. Placer is on the east coast of Mindanao, about 1 mile south- (a) Harbor. The harbor is in Port Pilar, formed between ward of Cog Point (FIGURE VI 70). It was the shipping point Sharp Point and Pilar Point. The southern half of the bay is for the surrounding mining district. There was a pier at the port. Sugbuhon (a) Harbor. The harbor, in the southwestern corner of the cove between Cog Point and the point on which the town is situated, is formed by a large drying reef which projects about % mile northeastward from the town and surrounds Bancay 100% Islet. A 1/2-fathom shoal lies nearly in the middle of the harbor, IDPO'N about 450 yards northward from Bancay Islet. The cove, open to the east, has depths of 5 to 13 fathoms. Sorug Channel Arena Pt Two or 3 small vessels can find sheltered anchorage in 6 to Dohicen 9 fathoms, over muddy bottom, in an area about 400 yards in extent back of the shoal. (b) Landing facilities. The only landing facility was a PERSON SIARGAO rock and timber pier 20 feet wide and 402 feet long, which con- Leonan! sisted of a rock causeway, 345 feet long, from which a 21 foot Tona L Lenog Pt Pilar PILAR Pilar P1 pile and timber structure, extended seaward 57 feet. The outer ISLAND PORT PILAR 36 feet of the timber section was to be the middle of a proposed Channai Shorp Pt. PMN T-head, which would have been 85 feet long and 36 feet wide. BROON The controlling depth (1937) was 13 feet at low tide. The pier Tuoson P1 was used by small coasters. (c) Clearance facilities. There were regular steamship connections with Surigao and Cebu. There was also a road over which hemp and other articles were trucked for shipment. / // // / DAPA /Abonay Deco L (14) Pilar, Siargao Island (9° 52' N, 126° 6' E). BUCAS GRANDE Middle PORTS ON Pilar lies on the north side of the mouth of the Pilar River, Buces SIARGAO ISLAND at the northwest corner of Port Pilar, the only large indentation ISLAND SCALE OF MILES o on the east coast of Siargao Island (FIGURE VI - 72). The set- APRIL 1944 Prepare " - of imployers Per Finers Corpo of Englosed tlement was small. No landing facilities are known to exist. The Pilar River discharges into the northwest part of Port FIGURE VI 72. Siargao Island. Map showing location of ports. PORT FACILITIES Page VI 57 filled with reefs, near the northern edge of which is Isda Islet anchored off this pier. Depths of 3½ fathoms are charted near and several large rocks. Between Isda Islet and Point Pilar the the end of the pier. entrance to the port is about 1,300 yards wide and narrows to about 450 yards between shore reefs at the western end. Depths (c) Clearance facilities. The pier appeared to be con- nected to streets of the town. decrease from 79 fathoms in the bay to 3½ fathoms in the river. (16) Dapa, Siargao Island (9° 45' N, 126° 03' E). Port Pilar affords the best anchorage on the east coast of Dapa is at the southwestern end of Siargao Island, on the Siargao Island but its use is not recommended as, even in the northern shore of Dapa Channel (FIGURE VI - 73). There southwest monsoon, a heavy sea usually sets in around Pilar were 2 piers in front of the town, one of which did not extend Point. Anchorage may also be found in 7 or 8 fathoms, about to the edge of the shore reef. 1/2 mile east-southeastward from Pilar. Small craft can enter (a) Harbor. The harbor is at the mouth of a small cove the Pilar River and find perfectly sheltered anchorage 200 or 300 yards above the village in depths of 6½ to 8 fathoms. Be- formed inside Cambasac Point, on the northern side of Dapa yond this point the river shoals to 1 fathom. Channel. Dapa Channel separates the southern end of Siargao Island from East Bucas Island. It is 1/2 mile wide at the western At Port Pilar the high water interval is 6 hours 30 minutes. The mean range of tide is 3.2 feet. The lowest tide is 2.0 feet entrance between Cambasac Point, and San Miguel Point, the below mean lower low water. northern extremity of East Bucas Island. It is nearly blocked by islets, reefs and shoals, leaving three, narrow, tortuous channels (b) Landing facilities. No piers have been reported. through which the currents run with considerable velocity. The (c) Clearance facilities. A small interisland vessel called reefs show plainly, defining the channels, and Dapa Channel is every two weeks. safe for small, carefully-navigated steamers. Cambasac Point (d) Availability of supplies. Supplies of any kind were is fringed by a narrow, steep reef. Quico and Barrabas Reefs, scarce. and the rock off the north end of Bucas Grande Island are the only detached dangers in the western approach to the channel. (15) Numancia, Siargao Island (9° 52' N, 125° 58' The middle channel, between Abanay and Bancuyo Islets, E). is the best, it being fairly straight, 7 to 14 fathoms deep, and Numancia lies on the western side of Siargao Island, about 8 having a least width of 100 yards. The southern channel be- miles northwestward from the western entrance to Dapa Chan- tween Bancuyo Islet and East Bucas Island is narrow and tortu- nel and 2 miles from the sea (FIGURE VI 72). This coast ous, and its use is not recommended. It has depths of 3½ to 19 is bordered by an extensive area of mangrove flats, intersected fathoms. The northern channel west and north of Abanay Islet by mangrove sloughs with numerous islands separated from is the most generally used in reaching Dapa from the west. Its Siargao and each other by narrow, shallow, mangrove-bordered southwestern end is about 100 yards wide and 7 fathoms deep channels. There was a pier at the village. berween the shore reefs of Cambasac Point and Abanay Islet, (a) Harbor. The harbor is on Libas Channel, which with 6 to 8 fathoms in the channel northward. Turning east- separates Siargao Island from Tona Island. ward, the channel is about 300 yards wide between shore reefs Beyobo Channel, through which Numancia is approached, on the northern end of Abanay Islet and the southern side of is narrow, tortuous, and mangrove-fringed. The entrance is made Siargao Island, with depths of 5½ to 9 fathoms in the channel by approaching the coast nearly % mile northwest from a to Dapa. Opposite the town the channel is 3½ fathoms deep small, white-sand islet which is awash at high water. The offly- and about 100 yards wide between the shoals. The eastern en- ing reefs have several openings with 2½ to 16 fathoms, and trance of Dapa Channel is about 700 yards wide berween the the depths in Beyobo Channel are 1/2 to 4 fathoms. This chan- Siargao shore and Dapa Reef, with depths of 14 to 51/4 fath- nel should not be attempted without local knowledge, as there oms. It is obstructed by two rocky shoal spots, one about 1 mile are several small shoals which cannot be seen until close over east-southeastward from the town and 1/4 mile from the shore, them. The most dangerous shoal is in the center of the channel and the other about 500 yards eastward. about ½ mile south of the pier. It bares at extreme low, water Anchorage is usually made in 5 fathoms, over ritud bottom, but there is deep water close to the mangroves to the westward. about ½ mile southwestward from the town. Opposite the town Numancia may also be approached through Sayug Channel, pier it has an extreme width of about 600 yards between 5. which leads southward from the head of Litalit Bay to Baban fathom curves, narrowing to about 250 yards in the middle, and Lagoon. Tona Channel leads into Baban Lagoon from the south- is about 1,000 yards long. In the western end is a dangerous west. From the lagoon Libas Channel leads southward, to the rock. This anchorage is open to the east and southeast and partly town. These channels are narrow, shoal, mangrove-fringed protected from the south by Abanay Islet and Dapa Reef. The cove behind Cambasac Point had depths of 5 to 10 fathoms, and only suitable for small native craft. over mud bottom, and appears clear and well-protected. The slough or channel at Numancia appears to be about 400 At San Miguel, on the southern side of the western entrance yards wide and provides sheltered anchorage in 3 to 3½ fath- to Dapa Channel, the high water interval is 6 hours, 35 min- oms for the vessels of about 8-foot draft which are able to utes. The mean range of tide is 3.2 feet. The lowest tide is 2.0 navigate the channels. feet below mean lower low water. At the western entrance of In the channel near town, the currents run with con- Dapa Channel the flood tide flows westward and the ebb sets to siderable velocity and there are dangerous whirlpools in places. eastward. (b) Landing facilities. There was a stone pier, which ex- (b) Landing facilities. The landing facilities consisted of tended about 200 yards into the mangrove slough. Small steam- 2 piers, which are keyed to the port plan (FIGURE VI 73). ers, drawing about 8 feet, reached the town at high water and A narrow pier, 555 feet long, extended southwestward across Page VI - 58 PORT FACILITIES the shore reef toward the 5-fathom curve abreast the center of all sides. A rock, awash, lies midway between the points. The the town (Reference number 1, FIGURE VI - 73). It consisted entrance to Dinagat Cove is about 200 yards wide between of a rock causeway, 20 feet wide and 450 feet long, extended shoals, with depths of 25 to 27 fathoms, decreasing gradually 115 feet by a reinforced concrete pier, 30 feet wide, with a to 7 fathoms at the eastern extremity. It is about 1 mile long depth of 20 feet (1937) at the end and from 12 to 13 feet and 1/2 mile wide, but shoals reduce the anchorage area. along the sides. Construction of a shed was proposed (1937). Dinagar Point is fringed with shore reef and a wide shoal Another narrow causeway (Reference number 2, FIGURE area. VI 73) extended southward from the shore at the eastern edge At Dinagat, the mean higher high water interval is 10 hours of the town, but its rounded outer end did not reach the edge 20 minutes and the diurnal range of tide is 3.4 feet. The low- of the shore reef. A wide shoal with 1/4 to % fathom lies off est tide is 1.5 feet below mean lower low water. the end of this pier. (b) Landing facilities. At the back of the town was a per- (c) Clearance facilities. Streets of the town connected fectly sheltered pier which, one report states, has 5 feet of water with both piers. Small steamers occasionally called at the port. at its end. The chart however, indicates that there is less than 3 (17) Dinagat, Dinagat Island (9° 58' N, 125° 36' E). feet. Dinagat is on the southwest coast of Dinagat Island, at the (18) Butuan, Mindanao Island (8° 57' N, 125° 33' E). western end of Dinagat Point which forms the southern and Butuan is on the west bank of the Agusan River, which dis- western sides of Dinagat Cove (FIGURE VI - 74). There was charges into the head of Butuan Bay, about 57 miles south of a pier on the eastern side of the town. Bilaa Point, the northern extremity of Mindanao (FIGURE VI- (a) Harbor. Dinagat Cove is a well-protected harbor, 75). There was considerable trade in hemp and copra, princi- nearly landlocked with good holding ground. The outer bay is pally with Cebu. There were 2 landing stages at the port (FIG- about % mile wide between Masiub and Dinagat Points and is URE VI - 76). partially protected from the westward by Capaquian Island. It (a) Harbor. Butuan is a river port on the Agusan River, has depths of 10 to 31 fathoms but shoals extend far out from 5 miles above its mouth. The river discharges into the south- 2 02 E. Co coral rity rocky M mud S sand SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS or 6 5 54 I 2 22 54 31 26 17 5% 3 de 7 A 7 25 N 21 Cambasks 7 23 10 14 29 30, is 20 22 7 12 0 IS 17 0 7 12 23 is 8 28 14 , 27 San 64 a IS is Bancuyo II # G 23 a 100 17 N. 0 a 21 PORT FACILITIES AT DAPA, SIARGAO ISLAND SCALE OF FEET 1000 o 5000 31 S Prepared by the Board of Engineers For SOURCE C.B.G.S. CHART NO. 4638 Rivers and Harbors, Corps of Engineers APRIL 1944 FIGURE VI 73. Dapa. Map showing location of facilities. PORT FACILITIES Page VI 59 12 25 E 24 22 6 a a 26 PANAGE SURIGAO STRAIT SIBANOC 22 22 CAPAQUIAN a & 23 X 24 N 22 HIKDOP n Dinagat Sound 26 28 NONOC Bilao Pt. 30 17 # 33 20 25g 3 VICINITY MAP 6 SURIGAO SCALE OF MILES 30 23 23 5 o 5 10 33 26 2) 32 PORT FACILITIES AT 31 31 35 DINAGAT, DINAGAT I. 34 3 If SCALE OF FEET 58 26 29 2 1,000 o 1,000 2,000 3,000 N 26 28 25 29 SOURCE C.BG.S. CHART NO. 4638 PIER 14. APRIL 1944 36 24 Dinagot Rf IS 32 25 a 21 Dinagat 27 20 Co...corol 26 n rky...rocky 20 S...sond SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS 5 3 23 Prepared by the Board of Engineers For Rivers and Marbors, Corps of Engineers FIGURE VI- 74. Dinagat, Map showing location of Dinagat (inset) and port plan showing location of facilities. eastern corner of Butuan Bay. Its mouth is divided into 2 chan- The downstream landing (Reference number 1, FIGURE VI- nels by Pontod Island. The bar of the northern entrance, pur- 75) had a controlling depth of 14 feet along the face, and con- posely blocked by sunken stones, has a depth of only 3 feet and sisted of a timber deck and apron on concrete piles and sub- is not used for navigation. The western entrance has a minimum structure, with a timber approach from the shore. The deck was width of about 150 yards, depths of 9 or 10 feet over the bar at about 31 feet by 72 feet, with an apron along the face about low water, and 12 to 14 feet at ordinary high water. The best 10 feet by 72 feet, and 15 feet by 21 feet on either side of the water over the bar was marked by range beacons. cargo shed (FIGURE VI - 77). The cargo shed was about 21 Depths from the bar to the town are from 2½ to 5 fathoms. feet by 43 feet. The upstream landing (Reference number 2, Butuan Bay is about 20 miles wide at the entrance between FIGURE VI - 75) could only be used by small boats. There was Tubay and Diuata Points, and recedes southward 10 miles. It a shed covering the entire deck. is deep and clear. (c) Clearance fabilities. Piers were served by connections There is no good anchorage outside the river entrance. Good with the coastal highway. There were regular motor vessel con- anchorage for small vessels is found at the mouth of the Baug nections. Small boats and launches of 4-foot draft can ascend the River, which enters the Agusan just inside the bar. Vessels Agusan River for about 70 miles to Bunawan 20 miles north of anchoring in the stream at Butuan should lie below the upper wharf, as the river higher up is contracted by a shoal making off Moncayo, the northerly terminus of the Davao road. from the west bank. (d) Availability of supplies. Gasoline, diesel oil, and ice A fixed red light, 39 feet above high water and visible 7 were available in small quantities. miles, was located inside the river entrance. (19) Nasipit, Mindanao Island (8° 59' N, 125° 20' E). The high water interval at the river entrance is 11 hours, 30 minutes. Higher high water height is 3.8 feet and lowest tide is Nasipit is on the southern shore of Butuan Bay, 10 miles -1.5 feet. During floods the river rises from 12 to 36 feet. The west of the mouth of the Agusan River (FIGURE VI - 78). It rainy season is from November to February. The river is lowest was a shipping point for copra and logs. There was a pier about during September and October. The current in the river is 1 mile south of the town, near the head of Nasipit Harbor. strong. Currents at the entrance flow out at all tides. (a) Harbor. Nasipit Harbor is formed by an opening be- (b) Landing facilities. The principal facilities were 2 tween bluff rock headlands about 1/8 mile apart and extends landing platforms, which are keyed to the port plan (FIGURE about 1 mile southward. The harbor has depths of from 4 to VI 75). 12 fathoms over an area about % mile long and about 300 Page VI 60 PORT FACILITIES to load logs and coasting vessels maintained communication 125°30'E with Cebu. A highway led to Butuan. " PONTOO (20) Odiongan, Mindanao Island (8° 51' N, 125° 10' 29 BUTUAN BAUS E). 23 Odiongan is located on the east bank of Odiongan River, BAY which discharges into the southeastern corner of Gingoog Bay 35 AGUSAN (FIGURE VI. 79). The only landing facility was at the lumber 9°0'N 9°0'N company's pier in a small bight 0.9 mile west of Odiongan. 35 (a) Harbor. The harbor is an open roadstead, near the head of Gingoog Bay. The bay is 20 miles wide at the entrance, 22 between Diuata and Sipaca Points, and extends 13 miles south- 20 ward. The shores are fringed with narrow, steep, coral reefs. The center of the bay is deep and clear. There are no off-lying dan- BUTUAN gers, except a shoal northwest of Gingoog village, at the head VICINITY MAP of the bay, and another off Talisayan, near Sipaca Point. A small SCALE OF MILES shelf of coral and sand with depths of 3 to 7 fathoms, lies north- 2 3 ward of the eastern side of the entrance to the Odiongan River. 8°57'N This shoal affords excellent anchorage for small vessels. (b) Landing facilities. The Anakan Lumber Company cathedra 28 had a T-head pier in the bight west of Odiongan. The face of BUTUAN 4 28 the pier was 350 feet long and had a depth of 30 feet alongside. RADIO 42 (c) Clearance facilities. The port is on the coastal high- 36 way. The lumber company operated a railroad for a distance of 125°33'E 23 18.6 miles and had 3 locomotives. 30 73 52 PORT FACILITIES AT 36 (d) Availability of supplies. Fresh water, suitable for 60 36 BUTUAN, MINDANAO S sand SCALE OF-FEET boiler purposes, was piped to the pier. Food and ice were avail- M. mud 500 o 1000 able. SOUNDINGS IN FEET SOURCE C&GS. CHART NO.4647 APRIL 1944 (21) Gingoog, Mindanao Island (8° 50' N, 125° 06' 22 20 Prepared by the Board of Engineers For Rivers and Harbors, Corps of Engineers E). Gingoog lies on the southern shore of Gingoog Bay, about 4 FIGURE VI 75. Butuan. miles west of Odiongan (FIGURE VI 79). It was a lumber Map showing location of Buruan (inset) and port plan showing location of facilities. port, the only landing facility being a pier operated by the lum- ber company (FIGURES VI 80 and VI 81). (a) Harbor. The harbor is an open roadstead at the head yards wide. Both entrance points to the harbor are fringed by reefs which show plainly on a clear day. of Gingoog Bay. A small coral shoal covered by a least The reef on the western side of the entrance extends about 1/4 depth of 11/2 fathoms exists about 1 mile northwestward mile northeastward. The reef on the eastern side continues much from the town and M mile from the shore. There is a deep farther in than that on the western side and the sandspits ap- channel about 1/2 mile wide between this shoal and the shore parently extend farther into the channel than charted. Private reef. Northwest of Gingoog the shores are fringed by a steep buoys marked the western edge of the shoal water. coral reef. Vessels can anchor in the harbor in depths of 4 to 12 fath- Good anchorage in 15 fathoms, sand bottom, may be found oms, over mud. about 1/4 mile from shore directly in front of the town. A flashing white light, 94 feet above high water and visible (b) Landing facilities. An open timber pile L-head pier, 15 miles, was located on the western shore of the harbor, about with a wood deck extended about 400 feet from the shore. The 1/2 mile from the entrance. The high water interval is 11 hours 25 minutes. Higher face of the L-head was about 230 feet long, but was still under high water rises 4.1 feet and the lowest tide is -1.5 feet, re- construction. Tracks were laid on the pier, which was lighted spectively, above and below mean lower low water. (FIGURES VI 80 and VI - 81). (b) Landing facilities. The only facility at the port was (c) Clearance facilities. Gingoog is on the coastal road. an L-head pier (FIGURE VI 77), which consisted of a cause- The lumber company had 2.5 miles of railroad. Vessels called way, about 375 feet long and 25 feet wide, from shore to deep regularly each week from Cebu. water, with an extension approximately 100 feet long and 50 (22) Talisayan, Mindanao Island (9° 0' N, 124° 53' feet wide, to the L-head, which was about 150 feet long and 40 E). feet wide. It was proposed to convert the pier to a T-head by Talisayan is near the northwestern entrance to Gingoog Bay additional construction southward, but the status of the project about 1 mile southeastward of Sipaca Point (FIGURE VI 79). has not been determined. It was the principal town in Gingoog Bay. No landing facilities (c) Clearance facilities. Foreign vessels called regularly have been reported. PORT FACILITIES Page VI 61 FIGURE VI - 76. Butuan. Aerial view of town and waterfront, showing location of landing facilities. FIGURE VI 77. Butuan. View of downstream landing, looking north. January 1938. Page VI-62 PORT FACILITIES Its. 164 B U N # A B of A Y 02 is 120 120 53 129 03 106 IDS 126 If 53 12 AS AS 53 53 02 72 of 3 a 36 51 72 77 10 12 8 67 56 , 71 % 24 70 75 20 an 52 63, X / R $ 25 35 33 53 76 a 34 04 36 IDO 56 70 in 12 2 22 3 R miss 2 3 53 33. R 70 e 55 43 a 9 85 50 B 44 63 57 52 33 43 65 38 2. 2 & to 53. 06 T 3 77 6 a 4) T $2 73. 33 55 59 35 NOTE: The shoul along the next share of the 4d Nasipit Marker have been reported to extend 6$ further into the main channel. 57 54 y 125°10' 20 30 58 20' 53 26 55 a (UIFL 15 E 53 42 52 49 21 7 SI 45 10' 42 & 45 37 DIUATA PT. / UTUAN BAY TUBAY E: PT. $ 9 45 37 9º 39 30 35 NASIPIT 21 25 & 37 BUTUAN R 36 38 26 GINGOOG 30 is 30 26 BAY VICINITY MAP R 22. 28 SCALE OF MILES 25 5 o 5 10 15 20 € GINGOOG 22 PORT FACILITIES AT NASIPIT, MINDANAO SCALE OF FEET 1000 o 1000 2000 SOURCE: C.B.G.S. CHART NO. 4647 SOUNDINGS IN FEET hrd. hard s/f...soft APRIL 1944 Co...coral M...mud sand Prepared by the Board of Engineers For Rivers and Harbors, Corps of Engineers FIGURE VI 78. Nasipit. Map showing location of Nasipit (inser) and port plan showing location of facilities. (4) Harbor. The harbor is an open roadstead just inside (b) Landing facilities. No piers are known to exist. the northwestern entrance point of Gingoog Bay. A detached (c) Clearance facilities. Talisayan is on the coastal high- coral shoal, with a least depth of 4 fathoms, lies 1/4 mile from way. shore. There is a deep, clear channel, about 1/4 mile wide, be- tween it and the shore reef. (23) Balinguan, Mindanao Island (9° 0' N, 124° 50' E). Anchorage may be found close to the shore reef northward of the town in 20 fathoms, but the anchorage is exposed to Balinguan is about 1% miles westward from Sipaca Point, northeast winds. Vessels occasionally anchor on the 4-fathom the western entrance point to Gingoog Bay (FIGURE VI 79). It was the terminus of a ferry which operated to Camiguin Is- shoal, off the village. land. A small wharf was used as the ferry landing. PORT FACILITIES Page VI 63 CAMIGUIN I, 125 E Divete PI. Earol Pt. Sipece P1. Linugas R. , - BALINGUAN , N TALISAYAN Bogocoy PUS Medino PV. MEDINA ODIONGAN Odiangen R. #GINGOOG PORTS ON GINGOOG BAY SCALE OF MILES 4 o 4 Propered " the of ingineers For Rivers ... Carps of Engineers 125 E APRIL 1944 FIGURE VI 79. Gingoog Bay. Map showing location of ports. FIGURE VI - 80. Gingoog. View of port, showing pier. Page VI 64 PORT FACILITIES FIGURE VI 81. Gingoog. View of pier, showing type of construction. (a) Harbor. Canauayor Anchorage, the harbor for Balin- guan, or Mindanao. A break in the shore reef provides a well- guan, lies southward of Canauayor Islet, which lies about 13/4 protected landing place for coasting vessels. miles west of Sipaca Point and about 1/4 mile from shore. A wide fringing reef is bordered by narrow shoal areas. The 5. (a) Harbor. The harbor is an open roadstead, with a and 10-fathom curves are close in. A shoal area which is nearly charted depth of 2 fathoms. The bottom drops off steeply. bare at low water extends from Canauayor Islet in a south- (b) Landing facilities. A small pier used as the ferry easterly direction to the mainland. landing, had 6 feet of water at its face. Westward from the islet and close to it, there is a natural (c) Clearance facilities. A road paralleled the shore, and channel leading to protected anchorage for small craft in 8 to connected Binone with other harbors and villages of the is- 9 fathoms, over hard sand, about 300 yards northward from land. Binone was the terminus of a ferry that operated 3 trips the western part of the village. The approach is clear with daily to Balinguan, on Mindanao Island. depths of 18 to 27 fathoms and a width in the entrance of about 120 yards between 5-fathom curves. The anchorage is only (25) Mambajao, Camiguin Island (9° 15' N, 124° 43' about 190 yards wide opposite the pier and about 400 yards E). east-west to the 5-fathom line. Mambajao is on the northern end of Camiguin Island (FIG- High water interval is 11 hours 25 minutes. The mean range URE VI - 83). It was the principal town on the island and a of tide is 2.6 feet. The lowest tide is 1.5 feet below mean lower low water. shipping point for hemp and copra. There was a pier in front of the town. (b) Landing facilities. A small pier (FIGURE VI . 82), used as a ferry landing, had a depth of 8 feet at the end (1938). (4) Harbor. The harbor is an open roadstead. A fringing The pier extended about 450 feet northward from shore. shore reef widens at the town to about 250 yards. An opening in (c) Clearance facilities. The ferry made 3 trips daily to the reef, about 100 yards wide, extends about 375 yards south- Binone, on Camiguin Island. There was a road paralleling the erly to the shore line. Depths in the entrance are from 13/4 to shore at the root of the pier. 1 fathom, decreasing shoreward. Anchorage at Mambajao is indifferent and because of the (24) Binone, Camiguin Island (9° 09' N, 124° 48' E). depth of water must be close in. The 5-fathom curve is Binone is near the south end of the east coast of Camiguin about 150 yards outside the edge of the reefs. Vessels anchor Island, which lies 8 miles northwest of Sipaca Point, the western in 18 fathoms, over sandy bottom, with Mambajao Light bear- entrance point of Gingoog Bay (FIGURE VI - 83). Binone was ing 204°, distant about 1/4 mile. Small vessels may anchor the Camiguin Island terminus of the ferry operating to Balin- closer in, with the light on the same bearing, in 11 fathoms, PORT FACILITIES Page VI 65 31 33 is 124 50 30 . E. $ a 32 29 31 is 9 is 30 30 27 34 35 y i 0% = 22 32 29 as 30 vide in 1938 27 26 3 28 27 30 2 ANNUAL DECREASE and 24 Inf 5 27 " 14 30 20 e < 7 25 24 Vo. 12 30 21 7 n 29 Cas 4 23 / 17 15 a 7 us t 26 6 2) 27 Cas 5i 1% 26 65 has x IS 22 in 4) 9 IS is 2 5 5 6 8 Las 7 32 14 II 21: 10 Canauayor is 3 2 00 30 N. 2 a Esperania united PORT FACILITIES AT BALINGUAN, MINDANAO black rocky SCALE OF FEET Co corol sand 1000 o 1000 2000 hrd hard wh.. white é SOURCE: C.B.G.S. CHART NO. 4639 SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS Prepared by the Board of Engineers For Rivers and Marbors, Corps of Engineers APRIL 1944 FIGURE VI- 82. Balinguan, Map showing location of port facilities. over sand and coral, with Medano Islet just open off a small At Mambajao the mean high water interval is 11 hours 28 single tree on the extremity of the point westward from Mamba- minutes. Mean range of tide is 2.5 feet. The lowest tide is 1.5 jao. feet below mean lower low water. Flood tidal currents flow west- ward, parallel to the pier end. Tide rips form near adjacent is- 124*40 50 lands. Medono LO MAMBAJAO Jigdup Reef A fixed red light, 32 feet above water and visible 7 miles, was shown from the pier. (b) Landing facilities. The pier extended over 1,000 feet from shore along the eastern side of the gap in the reef to open Bulies Shoel water (FIGURE VI - 84). It consisted of a stone causeway, with CAMIGUIN L . a timber extention. The causeway, 40 feet wide, extended north- 5 Montiqui I. 10' erly about 500 feet to an enlarged end about 80 feet square, 10' beyond which the pier, which was partly causeway but for the most part of open timber pile construction, extended 620 feet BINONE north-northeasterly with a width of 20 feet, widening to 30 feet at the outer 115 feet of pier. In 1938, there was a depth of GINGOOG 14 feet at the end and depths of 6 to 15 feet along the western BAY side, where about 450 feet of berthing space was available. The pier was exposed to the northeast monsoon. A small cargo shed was built on the wide midsection of the pier. Limited open storage might be had on the 80-foot square enlargement of the pier or at the 175-foot square area at the PORTS ON THE Sipece PL CAMIGUIN ISLAND shore end of the pier. SCALE OF MILES (c) Clearance facilities. The pier had road connections. o 2 , 5 MINDANAO Vessels called weekly from Cebu. APRIL 1944 Propered " the Bart of English for Elsers - term of (agineers (d) Availability of supplies. Supplies were scarce. A few FIGURE VI. 83. Gamiguin Island. tins of gasoline and some diesel oil in drums were available. Map showing location of ports. Fresh water, suitable for boilers was piped to the wharf. Page VI 66 PORT FACILITIES 2 43 (27) Kolambugan, Mindanao Island (8° 07' N, 123° 2) 27 30 f 53' E). N 12 22 Kolambugan is on Kolambugan Bay, which lies on the east- is is 28 as ern side of Port Misamis, opposite the port of Misamis (FIGURE 54 - VI 10). The port is southwest of the town, near Migcaniguing 26 Point, where the Kolambugan Lumber Company had a pier. if 25 so (a) Harbor. The harbor is an open roadstead in Kolam- % 15 vi 15 bugan Bay, eastward of Pasil Shoal. Depths in the bay vary 58 from 3 to 15 fathoms, with general depths of 7 fathoms along € 22 the entrance range. Pasil Shoal is a long narrow shoal extending 31 nearly 3 miles in a northeast direction from Palalagoya Point, with depths varying from 1/4 to 4% fathoms over it. The north- 25 4d ern extremity was marked by a buoy. / 4d Port Misamis is described under Topic 61, C, (4), (a). Anchorage may be obtained eastward of Pasil Shoal, in 4 = to 5 fathoms, over fine sand bottom. The anchorage is well sheltered except from the north, The variation of tide is about 5% feet. MAMBAJAO RADIO (b) Landing facilities. The wharf of the lumber com- Co. coral sand pany was about 1,950 feet in length, and was constructed of SOUNDINGS wood piling, with wood decking. There was a depth (1938) of IN FATHOMS 25 feet at the outer end, decreasing gradually to 16 feet 300 yards shoreward. Tracks were laid on the pier. The wharf was PORT FACILITIES AT lighted (FIGURES VI 86 and VI 87). MAMBAJAO, CAMIGUIN ISLAND (c) Clearance facilities. Kolumbugan was the southern SCALE OF FEET terminal of the coastal highway running northward along the 500 o 1000 eastern coastline of Iligan Bay. 2000 (d) Availability of supplies. Fresh water, ice, and food sup- SOURCE: C. & G.S. CHART NO. 4639 plies were available. Some diesel oil and gasoline were stocked APRIL 1944 by the lumber mill. PREPARED BY THE BOARD OF ENGINEERS FOR (e) Repair facilities. There was a machine shop at the RIVERS AND HARBORS, CORPS OF ENGINEERS. mill. FIGURE VI 84. Nambajao. (28) Jimenez, Mindanao Island (8° 20' N, 123° 51' E). Map showing location of port facilities. Jimenez is on the western side of Iligan Bay about 9 miles north of Loculan Point, the western entrance point of Port Misa- mis (FIGURE VI 88). The town lies inland on the Palilan (26) Bugo, Mindanao Island (8° 30' N, 124° 45' E). River. The port facilities were located about 1 mile eastward, on Bugo is near Cagayan on the southeastern shore of Macajalar Iligan Bay. Bay on the north coast of Mindanao (FIGURE VI 6). The The Palilan River which discharges about 0.9 mile northwest Philippine Packing Company had a wharf and packing plant of Tabu Point, has very little water on its bar at low tide. on the waterfront. (a) Harbor. The harbor is an open roadstead approxi- (a) Harbor. The harbor is an open roadstead near the mately % mile long in a northwest-southease direction and head of Macajalar Bay. It is protected from all points except about 1/4 mile wide, between the 5-fathom contours. The off- the northwest. Depths of 7 fathoms extend about 1/4 mile from lying reefs, principally Madre and Poricos, lie 1/4 to 1/2 mile off- the shore. shore and extend to 1 mile on their outer edges where there is Macajalar Bay is described under Topic 61, C, (2), (a). deep water. These reefs provide protection against most seas. A The tidal currents parallel the wharf face, flowing southward number of channels lead between the reefs to the harbor but on the flood with a velocity of about 1 knot. the most used are the southern and northern entrances, between (b) Landing facilities. The pier consisted of a rock cause- the reefs and the mainland. Buoys marked the edges of the reefs way with a pile and timber T-head wharf, the face of which was in the channels. 200 feet long and had depths of 30 feet alongside (1930). The harbor provides one first-class, two second-class, and one Dolphins were provided at each end of the T-head. Railroad third-class anchorages which are safe, except during northeast tracks extended from the packing plant to the face of the pier monsoons when it is reported that at heavy swell sometimes OC- (FIGURE VI 85). The pier was lighted. curs. Anchorage may be found about 250 yards off the pier in 6 (c) Clearance facilities. In addition to the railroad lead- fathoms, over sand bottom, and elsewhere in the roadstead in ing to the pier, a highway paralleled the coast. depths of 3 to 12 fathoms, over mud and sand bottom. (d) Availability of supplies. Fresh water was available A fixed red light, 32 feet above high water and visible 7 miles, at the pier. was located on the beach at Tabu Point. PORT FACILITIES Page VI 67 The high water interval at Jimenez is 11 hours 25 minutes. The higher high water height is 4.1 feet and the lowest tide re- Anchorage space in the bay is limited to an area about 300 cedes to 1.5 feet. yards in diameter, where vessels anchor in 5 to 11 fathoms, over (b) Landing facilities. The facilities consisted of a rock mud. Vessels may also anchor in 10 fathoms, 1/2 mile from and earth causeway with a reinforced concrete pier, 39.5 feet shore, north of the village. wide and 275 feet long, at its seaward extremity (FIGURE VI - The high water interval at Plaridel is 11 hours 05 minutes. 88). There was a depth (1939) of 20 feet at the pier head. The higher high water height is 4.1 feet and the lowest tide Vessels usually berthed along the southern side. A heavy swell recedes to -1.5 feet. sometimes reached the pier during the northeast monsoons. A A fixed red light, 60 feet above high water and visible 7 black warehouse was located near the root of the pier. A cargo miles, was located on Polo Point. shed was reported under construction (1937). (b) Landing facilities. There were originally 2 wooden (c) Clearance facilities. The pier was at the end of the main street of the town. landings, each 20 feet wide and 65 feet long (FIGURE VI - 89), which were built by the municipality. A reinforced concrete (29) Plaridel, Mindanao Island (8° 36' N, 123° 44' E). wharf or pier, 30 feet wide and 69 feet long, was constructed Plaridel is about 2½ miles westward of Polo Point, the west- from the end of one of these timber wharves. The timber sec- ern entrance point of Iligan Bay, on the north coast of Minda- tion was to have been removed and replaced by a rock cause- nao (FIGURE VI 89). The town lies on the coast, about 1 mile way under the proposed plans. It is not known whether this northwest of the landing facilities on the northwestern side of work has been done. The concrete pier had a depth of 13 feet Inamucan Bay. at its head, and the timber wharf had a depth of 16 feet at its (a) Harbor. The harbor of Plaridel is in Inamucan Bay, end. about 1 mile southeastward from Plaridel, and about 1½ (c) Clearance facilities. A road led from the piers to the miles westward from Polo Point. It is about % mile long and town. 1/4 mile wide, but reefs extending from both entrance points reduce the navigable entrance channel to a width of 300 yards. (30) Baliangao, Mindanao Island (8° 40'N, 123 36'E). Open to the north, it provides good protection from other quad- Baliangao is at the head of Baliangao Bay, situated in the rants. Baubaon Point, the eastern entrance point, is fronted by a northeastern corner of Murcielagos Bay, on the northern coast fringing reef, and at Inamucan Point, the western entrance of Mindanao (FIGURE VI - 90). It was the shipping point for point, a reef extends about 1/4 mile from shore. These reefs bare copra produced in the vicinity. A landing for small boats was lo- at low water. The depths at the entrance are 32 fathoms, de- cated at the town and the Government pier was located at creasing to 4 fathoms at the head of the bay. Miray Point, about 1 mile west-southwest of the town. FIGURE VI 85. Bugo. Aerial view, showing pier. 18 September 1936. Page VI 68 PORT FACILITIES 123 50 E 123 55 E. il IS is = 17 7 PORT FACILITIES AT is KOLAMBUGAN, MINDANAO 12 SCALE OF MILES 10 N o 180 44 10 SOURCE : C.& G.S. CHART NO. 4640 % APRIL 1944 16 4 N a Misamis 21 34 N 15 22 2 % 10 Kulasiban Kulasihan R. Pt 2 5; 3j & 5j 5j 21 7 34 crs coarse / st #Kolambugan fne. fine 3 M mud Pier rky rocky 1 alalaguejat S 3 4 Triunod Pt sand 4 R. 42 3j / KIND / / 4 SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS 21 << & PREPARED BY THE BOARD OF ENGINEERS FOR A RIVERS AND HARBORS, CORPS OF ENGINEERS. FIGURE VI 86. Kolambugan. Map showing location of port facilities. Kthri FIGURE VI 87. Kolambugan. View of pier, looking north-northeast, showing type of construction, railroad trackage and class of vessel that can be berthed. PORT FACILITIES Page VI 69 10L 123°51'E 56 9 JIMINEZ # 44 (a) 16 4 et 8°20'N o 1235516 II Palilary 30% AND PORT FACILITIES AT JIMINEZ, MINDANAO S. sond Co. corol rky rocky SCALE OF FEET SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS 1000 1000 Prepared by the Board of Engineers For SOURCE.OBS.S CHART NO:4639 Rivers and Harbors, Corps of Engineers APRIL 1944 61 FIGURE VI 88. Jiminez. Map showing location of Jiminez (inset) and port plan showing location of facilities. 18 43'E Langaran Shoal of is 22 2' 32 If CO coral 21 25 S sand F 39 N mud rky rocky 25 = 25 25 se , 201 35 or 4d 21 20 40 54 20 30 VICINITY 30 & 23 se Al PLARIDEL 37 32 33 28 as 20 x 2 as = 39 28 information is = ⑇ 25 38 39 a 3 29 35 PORT FACILITIES AT 23 PLARIDEL, MINDANAO 35 2 SCALE OF FEET o 2,000 4,000 SOURCE: C.&.G.S. CHART 4639 SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS APRIL 1944 PREPARED BY THE BOARD OF ENGINEERS FOR RIVERS AND HARBORS CORPS OF ENG. 123,45E FIGURE VI 89. Plaridel. Map showing location of Plaridel (inset) and port plan showing location of facilities. Page VI 70 PORT FACILITIES (a) Harbor. The harbor is in Baliangao Bay, a small in- FIGURE VI - 90) consisted of a dumped rock causeway, 20 feet dentation in the coast, about 1 mile wide between the entrance wide and 110 feet long, with a reinforced concrete pier at points, Miray Point and Sulong Point, and about 1 mile long in its extremity, 29.5 feet wide and 165 feet long, with a depth of a northeast-southwest direction. The southern 2/3 of the bay is 10 feet at the head. shallow. The depths in the northern 1/3 range from about 8 (c) Clearance facilities. A road led from the pier on Mi- fathoms in the channel entrance southwestward from Miray ray Point to the town. Point, to about 3 fathoms 1 mile farther in. The 5-fathom con- (d) Availability of supplies. Food supplies and a few tins tour just enters the bay, stopping off Miray Point. The bay is of gasoline and kerosene were usually obtainable. sheltered from all winds and seas except those from the south- west. The entrance channel was marked by buoys. The edges of (31) Dapitan, Mindanao Island (8° 39' N, 123° 25' the inner channel may readily be seen when the water surface E). is not choppy. Dapitan is about % mile from the beach on the eastern side There is anchorage off Miray Point in about 6½ fathoms of Dapitan Bay, south of the mouth of the Dapitan River, on with Miray Point bearing north, distant about 400 yards. the northwestern coast of Mindanao (FIGURE VI 91). A road (b) Landing facilities. A stone pier (Reference number led northward from the town to a landing pier, % mile eastward 1, FIGURE VI . 90), located at the town, could only be ap- of Estacion Point. There was no water at the end of the pier at proached by small boats at high water. Approach should not be low tide. attempted without local knowledge. The Dapitan River, discharging into the head of Dapitan Bay, The Government pier at Miray Point (Reference number 2, at the north end of the town, has very little water on its bar at 47 44 43 a R 123 N 125 2 43 as , 38 33 # 2 I 40 38 33 39 20 , 37 34 35 0 23 22 40 N 12 CASGAN 4 & BALIANGAO An 10 0 3 = IS IS ID III IN is or 14 16 14 10 IS A 14 10 n 17 10 IS 14 If 2 18 IS 13 st 21 19 21 13 N IS & Mason Cr. IS 39 17 6 7 of coral BAY rocky send mud 1 Canayan R. PORT FACILITIES AT BALIANGAO, MINDANAO SCALE OF FEET 4 1,0,00 o 1,000 2,000 3,000 VICINITY MAP SOURCE: U.S.C.& G.S. CHART NO. 4641 MAJ RILES PREPARED BY THE BOARD OF ENGINEERS FOR SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS - RIVERS AND HARBORS, CORPS OF ENGINEERS. APRIL 1944 FIGURE VI. 90. Baliangao. Map showing location of Baliangao (inset) and port plan showing location of facilities. PORT FACILITIES Page VI 71 ALIGBAY / 123°30'E 183°23'E # % ATAGOLO PT as SILLAPT 8°40'N 8'40'N a PORT PULUAN a « IDIPOLOG a a Pier 8°30'N VICINITY MAP SCALE OF MILES 8°30" # 0 10 a . D A I A A Y-, IN 34 11 a % is at " 1 DATITAN 4 5 A it as Is as 6 : as = = - 7 si 1 24. as = 09 Pier # is n. PORT PULUAN 21 n n 20 Sicari 4 a 0°30'N a PORT FACILITIES AT a PORT PULUAN, MINDANAO SCALE OF FEET Co corol M. mud sond 1000 o 1000 2000 SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS 123°E3'E SOURCE CAGS CHART NO.4639 by the Board of Engineers Far livers ... Marters, Corpe of Engineers APRIL 1944 FIGURE VI 91. Port Puluan. Map showing location of Port Puluan (inset) and port plan showing location of facilities. low tide. At high water and with a smooth sea, small lighters tide recedes to -1.5 feet. At ebb tide the current flows outward can cross. A bridge crossed the mouth of the river at the town. or westerly along the pier end. Port Puluan, the deep-water terminal for Dapitan, is de- (b) Landing facilities. The facilities at Port Puluan con- scribed under Topic 62, C, (31). sisted of a dumped rock causeway 200 feet long and 20 feet wide (32) Port Puluan, Mindanao Island (8° 38' N, 123° with a steel sheet piling head 32 feet long and 30 feet wide, ter- 23' E). minating in a reinforced concrete pier 138 feet long and 30 feet Port Puluan is on the southwest side of Dapitan Bay, ½ wide on piling. The pier had fender piles at the head and a pile cluster at the inner end. There was a depth (1937) of 27 feet mile southeast of Botogan Point, on the northwestern coast of Mindanao Island (FIGURE VI- 91). The facilities at Port Pu- off the fender piles at the head, decreasing to 15 feet at the cluster piles at the inner end on the western side. luan served the adjacent towns of Dapitan and Dipolog, which Proposed improvements included a reclaimed area fronted lie about equidistant on either side of the port and were con- by a rock bulkhead, for port and terminal activities, and a cargo nected to it by a road. shed. It is not known whether this work has been completed. (4) Harbor. The harbor is an open roadstead on the (c) Clearance facilities. A road led from the pier at Port southwestern side of Dapitan Bay, which is about 3% miles Puluan, to Dipolog and Dapitan. Bridges crossed the several wide at the entrance between Tubud and Botogan Points, nar- rivers. rowing to an average of 2½ miles farther in, and is about 3 miles long. It is open to the northwest. The depths at the en- (d) Availability of supplies. Small supplies of food, ice, trance are 28 fathoms, decreasing gradually to the beach at the gasoline, kerosene and lubricating oil were obtainable at Dapi- head of the bay. can and Dipolog. Good anchorage may be found in any part of Dapitan Bay, (33) Dipolog, Mindanao Island (8° 35' N, 123° 20' sheltered from all except northwesterly winds. The usual an- E). chorage is off Dapitan, about 3/8 to ½ mile from shore, in 3½ fathoms of water, over a mud bottom, with the church Dipolog is on the northwestern coast of Mindanao, about bearing 92°. Good anchorage may also be found in a depth of 2½ miles south of Sicayac Point (FIGURE VI 91). It lies on 7 fathoms, about % mile southward from the small islet off the south side of the mouth of the Dipolog River, slightly back Estacion Point. from the beach. It was a shipping point for copra, corn, hemp, The high water interval in Dapitan Bay is 10 hours 57 min- and lumber. There was regular weekly boat connection with utes. The higher high water height is 4.4 feet, and the lowest Cebu and Misamis. A road led to Port Puluan and Dapitan. Page VI 72 PORT FACILITIES The water in front of the town shoals gradually, the 5-fathom It was the site of a small lumber mill which had a pier on the curve being % mile from shore. No piers have been reported. northern side of the eastern arm of the port. The Dipolog River has very little water on its bar, but can be (a) Harbor. Port Santa Maria, the harbor, is practically entered by small boats at high water. landlocked, with high hills surrounding it. It is not readily seen Port Puluan, the deep-sea terminal for Dipolog, is described by vessels passing at a considerable distance offshore. About a under Topic 61, C, (32). mile wide at the entrance, it narrows to about % mile and then (34) Sindangan, Mindanao Island (8° 14' N, 123° 00' widens out into two bights, separated by a small peninsula and E). a coral reef, which projects about 300 yards northward from Sindangan is at the eastern end of Sindangan Bay, on the it. The eastern bight is the largest. The bay is about 11/2 miles northwestern coast of Mindanao (FIGURE VI- 92). Copra and long. The depths at the entrance are 22 fathoms with depths corn were shipped in small quantities. No landing facilities have in either bight ranging from 12 to 15 fathoms. The shore at been reported. the entrance is composed of rocks and cliffs, with a narrow (a) Harbor. The harbor is an open roadstead, with no fringing coral reef, but at the head of the bay there are some sand beaches. A shoal formerly marked by a beacon, lies about shelter from west to north. The 30-foot contour runs from ,0.5 to 0.7 mile offshore, and the approach is deep and clear. 150 yards westward of the end of the pier. The harbor affords the best sheltered anchorage on the west Anchorage can be taken from % to 1 mile off the village, the coast of Mindanao. Good anchorage for small vessels in 12 to depths ranging from 30 to 84 feet, over mud. 15 fathoms, over mud or sand, may be found in the southern (b) Landing facilities. No piers are known to exist. bight. Space for one second- and one third-class anchorage berths (c) Clearance facilities. Access to the interior was limited is vailable in the eastern bight, and for one second- and four to trails. Interisland steamers formerly called biweekly, pro- third-class berths in other parts of the harbor. viding connection with Zamboanga and Cebu. The high water interval at Port Santa Maria is 10 hours 54 (d) Availability of supplies. Supplies of any kind were minutes. The higher high water height is 4.2 feet and the low- scarce. est tide recedes to -1.5 feet. (b) Landing facilities. The facilities consisted of a timber 122°45'E 123°0'E pier on piling, approximately 150 feet long and 100 feet wide BLÁNCA PT. (FIGURE VI 94), located on the northern side of the eastern 8°30'N 8P30N bight. There was a depth (1937) of 11 to 15 feet alongside the end of the pier, with deeper water immediately offshore. It was used primarily for loading of lumber for export. Vessels moored MADALAG PT. PONOT at the head of the pier, lying to an anchor, bow to westward. Sev- eral sheds and mill buildings were located on the shore ad- jacent to the pier. (c) Clearance facilities. Regular weekly steamer commu- nication was maintained with Manila and other Philippine SIARI LANBOYAN PT ports. There were industrial tracks on the wharf, leading from the mill. SINDANGAN (d) Availability of supplies. Fresh water was not avail- 8°15'N 8°15'N SINDANGAN able at the pier. A few drums of diesel oil were stocked for the SINDANGAN use of the mill. BAY TALINGA (36) Caldera Bay, Mindanao Island (6° 57' N, 121° SINDANGAN PT. 58' E). PALANDOK PT, Caldera Bay is about 7 miles westward of Zamboanga, at the LILOY SALOG southwestern end of Mindanao (FIGURE VI- 12). The Philip- pine Desiccated Coconut Company had 2 wharves on the bay. VICINITY MAP (a) Harbor. Caldera Bay is a natural harbor, open to the SINDANGAN, MINDANAO south, with a small inner arm in the northwestern part which is SCALE OF MILES 086420 10 accessible to small vessels only. The bay is about 1 mile wide at 122°45'E the entrance, and recedes about 1/2 mile into the coast. The APRIL 1944 PREPARED BY THE BOARD OF ENGINEERS FOR depths in the outer portion of the bay range from 6 to 9 fath- RIVERS AND HARBORS, CORPS OF ENGINEERS. oms, with the 5-fathom contour skirting the shore line at a dis- FIGURE VI 92. Sindangan. tance of about 300 to 400 yards, but not entering the small Map showing location of Sindangan. inner part. The inner arm is about 70 yards wide at the entrance and 200 yards long, with depths of about 2½ fathoms at the (35) Port Santa Maria, Mindanao Island (7° 46' N, entrance, decreasing to 3 feet inside, The bay is sheltered from 122° 07' E). westerly, northerly, and northeasterly winds and seas, but open to southerly winds. Port Santa Maria is on the western coast of Mindanao Island, about 60 miles northward from Zamboanga (FIGURE VI 93). Good anchorage may be found in the outer bay in depths of 6 to 8 fathoms, over sand bottom. PORT FACILITIES Page VI 73 21 122 06 z 25 22 23 e 122 od 20 21 " 38 on 22 21 22 , Sampoak Pt 3 24 SIN II 8 21 os 47 38 the 7 14 22 22 e II = N 55 7 & % 21 is 122 E 32 # 6 21 be 6 6 32 20 # 8 is Port Santa Mario 25 14g 14 28 22 as 17 50 28 IS 37 Port Santa 25 21 2 29 30 10 22 55 22 22 Zamboonga N 22 20 ca VICINITY MAP 25 31 2) 0 SCALE OF MILES 21 9 10 o 10 20 E 10 26 is IS 20, 28 Pier no 17 9 a 24 a 14 is IS 30 8 17 24 9 0 525 14) 58 20 et PORT FACILITIES AT and & 5 7) 34 PORT SANTA MARIA, IM 32 GE MINDANAO 74 32 19 12 SCALE OF FEET 1,000 o 2,000 4,000 Co coral S sand SOURCE: U.S.C.& G.S. CHART NO. 4651 M mud SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS APRIL 1944 PREPARED BY THE BOARD OF ENGINEERS FOR RIVERS AND HARBORS, CORPS OF ENG. FIGURE VI 93. Port Santa Maria. Map showing location of Port Santa Maria (inset) and port plan showing location of facilities. (b) Landing facilities. The Philippine Desiccated Coco- length and 8 feet draft (aft). No machine work facilities were nut Company had 2 small timber wharves, with 28 feet and 14 available at the yard. feet of water at their ends. The exact locations of these wharves (37) Kabasalan, Mindanao Island (7° 48' N, 122° 44' are not known. One (FIGURE VI 95) is of timber pile con- E). struction. Kabasalan is on the Kabasalan River, which discharges into There were numerous sheds and potential warehouses. A the northeast corner of Sibuguey Bay, on the south coast of Min- number of coconut oil tanks were located on the shore. danao (FIGURE VI 96). It was the headquarters of the Good- (c) Availability of supplies. The Asiatic Petroleum Com- year Rubber Plantations Company, which had a wharf about pany had a fuel tank at Caldera with a pipe line leading on to 0.8 mile from the town. the wharf, with 28 feet at its head, where ships could be sup- (a) Harbor. Kabasalan is a river port, about 2½ miles up- stream from the mouth of the Kabasalan River. The river is plied. (d) Repair facilities. A marine railway in Caldera Bay entered through a narrow and tortuous channel which winds was capable of handling vessels of 50 tons weight, 90 feet in through the mud flats of Sibuguey Bay. This channel has a depth Page VI 74 PORT FACILITIES 122 122 122 52 Kabasalan PREPARED BY THE BOARD OF ENGINEERS FOR RIVERS AND HARBORS, CORPS OF ENGINEERS. SIBUGUEY VICINITY MAP A KABASALAN, FIGURE VI 94. Port Santa Maria. MINDANAO View of pier, looking north, showing type of construction. 1940. SCALE OF MILES 40 N 2 o 2 APRIL 1944 FIGURE VI 96. Kabasalan. Map showing location of Kabasalan. Cabog Point was marked by beacons. There is a depth of about 2 fathoms in this channel but local knowledge is required for FIGURE VI 95. Caldera Bay. passage. View of pier, showing type of construction. Prior to April 1935. Taba Bay is considered the best sheltered anchorage on the east side of Sibuguey Bay. There is anchorage most anywhere of 8 feet, but local knowledge is required for passage through in the bay according to draft. A fixed red light was shown from it and into the river. The Kabasalan River, inside its mouth, is the outer end of the wharf. wide and sufficiently deep, for vessels of 6 feet draft to ascend The high water interval in Taba Bay is 6 hours 16 minutes. the main channel for about 2 miles and thence about ½ mile The higher high water height is 6.0 feet and the lowest tide re- up a side channel, which enters the river on the right side, to cedes to -1.5 feet. the wharf on the north side of the stream. (b) Landing facilities. The wharf was a timber pile bulk- (b) Landing facilities. The wharf was of timber construc- head with sawdust fill (FIGURE VI 97). It was in fair condi- tion and had a depth alongside (1937) of about 10 feet. Turn- tion (1937), but inaccessible to boats having a draft of more ing space was limited to about 40 feet at low tide. than 10 feet (FIGURE VI . 98). Vessels berthed alongside the (c) Clearance facilities. Biweekly boat service was main- east face. The wharf was lighted. Railway tracks were laid on tained to Zamboanga. the wharf and lead to the mill and forest. A small tug and several lighters were available. A number of sheds and mill (38) Lumarao, Mindanao Island (7° 33' N, 122° 48' buildings were located at the rear of the pier. Lumber stock E). yards were rather extensive. Lumarao is on the southwest side of Taba Bay, an inlet on the (c) Clearance facilities. Railroad tracks were laid on the eastern side of Sibuguey Bay, on the south coast of Mindanao pier. Vessels called every 2 weeks for lumber. (FIGURE VI 97). It was the headquarters of the Hercules Lum- ber Company, which had a wharf at the town. (d) Availability of supplies. Fresh water was piped to the (a) Harbor. The harbor, Taba Bay, is about 4 miles long mill but was not available on the wharf. The wharf was lighted. with an average clear width of % mile. It is comparatively easy A few drums of diesel oil and gasoline in tins were stocked for to enter at any stage of the tide, and at low water the edges of use in the mill. The lumber company maintained a store where the coral fringes and reefs are clearly defined. The shores of the supplies could be obtained in small amounts. bay are generally lined with mangroves and the fringing reefs (e) Repair facilities. Minor repairs could be made in the are narrow. The head of the bay is shoal and in the southeast lumber mill machine shop. corner are mud flats, bare at low water. The Cabog Islands lie on a reef, part of which bares at low water. This reef extends (39) Naga-Naga (Chinkang), Mindanao Island (7° northward to within 1/2 mile of Patan Point, the northern en- 31' N, 122° 56' E). trance point to the bay, and forms with Cabog Point, the western Naga-Naga is on the eastern shore of Tantanang Bay, the protective arm for the bay. northern arm of Port Sibulan, on the southern coast of Mindanao The depths at the entrance are 14 to 16 fathoms, decreasing (FIGURE VI 99). The town, about 1/4 mile northward of Ka- to about 2 fathoms off the pier at the southwestern end. The ladis Point, the eastern entrance point of the bay, was the site channel through the bay was marked by beacons located on the of the sawmill and pier of the Mindanao Lumber Company reefs and shoals. The channel between the Cabog Island and (FIGURE VI. 100). PORT FACILITIES Page VI-75 (a) Harbor. The harbor is an open roadstead at the en- The high water interval in the bay is 6 hours 12 minures. trance to Tantanang Bay, which is nearly 3 miles wide at the entrance between Tantanang and Kaladis Points, and extends The higher high water height is 5.8 feet, and the lowest tide recedes to -1.5 feet. The flood tide currents run northward, over 2 miles northward. The 10-fathom contour does not enter the bay, but extends partly across the entrance. The bay shoals parallel to the shore and pier face. gradually from the entrance to its head, with the 5-fathom con- (b) Landing facilities. The Mindanao Lumber Company tour following the coast about 300 yards offshore and crossing had an open pile and timber T-head pier, 390 feet long across the bay about 11/4 miles from the entrance. It is well sheltered the face and about 50 feet wide. Depths alongside the T-head from practically all winds and seas. (1937) were 19 to 24 feet, the deeper water being toward the The channel was marked by a buoy and beacons. south end. Vessels docked starboard side to in order to have the There is good sheltered anchorage in Tantanang Bay in any least depth at the bow. There were no mooring bollards or desired depth. clears. Vessels were required to use kedge anchors while along- Patant't 122°30'E Tende *BULUANT I / LUMARAGS 1°30'N SIBUGUEY PANDALUSAN - VITALIFE BAY VICINITY MAP SCALE OF MILES o 5 ID 15 Regulation at sond M. mud Co corel BOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS 5 % M 36 N a 21 Patee Pt as LUMARAO PORT FACILITIES AT LUMARAO, MINDANAO ISLAND SCALE OF FEET 1000 o 1000 2000 SOURCE.CAG.S CHART NO.4651 APRIL 1944 PREPARED BY THE BOARD of ENGINEERS FOR RIVERS AND HARBORS, CORPS of ENG. FIGURE VI 97. Lumarao. Map showing location of Lumarso (inset) and port plan showing location of facilities. Page VI 76 PORT FACILITIES FIGURE VI 98. Lumarao, View of pier, showing type of construction. Prior to April 1935. Co coral S sand DUMAOUILAS M mud MAL ANGAI rky rocky 2 LUMARAO 2, 31 NAGA-/NAGA BACAO SIBUGUEY BAY PORT SIBULAN MARGOSATUBIG 3f 4 5 5 32 4 48 GULF 3 5i Gi 6: SI GLUTAMON S et M 7 2i R 0 5g 7 VICINITY MAP 8 8 0 5 M w SCALE OF MILES 8 adenso Lumber Co o 5 10 15 8 250 PIER 9 Tantanang , Bay NAGA-NAGA Tantanang Pt.) # 9 8 8 10 Tantaoan 2 , 8 56 10 II 10 M 9 8 21 , 3i II 10 62 9 = Kaladis 30 N. 5 Saong Bay 34 12 2 ,7 H , 5, 21 = II 10 6 32 38 3 13 B III 1 10 Panag K M 4 3 Par 3 en 8 45 Aill 65 14 IS 3 of II & M Pandan Reef 5 32 IS 6 Si # 12 IS 5i 3 8 46 Sb II 3 5 SE Sf 4 14 3) IS 9 5 7 Si IS 8 or IS 8 P"O R Si 10 7 T₆ I B If U L A N 12 8 4 1 32 8 . , Gi, II 8 9 IS 5 14 II 14 6) 7 8 7 PORT FACILITIES AT 15 7 3i 8 14 NAGA-NAGA, MINDANAO 4 FL N 12 IS dom X 5 SCALE OF MILES 13 IS 6 IS 12 o 2 & 4 265 ulan Reef 9 14 9 7 SOURCE: C.& G.S. CHART 4652 x a 3 is 10 17 if 14. 17 SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS II 122,55 E # = APRIL 1944 PREPARED BY THE BOARD OF ENGINEERS FOR RIVERS AND HARBORS. CORPS OF ENG. FIGURE VI 99. Naga-Naga. Map showing location of Naga-Naga (inset) and port plan showing location of facilities. PORT FACILITIES Page VI - 77 side. Lines were made fast to the wharf stringers. Railroad tracks serve the pier. The pier was lighted (FIGURES VI - 100 and to pile dolphins and mooring piles located along the outer edges VI 101). of the reef. A railway track was laid on the pier and led a short (c) Clearance facilities. The railroad extended from the distance inland. Lumber was not exported from the port. The pier to the mill and storage yards, and inland to the forests. logs were made into rafts and hauled across the bay to Mar- There was weekly steamship connection with Cotabato and gosatubig (FIGURES VI . 102 and VI - 103). Zamboanga. (c) Clearance facilities. The pier was the terminus of a short lumber railway. (d) Availability of supplies. Fresh water, suitable for boiler purposes, was piped to the pier. The wharf was lighted. (41) Malangai, Mindanao Island (7° 38' N, 123° 02' Food supplies were limited. E). (40) Bacao, Mindanao Island (7° 33' N, 123° 02' E). Malangai is on the western shore of Dumanquilas Bay, on the south coast of Mindanao Island (FIGURE VI - 99). It was Bacao is near Naga-Naga, about 7, miles east-northeast of the the shipping point for the coal mines of the Sibuguey district. western entrance point of Dumanquilas Bay, on the south coast A pier, with mechanical equipment for loading coal, was located of Mindanao (FIGURE VI 99), The only landing facility was on a point just east of the village (FIGURE VI 104). the Mindanao Lumber Company pier, which was in poor condi- tion and could only be reached by small boats at high water. (a) Harbor. The harbor, Malangas Bay, is a small inden- Logs were hauled to Margosatubig (Topic 62, C, (42)). tation on the coast south and westward from Igai Point. It is about 11/4 miles wide at the entrance and about 11/2 miles long. (a) Harbor. The harbor is an open roadstead, sheltered The average width between the 5-fathom contours is about 600 from winds from westerly directions only. A coral reef fringes yards. The southwestern side is shallow, the shoal flats partly the shore and extends out in places about 500 yards. Mangroves baring at low water. The northern shore shoals rapidly, the 5- line the shore except in a few spots. The 10-fathom contour lies fathom contour lying 200 to 400 yards offshore. The depths at about 1,000 yards offshore opposite Bacao, and the 5-fathom the entrance are 12 fathoms, with average depths of 8 fathoms contour lies 600 yards offshore. in the bay. The 10-fathom contour just enters the bay. The anchorage in favorable weather is about 1/2 mile off- Good anchorage may be found in the bay in 6 to 10 fathoms shore in depths of 8 to 10 fathoms of water. of water, over a mud bottom. The area is sufficient for 5 first- (b) Landing facilities. The facilities at Bacao consisted of class anchorage berths. a timber pile pier, about 20 feet wide, which projected about (b) Landing facilities. Landing facilities consisted of a 450 feet from the shore. The pier was in poor condition and reinforced concrete T-head pier, on concrete piles, 160 feet long was accessible to small boats only, at high tide. Vessels moored and about 40 feet wide at the extremity of a causeway extending FIGURE VI 100. Naga-Naga. Aerial view of waterfront. showing location of pier. Page VI 78 PORT FACILITIES FIGURE VI 101. Naga-Naga. View of pier, showing type of construction. and small sheds were located just west of the root of the cause- way. (c) Clearance facilities. A new road led from the pier to 12 the mines and to the town, westward from the pier. 9 10 (d) Availability of supplies. Water was available. A 115- 14 coral watt, 220-volt diesel generator for the radio station was located or gray at the root of the pier. Food supplies were obtainable in small mud 16 9 amounts. S sond 14 17 N soft (42) Margosatubig, Mindanao Island (7° 35' N, 123° SOUNDINGS 21 10' E). 15 IN FATHOMS Margosatubig is on the southern side of Igat Bay, the eastern 20 BACAQ. PIER 14 arm of Dumanquilas Bay, on the south coast of Mindanao. 14 MINDAMAD LUMBER C 14 The Mindanao Lumber Company's pier was used by large PORT FACILITIES AT vessels calling for lumber. The municipal wharf was used by BACAO, MINDANAO coastal commercial vessels (FIGURES VI - 107 and VI -108). 7° 33' N., 123 02 , E. (a) Harbor. The harbor is in Igat Bay, a large inlet on the SCALE OF FEET eastern side of Dumanquilas Bay. It is perfectly landlocked and THE 1000 o 3000 is considered the best anchorage section of Dumanquilas Bay. Igat Bay, 3½ miles wide at its entrance between Linokaedanum SOURCE: C.BG.S. CHART 4650 Point and Igat Point and extending 5 miles southeastward, has APRIL 1944 three hundred and sixty-two 350-yard, and one hundred and PREPARED BY THE BOARD OF ENGINEERS FOR seventy-eight 500-yard berths. The depths at the entrance range RIVERS AND HARBORS, CORPS OF ENGINEERS. from 12 to 20 fathoms, decreasing to 5 fathoms at the head. FIGURE VI 102. Bacao, The average depth is about 12 fathoms. Map showing location of port facilities. Anchorage may be found most any where in the harbor, ac- cording to draft. from the shore for about 200 feet. Depths (1941) alongside The high water interval at Margosatubig is 6 hours 10 the face were 27 feet at low water. A belt conveyor extended minutes. The higher high water height is 5.3 feet, and the lowest along the western side of the causeway to the face of the pier, tide recedes to 1.5 feet. permitting ships to load coal directly into the hold from a (b) Landing facilities. The facilities at Margosatubig con- stockpile at the shore-end of the pier. The pier was provided sisted of 2 open pile timber T-head piers. with pile dolphins along both outer and inner faces, and had The lumber company pier (Reference number 1, FIGURE mooring bollards at intervals along its face. Ships berthed VI - 107) consisted of a T-head, 180 feet long on its outer face along the outer side but smaller vessels could come alongside and about 30 feet wide, with an approach about 60 feet long the inner side (FIGURES VI 105 and VI-106). and 30 feet wide. Depths alongside (1937) were 20 feet near A small storage warehouse was located near the stockpile, the center of the wharf face, with deeper water towards the ends. PORT FACILITIES Page VI 79 FIGURE VI 103. Bacao. View of pier, looking east, showing type of construction and railroad trackage. Prior to April 1935. It was provided with warping dolphins at each end and pile fenders along the outer face (FIGURE VI 109). The municipal wharf (Reference number 2, FIGURE VI M mud 107) was located about 100 yards westward from the lumber S sand company wharf. It consisted of a T-head, 40 feet long and about soft 20 feet wide, at the end of a timber approach. Depths (1937) were 10 feet alongside the face. The wharf was provided with warping dolphins at each end, and a stairway landing at the PIER east end (FIGURE VI - 110). 9 Motor launches were reported available. 28 (c) Clearance facilities. The lumber company operated a logging railroad 7.1 miles long. The road had 2 locomotives. Motor launches and small interisland vessels furnished con- N nection with Zamboanga, 3 times each week. 12 (d) Availability of supplies. Fresh water was piped to the PORT FACILITIES AT municipal wharf, but it would have to be boiled for drinking purposes. Provisions were obtainable in small quantities. MALANGAI, MINDANAO 7 38 N., 123 (43) Flecha Point, Mindanao Island (7° 22' N, 123° SCALE OF FEET 10,00 0 3000 25' E). Flecha Point is on the tip of Baganian Peninsula on the south- SOUNDINGS SOURCE: C.&G.S. CHART 4650 ern coast of Mindanao (FIGURE V 16). The landing was at APRIL 1944 IN the pier of the Santa Clara Lumber Company. PREPARED BY THE BOARD OF ENGINEERS FOR FATHOMS RIVERS AND HARBORS, CORPS OF ENGINEERS. (a) Harbor. The harbor is a small bight lying between Flecha and Tambulian Points. Open to the south, it is insecure FIGURE VI 104. Malangai. except in favorable weather. It is sheltered only from north- Map showing location of port facilities. northeast, and northwest winds. The harbor is about 1½ miles wide at the entrance, receding for about % mile into the coast. The depths at the entrance are 35 fathoms, with a depth of 20 (b) Landing facilities. The facilities at Flecha Point con- fathoms about 500 yards from the head of the bight. There is a sisted of a timber T-head wharf. Depths (1937) ranged from live coral reef, with a least depth of 9 feet, about 130 yards 13 to 35 feet along the face, with the deeper water at the eastern end. Vessels were advised to approach the wharf from the south- southward from the end of the pier. Anchorage may be found in 21 to 23 fathoms of water over eastward and drop a kedge anchor. coral sand bottom, about 550 yards 137° from the end of the (c) Clearance facilities. There was regular monthly steam- pier. ship connection with Manila. Foreign vessels called occasionally In strong winds, a heavy sea sets around Flecha Point. for lumber. Page VI 80 PORT FACILITIES Face of Wharf 160/1. Depth along side at low water sire FIGURE VI 105. Malangai. View of pier before completion, showing type of construction and coal-loading equipment. May 1941. (d) Availability of supplies. Fresh water, suitable for (d) Availability of supplies. Food supplies, including boiler purposes, was piped to the pier. A small amount of diesel beef, were obtainable in moderate quantities. oil, stocked for use in the mill, was available in an emergency. (44) Pagadian, Mindanao Island (7° 49' N, 123° 26' (45) Malabang, Mindanao Island (7° 36' N, 124° 04' E). E). Pagadian is in the northern part of Pagadian Bay, the north- Malabang is on the Malabang River, which flows into the western arm of Illana Bay, on the south coast of Mindanao northeastern part of Illana Bay on the south side of Mindanao (FIGURE VI - 111). It was a village of some importance, and (FIGURE V 16). There was a landing at the village. had a landing at the end of the main street of the town. (a) Harbor. Malabang is a river port about ½ mile above (4) Harbor. Pagadian Anchorage, the harbor, in the the mouth of the Malabang River, which is navigable only by small boats. northern part of Pagadian Bay, is about 1½ miles wide at the entrance and a little over 1 mile long. It is partly divided by a Vessels calling at Malabang anchor off the shore in the open reef and shoal which project southeastward from a small pen- roadstead of Illana Bay. The usual anchorage is in depths of 12 insula on the northwest shore. It is fringed with reefs and in to 15 fathoms, about 600 to 800 yards off a prominent cargo shed on the beach. the northern part there are several reefs awash at low water. The remainder is clear and provides 11 first-class anchorage Tidal currents flood northwestward along the coast and ebb southeastward. berths. Depths at the entrance are about 20 fathoms, with 9 to 16 fathoms inside. The 10-fathom contour follows the shore According to observations over a period of 7 years, the line at an average distance of 500 yards from the shore. The bay average annual rainfall is 152.42 inches, The driest months are is open to the southeast, but is protected from northeast and generally December and January through March. westerly winds. (b) Landing facilities. There was a boat landing at Mala- Good anchorage may be found about 1/2 mile southward of bang. There was a shed on the beach of Illana Bay. Lampaqui Islet, or about 600 yards northeastward of the islet, (c) Clearance facilities. A poor sandy road leads from the in 13 fathoms, over a mud bottom. cargo shed to the town, which is on the main coastal highway. The high water interval in Pagadian Bay is 6 hours 16 min- Small vessels called occasionally at the port for copra. utes. The higher high water height is 5.7 feet, and the lowest (d) Availability of supplies. A limited supply of food, gas- tide recedes to -1.5 feet. oline, diesel oil, kerosene, and lubricating oil was stored in the (b) Landing facilities. The landing at Pagadian consisted town. Fresh beef was available at nearby plantations. of rock and earth mole, about 6 feet wide, with a small timber landing at the end. It projected about 300 yards southward from (46) Parang, Mindanao Island (7° 22' N, 124° 15' the end of the main street of the town, and about halfway to the E). edge of the reef (Reference number 1, FIGURE VI - 111). There Parang is at the head of Polloc Harbor, which opens from Il- was no water at the end of the mole at low tide (FIGURE IV lana Bay, on the south side of Mindanao (FIGURE V - 16). 112). There was a pier at the town. Another small stone landing extended southwestward from (a) Harbor. Polloc Harbor is a natural harbor, with an the extremity of the small peninsula just west of Pagadian (Ref- area of about 181/2 square miles. The depths across the entrance, erence number 2, FIGURE VI 111). It was about 300 feet long which is about 31/2 miles wide, are over 24 fathoms. Within and extended to the edge of the reef. the entrance, depths range from 15 to 25 fathoms, and along (c) Clearance facilities. A road was under construction the fringing shore reef there is a depth of about 5 fathoms. The from Pagadian to Panguil Bay on the north coast which would shore reef is very narrow on the north side of the harbor, but have connected with the pier at Pagadian. There was launch projects from the eastern shore, at one point nearly 2 miles, and service with Cotabato 3 times weekly. extends 400 to 700 yards from the southern shore. PORT FACILITIES Page VI 81 Diesel Generator 115 220 V. FIGURE IV - 105. Malangi (continued) FIGURE VI 106. Malangai. View of pier before completion, showing type of construction and class of vessels using outside berth. Polloc Harbor is for the most part open to the westward, but mud bottom. Parang Anchorage provides space for 50 first-class is partially protected from westerly winds by Bongo Island, 5 anchorage berths. miles west-southwest of its northern entrance point. Good an- There are 2 tides daily, with rare exceptions. The average chorage for large vessels is available about 1/4 mile off the pier rise and fall is 4.8 feet, and the diurnal range is 5.6 feet. Tidal at Parang in depths of 14 to 15 fathoms, over mud bottom. currents reverse at high and low waters. Flood currents run Anchorage for large vessels with protection from the south- clockwise in the harbor and ebb currents counter-clockwise. west may be found on a prolongation of a ruined stone mole on During the first months of the year, when the wind is well the eastern side of Polloc Island, at about 750 yards, in a depth established from the northeast, there are often squalls in the of 17 fathoms, over muddy bottom. Small vessels can anchor afternoon from the north, accompanied by much lightning, closer inshore, but must keep outside the 14-fathom contour wind and rain. Before a squall begins the wind blows from the since the banks on the south side of the harbor are very steep. northwest and west, and after it is over the land breeze sets in There is anchorage with protection from west and north winds until the following morning. During the southwest monsoon on the eastern side of Quidamak Bay, in a depth of 48 feet, over the wind freshens after midday and varies from southwest to Page VI 82 PORT FACILITIES LUNGUI I. MACULAY I MAY FIGURE VI 108. Margosatubig. Aerial view of harbor, showing location of port facilities. FIGURE VI - 109. Margosatubig. View of Mindanao Lumber Company pier, looking southwest, showing type of construction. west and northwest. During this period rain falls in abundance and heavy thunderstorms occur. Fender piles had been placed along both the outer and inner faces of the pierhead, but not at the end. The preferable side for (b) Landing facilities. The wharf at Parang was an L- berthing was the outer (south) face. In July, 1938 the depths shaped pier, consisting of a causeway approach 564 by 39 feet alongside this face decreased gradually from 30 feet at the and a reinforced concrete pierhead at about a 125° angle, 39 feet wide and about 300 feet long in 1941 (FIGURE VI - 113). western end to 4 feet at the eastern end, and alongside the inner (north) face varied similarly from 17 to 6 feet. FIGURE VI. 107 LANIS 155 LINDKAEDANUM Mr. PARS PARS SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS 12 it - or SAI Crs....course Co...corol ID S 22 ⑉ & PIRANSIAN Miss mud 12 OUR Hd...hard 42 MALANGN 12 5/1...soft S. sand MARGOSATURIO is NAGA- 12 NAGA is EN Tuningalang a BACAO DAYANA Gapi Bay 4 & PORT SIBULAN MALIDAY or OLUTANGA I. ID IS VICINITY MAP IS 2 ID N BANAL un MORO SCALE OF MILES o 5 10 11 Pumul (78 fs seg. of trees(y) IS . 7 10 IS 16 IT 14 10 2. IS et % TAMILAN 6, To IS 42 - IS 9 is n 12 10 st B 0 17 10 , 5 , 11 7) 14 it MANOYAK 17 , is is 10 6 o 21 online 18 19 IT 17 16 a et 16 IS a 16 A 71 st i 71 19 IS 20 17 is et IS II et 12 4 If Dumanquilas & of 2 20 is 14 10 42 18 17 36 7 13 3 il 0 of 4) 17 17 IS 17 , 6: 7 5 is a % 10 T 9 IT IS 62 9 7 TIGUANAR Pr. 6, IE 6 g at GAT IS 8 10 a IO 9 - 7 17 12 of 14 12 23 9 de 12 205 IS 4 9 ID 29 27 G 71 9 10 TALAPOR PM I or 9 19 10 R. 443 H on 24 me 14 a 21 IS IS 12 24 24 14 or 22 9 51 24 i) ast as 24 23 14 12 14 to no D 25 8 Weat Telmson 18 falemn Bay 2 PORT FACILITIES AT 4 I 21 12 3 & MARGOSATUBIG, MINDANAO 7* 35' N., 123° 10 E. 20 23 23 5 MARGOSATUR SCALE OF MILES IS a - o 2 ⑆ 24 II of FT 21 231 54 SOURCE: C.B.G.S. CHART NO. 4650 PREPARED BY THE BOARD OF ENGINEERS FOR RIVERS AND HARBORS. CORPS ( APRIL 1944 FIGURE VI 107. Margosatubig. Map showing location of port (inset) and port plan showing location of facilities PORT FACILITIES Page VI 83 Proposed port improvement included land reclamation and (47) Kalamansig (Port Lebak), Mindanao Island (6° the construction of a cargo shed. 33' N, 124° 03' E). (c) Clearance facilities. Trucks had access from the wharf Kalamansig is on the south coast of Mindanao, and on the to the coastal road and to the island road system. east coast of Moro Gulf, at about the middle of the north shore of Port Lebak (FIGURE VI - 114). No landing facilities have (d) Availability of supplies. Cotabato was the usual source been reported. of supplies for visiting vessels. Fresh water was not available at (a) Harbor. Port Lebak is the harbor for Kalamansig. It is a natural harbor, with depths shoaling gradually from 39 the pier. fathoms at its entrance to 8 fathoms, 1/4 mile from its head. The FIGURE VI - 110. Margosatubig. View of municipal pier, looking southwest, showing type of construction. PAGADIAN 123°30'E PANQUIL BAY CEBUANO BARRACKS # 9 2 I is 2 M 1200 12/m 16 17 9 PAGADIAN 0 PANDANAN 16 15 19 IS % 8 (2 M IS PAGADIAN BAY 18 DUGOL IS 20 14 DUPULISAN PT. 14 19 2 IS 7°45'N 12 16 20 7°45'N SEMARUGA PT.V 20 26 21 & Dumagok 1 (190) 22 DINAPANS - 12 ILLANA BAY IS 35 5 a TUCABADOC PT F 25 I5 21 15 » OSAGAYARANICINITY MAP X 17 15 7°47 PISANI. SCALE OF MILES 4 6 8 IS 22 123°30'E 0 2 IO 30 15 2 16 Co. corol 5. sand M. mud 143 26 14 SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS Dupulisan Bay 25 16. PORT FACILITIES AT 18 19 28 32 PAGADIAN, MINDANAO 22 25 SCALE OF FEET Dupulisan Pt 1000 o 1000 " SOURCE cass CHART NO 4652 PREPARED BY THE BOARD or ENGINEERS FOR RIVERS AND HARBORS, CORPS OF ENG APRIL 944 FIGURE VI 111. Pagadian. Map showing location of Pagadian (inset) and port plan showing location of facilities. Page VI 84 PORT FACILITIES FIGURE VI 112. Pagadian. View of pier showing type of construction. 124 . " N is II N e a . 4 a 27 8 20 23 20 e a 25 a a Il is 13 If is no 21 29 is 23 If 22 Parang Anchorage PARANG o a » , y I'M'E Baceled e a 17 N A o , IF DECREASE e a a is 27 22 % 24 < a if 27 a D n - as 20 4 - as 14 a 20 12 17 ne " 20 , Polloc "Anchorage - # is it a M 2 PORT FACILITIES AT M mud 5 send rity rocky PARANG, MINDANAO SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS SCALE OF FEET 1000 o 1000 2000 PREPARED - THE BOARD OF ENGINEERS FOR 124°W RIVERS AND HARBORS CORPS or ENGINEERS SOURCE CREE CHART NO.4654 APRIL 1944 FIGURE VI 113. Parang, Map showing location of port facilities. 3 PORT FACILITIES Page VI 85 COTABATO 30 a 36, rky. recky 25 KALAMANSIG 23 # # 36 29 36 23 2 KALAMANSIG 30 34 25 21 IT x 38 if 22 26 # 0 a 29 26 , VICINITY MAP MILBUK 25 2 29 17 2 SCALE OF MILES 29 A K o 20 39 29 1 is 31 of 12 - 22 IT 35 36 21 5 48 42 . 22 5 26 26 29 29 7 29 31 ID 24 , 28 29 27 20 at 35 27 28 22, 22 PORT FACILITIES AT KALAMANSIG, MINDANAO 48 SCALE OF FEET 0 2,000 4,000 SOURCE cass CHART 4653 PREPARED BY THE BOARD or ENGINEERS FOR OUNDINGS IN FATHOMS RIVERS AND HARBORS, CORPS or ENGINEERS APRIL 1944 02 FIGURE VI 114. Kalmansig. Map showing location of Kalmansig (inser) and plan showing harbor. entrance is about 1 mile wide, but shore reefs, bare at low water, trails. A small coasting vessel called every 2 weeks at Kalaman- reduce the width of the entrance channel to about 1,300 yards. sig. From its entrance, the harbor extends eastward about 2 miles, with depchs of over 30 feet available not more than 500 yards (48) Milbuk, Mindanao Island (6° 09' N, 124° 16' from shore. E). The shores of Port Lebak are mangrove, fronted by a coral Milbuk is on the southern coast of Mindanao, on the east reef, 100 to 300 yards wide. From about the middle of the side of Moro Gulf (FIGURE VI 115). It was a small lumber southern side of the harbor a coral reef, which bares at half tide, town, but latest reports (1937) indicate that the mill is no projects northwestward about 700 yards from the coast and longer in operation and the wharf is in ruins. forms a natural breakwater. Further protection from westerly (4) Harbor. Milbuk harbor is'a natural harbor with gen- winds is afforded by the reef extending south-southwestward eral depths of from 5 to 10 fathoms. It is about 1 mile wide at about 500 yards from Lebak Point, the northern entrance point its entrance between fringing coral shore reefs, bare at low of the harbor. With good shelter available from all winds, Port water, and indents the coast about 1/2 mile in a north-north- Lebak is the best protected anchorage in this part of Mindanao. easterly direction. The harbor is open to the southward, but Fifteen first-class anchorage berths open to west winds in depths partially protected by outlying shoals and reefs. of 12 fathoms, or more over mud bottom, are available. One Anchorage can be taken in the channel between these dan- protected first-class anchorage berth is available in depths of 16 gers and the shore in depths of 15 to 20 fathoms, over mud to 23 fathoms, over mud, eastward of Lebak Point, and 2 in bottom. Good anchorage for large vessels within the harbor depths of 10 to 22 fathoms, over mud, eastward of Tubotubo can be obtained in depths of 9 to 10 fathoms, over mud bot- Island, and 1 second-class anchorage in 8 fathoms, at the inner tom, 150 yards south-southeast of the end of a ruined wharf at end of the bay. the head of the harbor. Shore reefs reduce the effective width of The average annual rainfall is 113.99 inches. The driest the harbor near the anchorage to about 400 yards. months were generally from December through March. A moderate littoral current, little affected by tide or weather, (b) Landing facilities. There are no known wharves in sets northwestward along the shore, but offshore a strong south- the port. easterly current is encountered. (c) Clearance facilities. Port Lebak was the terminus of a (b) Landing facilities. The only known landing was a pier short logging railway. Access to the interior was limited to at the head of the harbor, in ruins for several years. The pier was Page VI 86 PORT FACILITIES about 500 feet long and 25 feet wide, with a depth of about 18 (b) Landing facilities. The only facility was a small boat feet at its end, shoaling rapidly inshore. landing, about 50 feet long and 20 feet wide (FIGURE VI (c) Clearance facilities. A logging railway terminated in 117). Milbuk. Proposed construction included a causeway with a pier at its (d) Availability of supplies. Provisions were scarce. seaward end, 328 feet by 39 feet, having a depth of 30 feet at low tide. Up to 1938 no work had been done on this project. (49) Makar, Mindanao Island (6° 06' N, 125° 09' E). (c) Clearance facilities. Interisland vessels called fre- Makar is in the northwest corner of Sarangani Bay, on the quently to load cattle and copra. Trucks had access from the south side of Mindanao, 1/4 mile north of the mouth of Makar waterfront to a road leading northward, reported under con- River, on the northwest shore of Makar Cove (FIGURE VI - struction (1939), which would provide a connection with the 116). It was a shipping point for produce of the Sarangani val- island road system. ley. There was a small landing at the town. (a) Harbor. The harbor is in Makar Cove, a small natural (50) Glan, Mindanao Island (5° 50' N, 125° 12' E). harbor on the west side of Sarangani Bay, near its head. The Glan is near the southern end of Mindanao Island, at the depths in the cove are too great for anchorage, except close to head of Canalasan Cove, a small indentation on the eastern side shore. The 10-fathom contour runs about 200 yards offshore, of Sarangani Bay (FIGURE VI - 118). It was the largest settlé- and the 30-fathom contour about 300 yards from shore. ment in Sarangani Bay, and a town of growing importance as a The anchorage area is small but partially protected from the shipping point for copra and hemp. There was a pier at the town. southerly wind and sea that usually prevail during the southwest (a) Harbor. The harbor is in Canalasan Cove, a small nat- monsoon, and the bight affords a safe boat landing. Anchorage ural harbor, with depchs too great for anchorage in its central can be taken in a depth of 20 fathoms, over mud, about 275 part. The 10-fathom contour runs from 200 to 500 yards from yards from shore. A conspicuous 1-story building with a red shore, and bottom depths rapidly increase offshore. The cove roof, on the waterfront, bears 321° from the anchorage. is exposed to the north winds, which are experienced between M mud COTABATO S sand Co coral rky rocky R 200 Milbuk MILBUK MORO KALAMANSIG 42 61 party cleared 52 54 62 31 71 VICINITY MAP $ MILBUK SCALE OF MILES 8 o 20 8 3 3 IQ 3 8 3 41 21 3 = Il IO 9 3 F II IZ 21 13 10 7 7 24 a St 13 a 10 71 31. II II IS 8 3 PORT FACILITIES AT St. 62 12 21 3 31 74 5: 5 MILBUK, MINDANAO A 16 - SCALE OF FEET a 17 3 5 o 1,000 17 2,000 IS 15 16 13 5 6" 09'N. 19 IO 17 SOURCE: C.8 G.S. CHART 4607 10 IN is II SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS 124° PREPARED BY THE BOARD OF ENGINEERS FOR RIVERS AND HARBORS, CORPS OF ENG. APRIL 1944 FIGURE VI- 115. Milbuk. Map showing location of Milbuk (inset) and port plan showing location of facilities. PORT FACILITIES Page VI 87 DUMPAO PT Mokor 48 = N IO 21 22 MAKAR is 7 45 6 35 07 Ldq. 27 € Gian is 58 75 23 VICINITY MAP MELAT 9 6. 03 30 M SCALE OF MILES 24 53 5 o 5 ID REVE 20 40 76 57 a 34 52 7 22 34 60 PORT FACILITIES AT 6 20 34 59 MAKAR, MINDANAO 78 SCALE OF FEET 500 o 500 1,000 1,500 2,000 36 56 74 92 SOURCE: C.& G.S. CHART NO. 4653 SOUNDINGS, IN FATHOMS Co corai 25 51 N mud APRIL 1944 PREPARED BY THE BOARD OF ENGINEERS FOR RIVERS AND HARBORS, CORPS OF ENGINEERS. FIGURE VI 116. Makar. Map showing location of Makar (inset) and port plan showing location of facilities. FIGURE VI 117. Makar. View of pier, looking northwest, showing type of construction. 1926. November and March, and it is reported that there are times from the northward or westward, as extremely shoal water lies when landing cannot be made. immediately eastward of the pierhead. Anchorage can be taken northwestward of the town in depths (c) Clearance facilities. Interisland steamers called about of 9 to 15 fathoms. The bottom is generally mud, with some every 12 days, furnishing communication with Davao and sand and coral. Manila, Access to the interior was limited to trails. The mean annual rainfall is 58.35 inches. (d) Availability of supplies. A small amount of diesel oil, (b) Landing facilities. Facilities at the port consisted of a gasoline, and lubricating oil was stocked for local use. Hogs, reinforced concrete pierhead 82 feet long and 291/2 feet wide, chickens, and eggs could be secured but vegetables were scarce. connected to shore by a causeway (FIGURE VI - 119). The outer face of the wharf had depths of 12 to 18 feet (1937) (51) Lawa, Mindanao Island (6° 12' N, 125° 42' E). outside the fender piles, the greater depth being at the western Lawa is on the western shore of Davao Gulf, about 1/2 mile end. The water deepens rapidly off the pierhead and also shoals north of Calian Point (FIGURE V - 19). There was a pier at the rapidly toward shore. Approach to the pier had to be made town. Page VI 88 PORT FACILITIES II" 125°12' - 85 24 34 If 23 ISO 125°0'E BUAYAN 18 E 55 MAKAR ⑉ BAY 8 # 47 26 6°0'N 50g 37 IBF LONDON: LO - 62 SARANGH TANGO PT. I TAMPUAN TAMPAT PT 30 36 44 SAPU $ PT 42 47 48 35 LS = 66 24-lg 5 VICINITY MAP 26 34 31 SCALE OF MILES GLAN 19 37 o 5 10 15 17 25 is 1 Ca 12 77 78 11 12 30 LETUE is 24 48 21 20 J 34 $ 21 35 43 17 Gi 30 51 40 16 19 30 85 Ce so 25 22 21 44 20 48 % 2 is 5° F 5° ************** & 28 so 430 14 27 so 9 34 18 4 63 S 24 17 34. Co.coral S..sand M..mud 20 36 10 SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS sPIER PORT FACILITIES AT GLAN, MINDANAO Il SCALE OF FEET 1000 o 1000 2000 GLAN RADIO SOURCE C 86.5. CHART NO. 4656 APRIL 1944 PREPARED BY THE BOARD OF ENGINEERS FOR RIVERS AND HARBORS, CORPS OF ENG. II" 125° If FIGURE VI 118. Glan. Map showing location of Glan (inset) and port plan showing location of facilities. FIGURE VI 119. Glan. View of pier showing type of construction. Prior to April 1935. (a) Harbor. The harbor is an open roadstead, off the west- (c) Clearance facilities. A launch made weekly trips to ern shore of Davao Gulf. Davao. (b) Landing facilities. Facilities at Lawa consisted of an open pile and timber pier, about 300 feet long, with a depth of (52) Malita, Mindanao Island (6° 24' N, 125° 37' E). 3 feet at the end (1937). It was maintained in good condition Malita is on the western shore of Davao Gulf, about 40 miles (FIGURE VI 120). south of Davao (FIGURE V - 19). It was the largest settlement PORT FACILITIES Page VI. 89 & Post Office e N Radio Sta.o 30 I 49 coral 54 S sand MALITA 28 60 85 40 7 SOUNDINGS 45, IN 19 MALITA Pier so FATHOMS IS 5 35 I PORT FACILITIES AT 32 MALITA, MINDANAO I SCALE OF FEET 1000 o 2000 I SOURCE C.&G.S. CHART 4656 APRIL 1944 6° 24 N. 2 PREPARED BY THE BOARD OF ENGINEERS FOR RIVERS AND HARBORS, CORPS OF ENGINEERS. 125 37'E. 21 7 FIGURE VI- 122. Malita. Port plan showing location of facilities. FIGURE VI- 120. Lawa. View of pier at low tide, looking northeast, showing type of (b) Landing facilities. Landing facilities consisted of an construction. open pile timber pier (FIGURE VI- 122), about 250 feet long and 30 feet wide, with a depth of 9 feet (1937) at the end (FIGURE VI - 123). Storage space in the plantation warehouses and open space in the coconut groves near the pier were probably available. (c) Clearance facilities. There were only trails leading from the pier. (d) Availability of supplies. Fresh water could be taken from the stream to the north of the pier. Ice was obtainable in small quantities. A small amount of diesel oil and gasoline was normally stocked for plantation use. (53) Lacaron, Mindanao Island (6° 27' N, 125° 35' E). Lacaron is midway along the east coast of Davao Gulf, 3 miles northwestward of Malita (FIGURE V. 19). The landing was only suitable for small boats. (a) Harbor. The harbor is an open roadstead off the west- FIGURE VI- 121. Malita. ern shore of Davao Gulf. Aerial view of harbor, showing location pier. There appears to be no appreciable shore reef and the shoal along the shore is relatively narrow. There are depths of 21 to 49 fathoms, over sand bottom, offshore. Anchorage would be along this section of the coast. There was a pier for the ship- ment of hemp and copra (FIGURE VI - 121). exposed to all but westerly directions. (a) Harbor. The harbor is an open roadstead, with depths (b) Landing facilities. The landing at Lacaron was small too great for anchorage up to about 300 yards from shore. and suitable only for small launches. A small stream which enters the gulf at a point about 550 (c) Clearance facilities. A launch made weekly trips to yards north of the pier deposits sediment which makes anchor- Davao. age inadvisable near its mouth. Vessels should anchor to the southeastward, where there are depths of 15 fathoms, over sand, (54) Daliao, Mindanao Island (7° 01' N, 125° 30' E). about 200 yards off the pier. Daliao is at the mouth of Daliao River, on the west side of The mean annual rainfall is 71.51 inches. Davao Gulf, about 73/4 miles southwest of Davao (FIGURE V - Page VI 90 PORT FACILITIES 19). It was the headquarters of the Furakawa Plantation Com- 800 yards offshore. The approach is deep and clear. The bay is pany. A pier was located at the plantation. open to southerly winds. (a) Harbor. The harbor is an open roadstead, with depths Anchorage can be taken in depths of from 10 to 30 fathoms, too great for anchorage up to about 1/2 mile from shore. It is over mud and sand bottom, from 475 to 800 yards from shore. open to the southeast and protected to some extent from the The depths farther offshore are too great for anchorage. There southward by Daliao Reefs, which lie about 1/2 mile south of are four first-class, and seven second-class anchorage berths avail- Daliao. able in the bay. Anchorage is available about 1/4 mile southeast of the wharf (b) Landing facilities. Facilities at the port consisted of an in 10 fathoms, over mud. A mooring buoy was anchored off the wharf in a depth of about 23 feet. open-pile timber pier, about 350 feet long, widened at the The tides in the vicinity of Daliao flood northward and ebb outer end (FIGURE VI - 127). Vessels berthed along the west- southward. ern side of this platform, about 75 feet long, where the depths (b) Landing facilities. Facilities at the port consisted of a ranged from 18 to 13 feet (1937). timber pier approximately 600 feet long, with a depth of 14 In the rear of the pier were large warehouses. Open storage feet at its end (1937). An industrial railway served the pier. space was limited to the adjacent cultivated fields, which were Fresh water was piped to an outlet about midway between the thickly planted with abaca. Lighterage of cargo in the port was shore and the pierhead. Traveling, 15-ton, motor-operated accomplished by use of barges and SCOWS based at Santa Ana, cranes were available. Davao. FIGURE VI 123. Malita. View of pier, looking northwest, showing type of construction. Prior to April 1935. There were 3 large concrete and galvanized iron warehouses. 30 Open storage space was available in the surrounding area (FIG- URES VI - 124 and V -125). corol M mud (c) Clearance facilities. Trucks had access from the wharf rocky to the Davao-Cotabato road. Large interisland steamers called s sand regularly for hemp, but most of it was lightered to Santa Ana, 79 86 for export. TalemoBay no 2 67 (d) Availability of supplies. Fresh water was available at Dumaled Lipadag (2) the pier. SOUNDINGS 42 IDS IN (e) Repair facilities. Only minor repairs were possible. DALIAO Pier FATHOMS = 16 (55) Talomo, Mindanao Island (7° 03' N, 125° 33' E). Review 20 136 165 236 Talomo is on the north side of Talomo Bay, a bight on the 37 29 west coast of Davao Gulf, about 4 miles west-southwest of 29 PORT FACILITIES AT 29 36 139 Davao (FIGURE VI - 126). The Ohta Development Company DALIAO, MINDANAO SCALE OF MILES had a pier at its plantation. 34, el SOURCE cass. CHART NO 4624 (a) Harbor. Talomo Bay is a natural harbor about 2½ 34f APRIL 1944 PREPARED BY THE BOARD OF ENGINEERS FOR miles wide at its entrance and indenting the coast about 1 mile RIVERS AND HARBORS, CORPS OF ENGINEERS in a northerly direction. The 10-fathom contour runs from 175 to 475 yards offshore, and the 30-fathom contour from 600 to FIGURE VI 124. Daliao. Port plan showing location of facilities. PORT FACILITIES Page VI 91 Gr MINDANAOl DALIAO DAVAO"18 ke 1935 ANT. PP480953 A123'29'29' B.52 FIGURE VI - 125. Daliao. Aerial view showing pier, warehouses and open storage areas. 1935. (c) Clearance facilities. A highway connected the pier to 200 yards wide, with depths of 45 to 65 fathoms, mud bottom, the Davao-Cotabato road. Large interisland steamers called in the gulf and 11 fathoms off the river entrance. weekly for hemp, but most of it was lightered to Santa Ana for (b) Landing facilities. The landing consisted of a pier export. which projected from the eastern side of a marginal wharf along (d) Availability of supplies. Food and water were avail- the north bank of the river (FIGURE VI - 128). This landing able. appeared to be of timber piling construction, and probably about (e) Repair facilities. There are not known to be any facili- 20 feet wide and less than 100 feet long. ties at the port for the repair of vessels. (c) Clearance facilities. A roadway connected the pier to (56) Madaum, Mindanao Island (7° 22' N, 125° 48' the large open area around the buildings. Small launches called daily from Davao. E). Madaum is on the north bank of the Madaum River, which (57) Monserat, Mindanao Island (6° 36' N, 126° 05' discharges into the head of Davao Gulf, between the Tagum E). and Hijo Rivers (FIGURE VI 26). It was the headquarters of Monserat is at the head of Borot Cove, on the eastern side of a large hemp plantation, just inside the river entrance, where Davao Gulf, on the south coast of Mindanao Island (FIGURE there was a landing. V - 114). There is a landing at the village. (4) Harbor. Madaum is a river port, on the Madaum River, (a) Harbor. The harbor is in Borot Cove which is about which is hardly more than a slough. It has 2 feet of water on the ½ mile wide at the entrance between Borot and Salun Points, bar at low tide and 12 feet inside. On the eastern side of the and extends nearly 1/2 mile northeastward. Both entrance points mouth is a small coral point covered with mangroves, where the and the head of the cove are fringed with reefs, leaving a con- river turns sharply westward. The gulf shore is sand beach, about tracted anchorage space. Open to the west-sourhwest, the cove is Page VI 92 PORT FACILITIES well protected from wind and seas from all other quadrants. (a) Harbor. It was a small port limited by the width of Little sea enters the cove. The cove is deep, with depths at the the channel which in some places was not more than 1,200 feet entrance of 17 fathoms, decreasing to 4 fathoms near head. wide. Borot Reef, covered with very little water, and with rocks awash Depths are generally 30 feet or more at mean lower low wa- near its southern edge, lies about 1/2 mile off the entrance to the ter, both in the harbor and in the two entrance channels. How- cove. ever, in the western entrance channel there are several shoal The anchorage space is an area about 400 yards in extent in patches, including one which is bare at low water. the northern part of the cove. There is reported to be little swing The port is protected from winds in all directions except pos- room. The minimum charted depths are 4 fathoms, over a sibly northeast. sandy bottom. There are two anchorages. One, west of the wharf, has depths (b) Landing facilities. The landing consisted of a small of 36 to 54 feet at lower low water. In it there is barely room for concrete pier, located in front of the town, at the head of the one second-class berth. The bottom is coral and sand. The other cove, with a controlling depth of 13 feet alongside the face. anchorage is in the channel north of Kalut Island. In the latter Vessels went alongside after dropping a stern anchor or bower swinging room is limited, parts of this channel being only 600 as the cove is deep and there is little swinging room. feet wide. Large vessels can secure by running lines to man- (c) Availability of supplies. Fresh water could be secured groves on shore. at the head of the landing. The diurnal tidal range is 2.2 feet. The tidal currents through the channel are very strong. The ebb flows northeast with a D. Sulu Archipelago. velocity of 4 to 5 knots. The velocity of the flood is about 1 knot less. The period of ebb is longer than the period of flood. (1) Isabela, Basilan Island (6° 42' N, 121° 58' E, HO 4511 and 4543). (b) Landing facilities. There were two wharves at Isabela, but only one was used to any extent. This wharf had 200 feet of Isabela is on the northwest coast of Basilan Island. It is on berthing space. At mean lower low water depth alongside was the eastern side of the channel between Basilan Island and 18 feet at the west end and 29 feet at the east end. It was cap- Malamaui Island. The port was formerly the site of a navy yard able of loading 70,000 feet of lumber per hatch every 24 hours. and repair shops and was the headquarters for rubber, coconut, There was also a small landing with 12 feet of water along- and lumber companies. side. It was used by small interisland boats. Mijo A l'agum Rrd Modaum 125 33' E 125° E 126 E To DAYER Davgo Talomo Tomos N Borot Cove Monserat TALOMO Chts Development Co Mational THAT 7°03'N- VICINITY MAP SCALE OF MILES Church 50 IO 20 16 3i MATINA Pier 16 17 is 21 19 13 B 21 24 25 J 25 23 29 28 a 21 34 35 # 15 Co * 28 34 42 23 24 17 45 47 47 ID: 38 45 a 10 57 54 46 21 40 60 60 48 23 $ DUMUP 45 30 M 72 48 is 4 79 74 10 67 47 29 62 T a 2 0 m 0 B a 80- y - 67 33 oz N I 26 12 22 PORT FACILITIES AT ID 14 22 27 33 Co..coral mud sand TALOMO, MINDANAO 12 16 44 SI SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS- 45 SCALE OF FEET 30 1000 o 1000 3000 12 PREPARED BY THE BOARD OF ENGINEERS FOR SOURCE CHART NO.4656 21) RIVERS AND HARBORS, CORPS OF ENGINEERS APRIL 1944 Dumblog Pt. FIGURE VI. 126. Talomo. Map showing location of Talomo (inset) and port plan showing location of facilities. PORT FACILITIES Page VI 93 FIGURE VI 127. Talomo. Aerial view showing pier, warehouses and open storage areas. (a) Harbor. The water area in front of the wharves is approximately 1,100 feet long and from 600 to 900 feet wide. Throughout most of its area, the port has depths of from 30 to 72 feet. The best entrance is from the southeast. Depths here are from 42 to 60 feet. In the middle of the northern entrance there is a shoal with mean low water depths of 22.5 feet. The anchorage is well sheltered, but due to its limited area, it is available only to small vessels. The Basilan Lumber Company maintained a fixed red light at the western end of their large wharf. There were also 2 small tripod beacons with red targets at the outer end of the reef extending from the south edge of Great Gounan Island. These beacons could be passed fairly close to. The mean tidal range is 2.2 feet, the diurnal range 3 feet. The Basilan Lumber Company reports that currents along the face FIGURE VI 128. Madaum. of the dock lag about 1/2 hour behind the tides, and have a Aerial view of harbor, showing pier. maximum strength of 2 or 3 knots. They are strongest on the ebb, which sets southwest against the face of the dock. On the (c) Clearance facilities. A road ran across the island from flood, the tidal current sets northeast and off the wharf face. Isabela to Lamitan and Bojelebung. (b) Landing facilities. There were two wharves. The There was a radio station maintained by the Bureau of Posts. Basilan Lumber Company wharf had a face about 513 feet long (d) Availability of supplies. Fresh water was available at with depths alongside of 17 to 29 feet at mean lower low the pier. water (FIGURE VI - 129). It was capable of loading 7,000- Small quantities of supplies, provisions, and gasoline could be 8,000 feet of lumber per hatch per hour up to 500,000 feet in obtained. 24 hours. There was an extension for launches at the east end (2) Port Holland, Basilan Island (6° 33' N. 121° of the large wharf. Its face was about 85 feet long. It was paral- 52' E, HO 4540). lel to and set back 4 feet from the face of the large wharf. There Port Holland, primarily a lumber exporting port, is on the was a large anchor at the eastern side of the wharf, and a chain northwest coast of Basilan Island. It receives its protection from set in rocks and concrete about 120 feet southwest of the west Great Gounan Island to the northwest. end. These were for the lines of large vessels. Page VI 94 PORT FACILITIES FIGURE VI 129. Port Holland Looking southwest toward log storage pond and large wharf. No date. ONI 88089. A small wharf 390 feet east of the large wharf had a face 55 on the north coast of Jolo Island. Protection comes from Tulay- feet long and a depth alongside of 6 feet at mean lower low an Island. water. (a) Harbor. Depths between Tandu Bato and Tulayan (c) Clearance facilities. Rail tracks were reported behind Island are from 11 to 32 feet at lower low water. The best en- the main wharf for use locally by the lumber company. trance is east of Tulayan Island. Depths in this entrance are up There was weekly steamship connection between Port Hol- to 78 feet, but there are several shoal patches. The western land, Cebu, Manila, and Zamboanga. entrance is very greatly obstructed by shoals. (d) Availability of supplies. Water was piped to the large There is no information regarding tides at Tandu Bato, but wharf but could be obtained only in small quantities. the diurnal range at Tulayan Island, across the channel, is 2.4 Limited food supplies and some gasoline and diesel oil were feet. available. (b) Landing facilities. Formerly there was a stone mole (e) Repair facilities. A large machine shop maintained by and wooden pier. The wooden pier has been removed but the the Basilan Lumber Company was available for minor repairs. end of the mole should not be approached as broken piles are still there. In 1937 a depth of 6 feet at mean low water was re- (3) Kulibato Point (Lamitan), Basilan Island (6° 39' ported at the end of the causeway. N, 122° 08' E, HO 4511). (c) Clearance facilities. A good road connected Tandu Kulibato Point is on the northeast coast of Basilan Island. It Bato and Jolo. was the port for Lamitan, 2 miles southwest and up the Gu- bauan River. A very small port, it was used primarily as a port (d) Availability of supplies. A few tins of gasoline were of call for interisland steamers. stocked near the end of the causeway to be used by the bus line in an emergency. (a) Harbor. The depth close to shore is about 18 feet at mean low water. Depth increases rapidly seaward. (e) Potentiality. The wooden pier probably could be re- constructed for use by small vessels. It is somewhat protected to the northwest but exposed to the north, northeast and east. It is well protected from the west (5) Siasi, Siasi Island (5° 33' N, 120° 49' E, Ho 4513). through south to southeast. No tidal information is available. The town of Siasi is on the west side of Siasi Island facing the channel between Siasi and Lapoc Islands (FIGURE VI - 130). (b) Landing facilities. There was only 1 pier at Kulibato Siasi is a constabulary post and the little port serves it. Point. It had a face 40 feet long and a depth alongside of 21 feet at mean lower low water. (a) Harbor. Depths in mid-channel range from 30 to 60 feet at mean lower low water. When entering Siasi the deepest (c) Clearance facilities. A road led from the port to Lami- water is along the west side of the channel until opposite the tan, At Lamitan it connected with the principal road of the town of Siasi when the deepest section is near the center. island. There is an anchorage in mid-channel southwest of the wharf. There was telephone service between Kulibato Point and Depths are 36 to 60 feet at mean low water. Lamitan, thence to Isabela and Bojelebung. Diurnal tide range is 4.1 feet. The tidal current runs strong (d) Availability of supplies. Small quantities of food and through the strait. It flows north on the flood and south on the gasoline were obtainable. ebb. At springs it reaches a velocity of about 5 knots. (4) Tandu Bato, Jolo Island (6° 00' N, 121° 18' E, (b) Landing facilities. There was a small government HO 4513). wharf with a face 47 feet long and a depth alongside of 20 Tandu Bato is on the southwest shore of Dalrymple Harbor feet at mean lower low water (FIGURE VI - 131). PORT FACILITIES Page VI - 95 (c) Clearance facilities. A motor boat service connected (6) Bongao, Bongao Island (5° 02' N, 119° 46' E, Siasi to Jolo, Zamboanga, Bongao, and Sitankai. HO 4546). (d) Availability of supplies. Fresh water was piped to the The port of Bongao lies in the passage between Bongao and dock. Sanga Sanga Islands near the southwestern end of the Sulu Food supplies were obtained in limited quantities. Beef was Archipelago (FIGURE VI - 132). The port facilities were on plentiful if sufficient notice were given. There was a public Bongao. The port served Bongao, which is the largest town in market at Siasi. No gasoline or oil was available. the vicinity and was a constabulary post. There was a light plant which supplied electricity to the (a) Harbor. Depths in the harbor are generally from 22.5 town. to 42 feet at mean lower low water. Except for a shoal with 16.5 feet of water, the entrance channel has depths of 21 or more (e) Repair facilities. None. feet at mean lower low water. N FIGURE VI 130. Siari. Airview of Siasi, looking east at town and harbor. 25 June 1935. OSS 99023. FIGURE VI 131. Siasi. Looking south-southeast at Siasi wharf. In the background is Siasi Channel and the eastern edge of Lapoc Island. March 1941. OSS 93956. Page VI 96 PORT FACILITIES (7) Sitankai (4° 40' N, 119° 23' E, HO 4515). Sitankai is on the first small island south of Tumindao Island near the southwestern end of the Sulu Archipelago. Sitankai itself is surrounded by reefs which are mostly bare at low water. Its single wharf was at the edge of the reef 1.5 miles to the northeast and could only be reached by small boats at high water. Despite its unusual situation, Sitankai is reported to have been a center for trade between North Borneo and Bongao and was the headquarters of a deputy collector of customs. (4) Harbor. There is no information regarding tides at Sitankai, but at nearby Tumindao Island the mean range is 3.1 feet and the diurnal range is 3.8 feet. (b) Landing facilities. The concrete landing on the edge of the reef was 65 feet wide and 98 feet long with a depth along- side the pile clusters of 18 feet at mean lower low water. Depths increase off rapidly to the east. FIGURE VI 132. Bongao. (c) Clearance facilities. A causeway connecting the dock Air view of the town and port of Bongao. No date. ONI 219-578. to Tumindao Island was contemplated in 1937, but as recently as 1941 no work had been done. A customs launch was stationed at the settlement. Shelter is excellent, there being good protection from all (d) Availability of supplies. Fresh water was scarce. It directions. was secured from rainwater cisterns or brought in jars from the There is an anchorage almost due north of Dila Point with wells on Sibutu Island. depths of 26 to 42 feet. It is very small, however, the harbor be- Some food supplies could be purchased at the Chinese store in ing not more than 1,800 feet wide at this point. Outside of the town. harbor there is another anchorage in Aguada Bay. It would pro- (e) Repair facilities. None. vide one first class and one second class berth but use of these would crowd the entrance to Bongao. (8) New Batu Batu, Tawi Tawi Island (5° 04' N, At the extremity of the reef there was a fixed red light, visible 119° 53' E, HO 4546). for 7 miles, on a concrete tower 32 feet high. New Batu Baru is on the east side of Batu Batu Bay, which is Mean tidal range is 3.3 feet. Diurnal range is 4.2 feet. in the southernmost part of Tawi Tawi Island. It is easy of (b) Landing facilities. There was a well-constructed wood- access, The town lies behind a mound and cannot be seen from en pier (FIGURE VI - 133) about 50 feet long near the north- the bay. east end of the island. A narrow causeway connected it with the (a) Harbor. There is 36 to 60 feet of water at mean lower shore. The depth alongside was 18 feet at mean lower low low water to within a short distance of the pier. water (June 1937) but there was little room for maneuvering. Mean tidal range is 3.4 feet, diurnal range 4.4 feet. There is (c) Clearance facilities. Small steamers went to Jolo, little current. Sibutu, and Siasi, Native vessels sailed at irregular intervals for (b) Landing facilities. There was a small landing with a various islands of the group. depth of 16 feet at its face at mean lower low water. A reef ex- (d) Availability of supplies. Water came from wells but tending from the shore almost to the end of the landing inter- was not plentiful. fered with its use by large vessels, In June 1937 the pier was re- No marine or ship's supplies were available. ported to be in poor repair. (e) Repair facilities. None (c) Clearance facilities. About 7 miles of road extended into the jungle. (d) Availability of supplies. Drinking water was sup- plied by wells and had to be boiled before drinking. There was a small store in town where some provisions could be obtained. (e) Repair facilities. None. (9) Cagayan De Sulu, Sulu Island (6° 59' N, 118° 32' E, Ho 4348) Cagayan de Sulu, on Cagayan, Sulu Island, is on the eastern shore of Gunboat Harbor, about 1 mile west of Tandotao Point. It is almost completely landlocked and was a port of call for interisland vessels. Copra was the chief export. (a) Harbor. Gunboar Harbor is about % of a mile long FIGURE VI 133. Bongao. and ½ a mile wide, but deep water is very limited. The wooden pier and causeway. Looking north-northwest. No date. During the northeast monsoon the best anchorage is at the ONI 28576. southwest anchorage about 7 miles west of the port. Depths are PORT FACILITIES Page VI 97 54 to 66 feet at mean lower low water. The bottom is sand and ported to be three 1,800-foot berths in 42 or more feet of water, coral. During heavy weather a swell sometimes breaks com- but only one of these is protected from westerly weather. Dur- munication with the shore. There is also an anchorage on the ing the northeast monsoon protection would be better and a south side of the island off the middle of three remarkable cra- fourth berth south of Usukan Island could be used. There is ter basins. The depth is 60 feet. space for about 15 900-foot berths, but only two of these have In 1940 a light on a white concrete tower 32 feet high was any protection from the west. The normal anchorage is about to be established at position 6° 59' N, 118° 33' E. There is no half a mile from the customhouse with the latter bearing 80°. information as to whether it is in place. High water, full and change, is at 10 hours 15 minutes. High water interval is 8 hours. The height of higher high Springs rise 6 feet and neaps 4.5 feet. water is 4.2 feet; the lowest tide is -1.5 feet. (b) Landing facilities. A single lightly constructed pier (b) Landing facilities. A pier, consisting of a causeway had shallow depths alongside and only ships' boats could use 21 feet wide and 84 feet long, and a wharf 34 feet wide and it (FIGURE VI 135). 101 feet long provided a berth 131 feet long with a depth at There were no lifting appliances available and no storage mean lower low water of 13 feet (FIGURE VI 134). Inter- facilities. island vessels of not more than 12 feet draft used the wharf. (c) Availability of supplies. Water was available from (c) Clearance facilities. There was a road leading north- the streams at the head of the Bay except possibly after a long west across the island to the north shore. drought. A radio station was maintained by the Bureau of Posts and (d) Repair facilities. None. was located 1/2 mile from the pier. (d) Availability of supplies. Rain water furnished the (2) Kudat Harbor (6° 53' N, 116° 51' E, HO 2119, HO town's water supply. At half tide water could be obtained from 2798, HO 2799). a spring at the landing place near the southwest anchorage, and Kudat Harbor is on the western side of Marudu Bay on the at a watering place inside Jurata Bay on the south side of the north coast of Borneo. It was a settlement of the North Borneo island. Company and the distributing center for the various tobacco Supplies were extremely limited but fresh beef could be se- and rubber estates in this vicinity. Kudat Harbor served this set- cured. tlement. (e) Repair facilities. None. (a) Harbor. The harbor is 4 miles deep and, between Tanjong Bornugus on the north and Tanjong Tigasamil on the E. Northeast Borneo. south, is 1½ miles wide. From Sandilands Rock to a point one-half mile west of the (1) Usukan Bay (6° 22' N, 116° 21' E, HO 3050). pier depths are from 18 to 60 feet. West of that the harbor Usukan Bay is about 4 miles north of Ambong Bay on grows increasingly shallow. the north coast of Borneo. There was a government settlement The harbor is sheltered from the swell of the northeast mon- at Usukan Bay, and the port was the principal outlet of trade soon by a reef of sand and coral that extends from Tanjong from the interior. Bornugus. (a) Harbor. General depths are from 42 to 54 feet at Between Sandilands Rock Light and the 36-foot line there mean lower low water. are five 1,800-foot berths in depths of from 36 to 54 feet at The bay is open to the northwest, but otherwise is well pro- mean lower low water. Twenty-two 900-foot berths could be tected. located in the same area. Between the 18 and 36 foot lines there Usukan Bay, nearly 1 3/4 miles long and from ½ to 1 mile are 17 additional berths, wide, provides the most secure anchorage north of Gaya Bay, The entrance to the port was well marked and lighted. Sandi- but it has little or no protection from the west. There are re- lands Rock Light was a flashing white light (period 3 seconds, FIGURE VI 134. Cagayan de Sulu. The pier at Gunboat Bay. Prior to April 1935. ONI 56408. Page VI 98 PORT FACILITIES FIGURE VI - 135. Usukan Bay. Looking south at the pier. No date. ONI 130-200. flash 3 second, eclipse 2.7 seconds, candlepower 100) on a pile There was a bonded warehouse in the customs building. It 10 feet high on a red tower at 6° 52' N, 116° 52' E. It was was 40 feet long and 25 feet wide. There was a rice warehouse visible for 9 miles. Wharf light was a fixed red light (under about 150 feet from the customhouse. It was 48 feet long and 100 candlepower) 15 feet high on the pier at 6° 52' N, 116° 23 feet wide. 51' E. It was visible for 2 miles, but obscured over the west (c) Clearance facilities. There were 30 miles of metalled part of the harbor. roads in the vicinity. Gueritz Rock Beacon was on Gueritz Rock which lies bear- The Straits Steamship Company maintained weekly sched- ing 150°, 1,800 feet distant from the wharf light. It was a ules from Singapore, and the Sabah Steamship Company had a wooden beacon 12 feet high surmounted by a white top mark. fortnightly service to Sandakan, Labuan, and nearby ports. When a vessel was expected a light was shown from this bea- (d) Availability of supplies. Water was piped to the pier con. It is high water, full and change at about 10 hours 50 min- but was not especially good. It should be boiled before use for utes. Mean diurnal range is 4.5 feet. Tidal currents are weak. drinking purposes. Excellent water could be obtained at Mem- pakit on the eastern shore of Marudu Bay. (b) Landing facilities. At the town there was a jetty with Vegetables were obtainable; fruits were plentiful. a face 132 feet long (FIGURE VI 136). During the southwest No fuel or marine supplies were available. monsoon it had a depth alongside of 14 feet at mean lower low water. During the northeast monsoon it had a depth of 16 feet. (e) Repair facilities. None. There was a mooring buoy southwest of the jetty. (3) Tanjong Batu (6° 37' N, 116° 51', E, Ho 2798). Photographs show a second smaller jetty east of the first Tanjong Batu is on the southern shore of Marudu Bay in one, There is no information as to the depth alongside. British North Borneo. The settlement is four miles southwest from Ridge Point. (a) Harbor. The deep water area is small and has no protection from the north. One or two vessels of 15 feet or more draft could anchor about % mile norrhwest of the pier in depths of 31.5 feet at mean lower low water. Those of less draft anchor 2,400 feet northwest of the pier in a depth of about 24 feet. The bottom is muddy. No information on tides is available. (b) Landing facilities. Three quarters of a mile south of Tanjong Batu was a pier 414 feet long. The depth at the outer end was 5 feet at mean low water springs. (c) Clearance facilities. A railroad 3 miles long con- FIGURE VI 136. Kudat. nected the head of the pier with the manganese mine situated Air view of Kudar Harbor looking northwest. 1938. ONI 124-786. at Taritipan. PORT FACILITIES Page VI 99 (d) Repair facilities. None. (d) Availability of supplies. Water was supplied to the (4) Labad Datu (5° 02' N, 118° 20' E, Ho 3044). village by a pipeline from a small creek about 1/4 mile away. It Lahad Datu is on the northwestern shore of a bay formed by had to be boiled before using it for drinking purposes. Water the north coast of Sakar Island and the mainland of Borneo. It is was not piped onto the pier. on Borneo's east coast. The port served the small settlement Vegetables and bread were plentiful but beef was difficult to obtain. which was the headquarters of the Resident of the District and also of the Darval Bay Tobacco Company. (e) Repair facilities. None. However, the harbor could (a) Harbor. Depths range from 24 to 96 feet at mean accommodate a drydock. low water springs. No dredging is required to maintain depths. (5) Simporna (4° 29' N, 118° 37' E, Ho 3044). The harbor is almost 5 miles long and approximately 2 Simporna is on the east coast of Borneo not far from Tawao. miles wide at its widest point. It was the residence of the highest native chief. North of Sakar Island there are about 15 1,800-foot berths in depths of 48 to 96 feet at mean lower low water, and 15 (a) Harbor. The port lies on a narrow channel, Trusan 900-foot berths in 24 feet or more. Anchorage in 30 feet over Tando Bulong, in which depths range from 66 to 120 feet at mud bottom is also found berween Voorwyk and Gray Reefs mean lower low water except where a reef with a depch of 30 off the pierhead, There is no information as to its size. feet extends 2/3 of the way across the channel from the eastern side of the entrance. Aids to navigation at Lahad Datu are shown in TABLE VI 6. Trusan Tando Bulong was very well marked by small wood- TABLE VI 6 en tripod beacons which had been erected in the following posi- AIDS TO NAVIGATION AT LAHAD DATU: tions: TRIPOD BEACON TYPE MARKED Two beacons 1/2 mile apart on the eastern edge of the reef north- LOCATION ward of Simporna; Triangle top 7 Western extremity of Tingger Reef Four beacons on the eastern edge of the reef eastward of Hood Red cylindrical top 8 Halloran Reef, 2,400 feet off the cen- Hill; ter of NW coast of Sakar Island Three beacons on the southeastern edge of the reef southward of Red cylindrical top 9 Southern extremity of Voorwyk Reef Hood Hill; Red cylindrical top 10 Western extremity of Voorwyk Reef Two beacons nearly ½ mile apart, north and south, on the eastern Red cylindrical top 10 One third of a mile south of Gray Reef edge of the reef off the northwestern point of Bumbum Island; Triangle- 12 Western extremity of Gosungan Reef One beacon on the northwestern edge of the reef, off the north- Red cylindrical top 12 Gray Reef-small coral reef 2,400 feet western point of Bumbum Island and nearly 1 mile northward south of the pier of that point; Circular top 13 Southern extremity of Bershesherk, Two beacons on the coral patch close off the western edge of coral patch Creagh Reef at about 1/2 mile northwestward of Sipangao Is- Triangle top 14 Edge of shore reef about 3,990 feet land. east of pier Red cylindrical top 14 Eastern extremity of Tingger Reef Red cylindrical top 16 Eastern extremity of Voorwyk Reef Spring tidal range is 5.2 feet. Red cylindrical top 18 Northern extremity of Gosungan Reef (b) Landing facilities. A pier projected nearly 1/4 mile over a reef into deep water (FIGURE VI 138). Local steam- The spring tidal range is 5 feet. ers lie alongside the pier when visiting Simporna. (b) Landing facilities. There were 2 piers at Lahad No cargo handling equipment and no warehouse facilities Datu. A T-shaped pier 1,350 feet long and 90 feet wide at the were available. head extended in a southeasterly direction from the southwest- (c) Clearance facilities. No information. ern corner of the settlement (FIGURE VI 137). The depth at (d) Availability of supplies. Good water could be ob- the head was 18 feet at mean low water springs. tained from wells about 1/2 a mile from the pier. A wooden pier, with native houses on it, projected a short dis- (e) Repair facilities. None. tance from the shore. Rails on it were connected with the light railway. (6) Tawao (4° 15' N, 117° 53' E, HO 3052). No cargo-lifting appliances were available. Tawao is at the mouth of the Tawao River on the north shore There were 8 warehouses. The government rice ware- of a long bay lying between Sibitik Island and the mainland of house had an area of 1,600 square feet. The customhouse and British North Borneo. The port served the settlement of Tawao, warehouse each had an area of 1,444 square feet. The Darvel which was the headquarters of the district officer and the center Tobacco Company warehouse had an area of 2,300 square feet. of a large trade in rubber, coconuts, agricultural products, live- The Lahad Datu Cultuur Maatschapping warehouse had an area stock, and timber. of 1,230 square feet. There also were 3 Chinese-owned ware- houses, each having an area of 1,100 square feet. (a) Harbor. Tawao itself is a small port but the bay on (c) Clearance facilities. Surfaced roads extended a few which it lies is more than 20 miles long and from 3 to 6 miles miles over the lowlands of the coast from Lahad Datu. A light wide. railway led north from the Darvel Bay Tobacco Company estate Mean low water depths range from 30 feet off the western to the Segama River estate about 10 miles distant. It also con- end of Sibitik Island to 102 feet south by east of Tawao. nected with the wooden pier. With strong southeast to southwest winds it was dangerous Lahad Datu was connected by telegraph and telephone with for ships to remain alongside the main pier. In all other winds Sandakan. shelter is good. Page VI 100 PORT FACILITIES FIGURE VI 137. Lahad Datu. Air view of village and causeway leading to wharf. Looking west. No date. ONI 124-753. Vessels usually anchor in 78 feet about 1,500 feet off Tawao Eggs, beef, and buffalo meat were moderately plentiful; pork, point; small vessels may approach closer. In the bay in front of fish, and fresh coconuts were to be had in abundance. With 2 Tawao there is room for a large number of ships. days notice unlimited quantities of fresh vegetables were avail- There was a fixed white light (100 candle-power) on the able. outer end of Tawao pier. The light was on an iron framework tower 30 feet high and was visible 6 miles. (e) Repair facilities. None. Spring tides rise 9 feet, neaps 6 feet. The spring range is 8 (7) Tanjong Selor (2° 50' N, 117° 22' E, HO 3044). feet. High water is 6 hours and 50 minutes after the moon pass- Tanjong Selor is a river port at the head of the delta of the es overhead. Tides are usually semidiurnal. The current in the bay ranges from 13/4 knots at flood to 23/4 knots at ebb tide. Boelangan River about 40 miles inland from the mouth. The (b) Landing facilities. A pier 726 feet long with a T- estuary is formed by 3 main branches connected by many chan- rels. shaped head 150 feet long and 40 feet wide had a depth along- side of 10 feet at low water springs at its western end and 23 (a) Harbor. The river is navigable to Tanjong Selor by feet at low water springs at its eastern end. There was a small steamers of 11 foot draft. There is always at least 11.8 feet of pier owned by the Borneo Fishing Company about 1 mile east water of the wharf. Large steamers unloaded by lighters in the stream. The port is limited by the width of the river and only 1 A few lighters with capacities of 14 to 250 tons were avail- vessel can be accommodated at a time. able. There is an anchorage opposite the Sultan's house with (c) Clearance facilities. The small pier was connected by depths of 18 feet at mean lower low water. a double hand trolley line (1'8" gauge) to the Tawao Rubber The Muara Makapan fairway buoy marked one of the en- estate, 6 miles distant. trance channels. The channel leading to the Muara Salinbatu A radio station and a telephone system were at Tawao. was marked by a black can buoy. (d) Availability of supplies. Well water was usually avail- The following tide signals were made from the government able but was not suitable for drinking purposes. pier: PORT FACILITIES Page VI . 101 Blue flag or 2 red lights at night fbb current; Red flag or 1 red light at night (b) Landing facilities. The government wharf was 140 flood current; White flag or no lights shown at night slack water. feet long and had 24 feet of water alongside. It was in front of the customhouse. There were 4 other wharves for use of na- Tides are single or double daily depending on the moon's tive craft only. declination. Springs rise 7½ feet, neaps 3 feet. Spring tides Limited storage facilities were available. reach as far as Tanjong Selor. The ebb current attains its great- There was a coal loading place for vessels of the K.P.M. at est speed (2 knots) at spring tides and 1.5 knots at neap tides Telock Bayur (Bedawata). This settlement is on the right bank near low tide. of the Sungai Makam, about 5 miles above Tanjong Redeb. (b) Landing facilities. There were 3 piers. The govern- (c) Clearance facilities. Vessels of the K.P.M. called regu- ment pier was 65 feet long and had 13 feet of water alongside larly. at mean low water springs; the other 2 piers were 82 feet long There was a radio station at Tanjong Redeb. and had 12 feet of water alongside at mean low water springs. (d) Availability of supplies. There was no pure water There was a customhouse near the government quay. available. (c) Availability of supplies. Supplies were difficult to Coal provisions were available in small quantities. obtain and then only in limited quantities. (e) Repair facilities. None. There was a radio station and telephone cables were laid (9) Benoa Baru (0° 59' N. 117° 59' E, HO 3053). across the river at Tanjong Selor. Benoa Baru is also called Sangkoelirang. It is at the mouth (d) Repair facilities. None. of the Sangkoelirang River on the northwestern shore of the Makassar Straits. (8) Tanjong Redeb (approximately 2° 12' N, 128° 00' E, HO 3044). (a) Harbor. The size is limited by the width of the river. At Benoa Baru it is more than 1/2 mile wide. Tanjong Redeb lies where the Sungais Makam (Makam River) and the Kelai River join to form the Beraue River. It The entrance was well marked. The depth is 26 feet. Vessels is 56 miles upstream from the mouth of the river. It was the drawing 20 feet can reach Benoa Baru at all times. headquarters of a government official and the center of jungle There was flashing white light (period 8 seconds, flashing trade. 2 seconds, eclipse 6 seconds) at 0° 46' N, 118° 05' E. It was visible for 11 miles. The light was obscured behind Miang (a) Harbor. The minimum depth in the channel is 12 Besar and Miang Kechil. feet at mean low water springs. The Kelai is navigable for ves- A fixed white light was shown from the head of the pier at sels' of 10-foot draft as far as the village of Merasa, a distance Benoa Baru. of about 27 miles above Tanjong Redeb. The Makam is navi- At Miang Besar at the mouth of the river there are double gable for vessels 12 to 13 feet draft as far as the junction of the daily tides from December to February inclusive, those in the Sidoeng tributary 22 miles above Redeb. Pilots are essential evening being higher than those in the morning. Only at neaps for navigation on these rivers. is a single daily tide sometimes observed. The spring range is 8.4 Local knowledge or a large scale chart showing the existing feet. state of the buoyage would be necessary for proceeding up (b) Landing facilities. In front of the village there was river. a wharf about 50 feet long. The depth alongside is reported to Spring tides rise 9 feet on the bar near Sokkan and 5 feet at have been 20 feet at mean low water springs. It was used by Redeb. Ebb current in the river had a speed of about 3 knots, coastal vessels of not more than 700 to 800 gross tons. The flood current a speed of 2 knots. From 2 days before until 2 days South Sea Forestry floating dock, about 150 to 160 feet long, after semidiurnal spring tides about 3 foot should be added to was also used for disembarkation. the mean level and from 2 days before until 2 days after neap There were sheds on the wharf. tides the same amount subtracted. On other days the influence of (c) Clearance facilities. Regular boat service was main- the semidiurnal tide is negligible. tained to Samarinda. FIGURE VI 138. Simporna. Looking approximately south at the pier and landing stage. No date. ONI 130-194. Page VI 102 PORT FACILITIES A wireless telegraph station was located at Benoa Baru. (d) Availability of supplies. No pure water was available. Food was obtainable in small quantities. Fuel was not available in this port. (e) Repair facilities. None. TILAMOETA F. Northern Celebes Sector. Pier " (1) Tomini, Celebes Island (0° 30' N, 120° 33' E). Tomini is on the south coast of the northern arm of Celebes # Island near its western end (FIGURE VI - 139). The landing was in front of the village. (a) Harbor. The harbor, Tomini road, is an open road- mud stead in the northwest corner of the Gulf of Tomini. The 10- sand fathom contour lies about 200 yards offshore. The anchorage is off the western part of the village, with the flagstaff bearing about 0°. Eastward of the anchorage are 2 reefs with 7 and 1 fathoms of water over them. The latter was marked by a beacon. PORT FACILITIES AT (b) Landing facilities. There was a pier or landing stage N TILAMOETA, CELEBES about 250 feet long, near the Rajah's house, which extended 30 N., 122° 21 2 10,00 2000 to the edge of the coral reef. SOURCE: B. A CHART NO. 2718 (c) Clearance facilities. Vessels of the K.P.M. called reg. APRIL 1944 ularly. SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS N 13 PREPARED BY THE BOARD OF ENGINEERS FOR RIVERS AND HARBORS, CORPS OF ENGINEERS. 120°0'E 122°0'E FIGURE VI 140. Tilamosta. Map showing location of port (inset) and port plan showing location BAY of facilities. BOEOL 1°0'N 0 DONDO KAMPOENGBAROE TANG 1°0'N (2) Toeladenggi (Tuladenggi, Celebes Island (0° 24' STADANG N, 121° 09' E). TOMINI Toeladenggi is on the Toeladenggi River, which flows into TOELADENGOI the western end of the Gulf of Tomini, Celebes Island (FIG- URE VI 139). The river is navigable for large praus. No land- ing facilities have been reported. (a) Harbor. The harbor is an open roadstead. The 10- GULF OF TOMINI fathom contour lies 300 yards offshore. A partly drying bank VICINITY MAP SCALE OF MILES of mud and sand projects 600 yards from Toeladenggi Point, o 10 20 30 40 with some detached reefs southward of it. The reefs near the 100-fathom contour, about 4 miles offshore, are all marked by discoloration. 120 33'E. Anchorage is available in 18 to 20 fathoms, over a mud bot- tom, off the mouth of the river. Tomini (b) Landing facilities. There were no piers at Toela- 20 denggi. or Pier If 17 (c) Clearance facilities. Vessels of the K.P.M. called reg. 23 ularly. (3) Tilamoeta (Tilamuta), Celebes Island (0° 30' N, 0°30'N. 122°, 21' E). Tilamoeta is on the northwest shore of Tilamoeta Bay, an PORT FACILITIES AT arm of the Gulf of Tomini, on the southern side of the northern TOMINI, CELEBES arm of Celebes Island (FIGURE VI - 140). There was a pier in front of the town. SCALE OF FEET PREPARED BY THE BOARD OF 1000 o 3000 (a) Harbor. Tilamoeta Bay is a natural harbor, with ENGINEERS FOR RIVERS AND SHRHHI SOURCE B.A. CHART NO.2718 depths ranging from 30 fathoms at the entrance to 10 fathoms HARBORS, CORPS OF ENG. APRIL 1944 at its head. The width between the 10-fathom contours ranges FIGURE VI 139. Tomini. from about 1 mile at the entrance to about 200 yards at the head Map showing location of port (inset) and port plan showing location of the bay, and is about 1 mile long northwest-southeast. It is of facilities. open to the southeast. PORT FACILITIES Page VI 103 There is good, but confined, anchorage in Tilamoeta Bay, in (5) Totok, Celebes Island (0° 51' N, 124° 42' E). 20 fathoms, over a mud bottom, for four first-class anchorage berths. Totok is on the western shore of Totok Bay, on the east The average annual rainfall is 67.3 inches. coast of the northeastern peninsula of Celebes Island, 4 miles north of Kotaboena (FIGURE VI 141). The village was of (b) Landing facilities. Landing facilities consisted of a little importance, except as the site of the Totok Goldmine pier about 200 feet long, with charted depths of 2 or 3 feet on its head. Company, which had a pier south of the village. (a) Harbor. Totok Bay is a spacious natural harbor. The (c) Clearance facilities. Tilamoeta was a port of call for the K.P.M. south side of the bay is formed by a narrow tongue of land, which terminates in a reef with some rocky islets on it. The bay (d) Availability of supplies. Provisions were not obtain- able. can be entered between Toelang (Tulang) Island and the mainland, or between Hogaoe (Hogow) and Dakokajoe (Da- (4) Kotaboena (Kotabuna), Celebes Island (0° 48' N, kokayu) Islands. Both channels are wide and clean. A river 124° 40' E). north of the village usually discolors the water so that the shore Kotaboena is on the southeast coast of the northeastern pen- reef cannot be seen. insula of the Celebes Island, about 50 miles south-southwest of The anchorage is eastward of the pier in 12 to 15 fathoms. Manado (FIGURE VI 141). No landing facilities are reported. (b) Landing facilities. Facilities at the port consisted of a (a) Harbor. The harbor in Kotaboena road is an open pier (FIGURE VI 142), 330 feet long, belonging to the mining roadstead berween Koemeke (Kumeke) Island and the main- company, which also maintained several large warehouses and land. The 10-fathom contour lies from 175 to 300 yards off- storage places. shore. The western end of Koemeke Island is about 475 yards (c) Clearance facilities. Vessels of the K.P.M. called ev- ery 2 weeks. 124°30'E 125°0'E TALISEI CELEBES ISLAND N 1°30'N MANADO 1°30'N Testong KEMA Bahl 1. TETAPAAN AMOERANG BAY Registe WALENTAU PT, AMOERANG TOTOK BAY OMEONTA TOTOKRATA 1°0'N R 1°0'N PORT FACILITIES AT TOTOKRATA, CELEBES TOTOKRATA: PWR, E. KOTABOENA *KOEMEKEE SCALE or MILES o SOURCE: CHART NO 34 PORTS ON THE PREPARED or THE BOARD or INCHEIRS FOR AND MARRORS CORPS or ENG APRIL 1944 NORTHEAST PENINSULA FIGURE VI 142. Total OF CELEBES ISLAND Map showing location of port facilities. SCALE OF MILES 0 10 20 30 40 (6) Kema, Celebes Island (1° 22' N, 125° 05' E). APRIL 1944 PREPARED BY THE BOARD OF ENGINEERS FOR Kema is in a bight on the east coast of the northeastern pen- RIVERS AND HARBORS, CORPS OF ENGINEERS. insula of Celebes Island, about 19 miles southeast of Manado (FIGURE VI - 141). It was a complimentary port to Manado, FIGURE VI 141. Celebes Island, NE Peninsula. providing perfect shelter in the northwest monsoon when Ma- Map showing location of ports. nado road is unsafe. No landing facilities are reported. North of Kema, the Sawangan River discharges into the off the mainland. The width of the channel, between the main- harbor. The entrance is dry at low water. land and Koemeke Island, is from 150 to 285 yards berween (a) Harbor. The harbor, Kema road, is an open road- the 10-fathom contours, with a minimum depth of 16 fathoms. stead. The 3-fathom contour lies from 230 to 430 yards off- There is safe but confined anchorage in 12 to 15 fathoms, shore; the 5-fathom contour from 350 to 630 yards; and the 10- abreast some coconut trees on Koemeke. fathom contour from 1,150 to 1,500 yards offshore. (b) Landing facilities. No piers are known to exist. On the northern side of the roadstead, outside the 10-fathom (c) Clearance facilities. Kotaboena was a port of call for contour, at a distance of 500 yards offshore, is a detached rock vessels of the K.P.M. with 3 fathoms of water over it. 1 mile 76° from the mouth Page VI 104 PORT FACILITIES of Sawangan River. A shoal with a least depth of 3 feet lies 600 tangent of Kinabahoetan Island 47°, berween the head of the yards 161° from Kema Light. The width of the shore reef of pier and a reef of 4½ fathoms. Small vessels could anchor be- Kema increases to the northeastward. Depths over it are uneven. tween the pier and a black can buoy in the roadstead, with a When approaching from southward vessels must avoid the reef stern hawser to the pier. extending from the south point of the bight. Spring tides rise from 2 to 7 feet, and neaps from 1/2 to 5½ There is good anchorage at Kema road through the gréater feet. The flood current runs northwestward through the pas- part of the year, although open to easterly and southerly winds. sage between Gangga, Tendila, and Talise, and to the north There is anchorage southeastward of the village in 5 to 10 between Talise and Bangka. The flood current on the west side fathoms. of Talise runs due north, and meeting the current from between A fixed red light, 24 feet above high water and visible 3 Talise and Bangka, forms a rip tide which is encountered 3 miles, was shown when vessels were expected. miles to the northwest of the north point of Talise Island. Tides rise up to 3½ feet. A current sets northward along The ebb current runs between the islands to the southeast the coast with a velocity of 1 to 1½ knots. and fair through Bangka Strait. Tide rips are formed off all the The average rainfall is 65.6 inches. salient points, and there are heavy races to the northward and (b) Landing facilities. No piers are known to exist. Land- northeastward of Bangka.¹ ings were probably made on the beach (FIGURE VI . 143). (b) Landing facilities. The stone mole, which extended During the southeast monsoon, from June through September, to the edge of the coral reef (FIGURE VI 144), was about 300 the swell breaks heavily on the beach, but landing can always feet long, and had a shed at the end. be made at the southern part of the roadstead by the old coal (c) Clearance facilities. Talisei was a port of call for sheds. K.P.M. (c) Clearance facilities. Vessels of the K.P.M. called reg- (d) Availability of supplies. Good water was obtained ularly. Roads connected the port with Manado and Amoerang from a spring near the mole. There was a small government (Amurang). coal depot of about 6,000 tons capacity at Talise, where coal (d) Availability of supplies. The water from Sawangan could be taken in at the rate of 200 tons per day. River is fit for use. 125° 05'E Sh. shell Co. coral sand Co. coral St. stone S. sand SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS Kinabohoetan I. 20 1° 50° N. TALISEI as I If 7 PORT FACILITIES AT A 23 TALISEI, TALISEI ISLAND to SCALE OF MILES = - as o as as D 3 24 SOURCE B.A. CHART NO.930 APRIL 1944 ao To 27 INF PREPARED BY THE BOARD OF ENGINEERS FOR 20 RIVERS AND HARBORS, CORPS OF ENGINEERS. PORT FACILITIES AT KEMA, CELEBES FIGURE VI 144. Talise. SCALE OF FEET Port plan showing location of facilities. 1000 2000 20 SOURCE B.A. CHART NO.2718 ac APRIL 1944 (8) Amoerang (Amurang), Celebes Island (1° 12' N, PREPARED BY THE BOARD OF ENGINEERS FOR 124° 34' E). 125 os E RIVERS AND HARBORS, CORPS OF ENGINEERS. Amoerang is in the southwest part of the head of Amoerang FIGURE VI 143. Kema. Bay, on the northeast coast of Celebes Island, about 29 miles Map showing location of landing places. southwest of Manado (FIGURE VI - 141). No landing facilities are reported. (7) Talise Island (1° 50' N, 125° 04' E). (a) Harbor. The harbor in Amoerang road is an open roadstead, in the southwestern part of an inner bay formed by Talise is on the southeastern point of Talise Island, which is a tongue of land which projects from the south shore of Amoer- about 5 miles off the northeasternmost point of Celebes Island ang Bay. Amoerang Bay is deep and free of dangers. The 10- (FIGURE VI 141). The Molukka Trading Company had a fathom contour lies 25 to 325 yards offshore. It is about 8 pier in front of the village. miles wide at the entrance, between Tetapaan Island and (a) Harbor. Talise road is a natural harbor, sheltered Walintau Point, and 5 miles wide at the head. It indents the by surrounding islands. The 10-fathom contour lies from 300 coast about 8 miles eastward. The bay is open to the west and to 625 yards offshore at Talise, northwest. The roadstead is safe during the entire year, but the There is good anchorage in a depth of 10 to 12 fathoms, with bottom is very steep, and it is necessary to secure astern with a the house near the root of the pier bearing 309°, and the west shore mooring. PORT FACILITIES Page VI 105 The best anchorage is in 40 fathoms, about 200 yards from miles west of the western entrance point to Koeandang Bay. the beach, with the flagstaff of the old Lunet bearing about (FIGURE VI 144). There was a pier at the village. 148°. Vessels should approach the shore with about 40 fath- oms of chain out changing to 90 or 95 fathoms when the an- (a) Harbor. The harbor, in Soemalata road, is protected chor holds, and then securing with & shore mooring or stern from easterly winds by Dojanoemo (Dojanumo) Island and anchor. One half mile northwestward of the mouth of the the reef south of its east point and another reef southwesterly Ranorapo River, near the coffee warehouse, there is another from its western point. There are narrow channels between the island and the reefs. A mile northwestward of Dojanoema Is- secure anchorage. land is Hoelwa (Ulawa) Islet, and 14 mile northeastward The tidal range is from 3.2 to 5.2 feet. there is a large drying reef. A 4-fathom shoal is located about The mean temperature is about 79°, maximum 90°, and minimum 73°. The average annual rainfall is 123 inches. M mile south-southeastward of the eastern point of Dojanoema Island. The channel off the eastern end of Dojanoema Island (b) Landing facilities. There were no piers. is about 150 yards wide with a central depth of 13 fathoms, (c) Clearance facilities. Vessels of K.P.M. called every and that off the western end is about 100 yards wide with a cen- 4 weeks. tral depth of 10 fathoms; while the channel in Soemalata road, (9) Koeandang (Kwandang), Celebes Island (0° 51'N, in front of the village, is about 800 yards wide, with depths up 122° 55' E). to 19 fathoms. All widths are between the 5-fathom contours. The beach in the vicinity of Soemalata is sandy with the 5-fath- Koeandang is a village and harbor located on Koeandang om contour 100 to 300 yards offshore. Bay, which opens on the north coast of Celebes Island (FIGURE Soemalata road furnishes good anchorage in the south mon- VI 145). There was a pier at the head of the harbor. soon and fair anchorage in the northwest monsoon. During the (4) Harbor. The harbor, which lies along the southeast- northwest monsoon, there is safe anchorage in 17 fathoms, over ern shore of Koeandang Bay, is about 2 miles wide at its mouth sand, south of Dojanoema Island. A hawser should be run to by about 2 miles long, outside the 5-fathom contour, with shore. depths up to 16 fathoms. It is formed and largely protected by (b) Landing facilities. There was a pier at Soemalata. Pajoenga (Payunga) Island. Phoenix reef, marked by a beacon, (c) Clearance facilities. Loading and unloading was car- lies in the western part of the harbor's mouth. The shoreline ried on by lighters. In bad weather and a heavy sea the cargo is south and east of the anchorage is of mud and coral while the first taken to Dojanoemo and afterwards carried to Soemalata. shore of Pajoenga Island is generally bordered by a fringing Vessels of the K.P.M. called every 4 weeks. reef. Anchorage which is safe in both monsoons, is available along (11) Tang, Celebes Island (1° 03' N, 121° 58' E). the east shore of Pajoenga Island in depchs of 6 to 16 fathoms. Tang is on the western shore of a large bay that lies between Anchorage is prohibited within 3 miles of the cable house be- Capes Loboe (Lobu) and Kanjai (Kandjai) on the north coast of tween 168° and 188°. A flashing white light, 46 feet above Celebes Island (FIGURE VI 139). The landing pier was located high water and visible 12 miles, was shown at the entrance to south of the village. Koeandang Bay. A fixed red light, 17 feet high and visible 5 (a) Harbor. The harbor is in Paleleh roads. Minor pro- miles, was shown from a point on shore in front of Kwandang. tection is provided by Paleleh Island, Jellesma Islet, and the (b) Landing facilities. Facilities at the port consisted of high tongue of land that lies between Tang and Paleleh vil- a pier, about 250 feet long, located at the end of the continua- lage. Paleleh Island is surrounded by a partly drying reef, while tion of the road on which the police station was located. a 4-fathom shoal extends about 300 yards southwesterly from (c) Clearance facilities. Vessels of the K.P.M. called reg. Jellesma Islet. Although the bay is comparatively shallow, with ularly. depths of 10 to 30 fathoms, the bottom near the shore, in the (d) Availability of supplies. Poultry and fish were avail- vicinity of Tang, drops off steeply, with the 10-fathom contour able. within 200 yards of the beach. The shore is sandy. A small 3- fathom patch lies 2,100 yards 99° from the south point of Paleleh Island. The best anchorage is southward of Jellesma Islet in depths SOCIALA of 12 to 15 fathoms, over mud. The average annual rainfall is 104.2 inches, with 12.6 inches in January, the wettest month, and 5.1 inches in August, the month of least rainfall. A fixed red light, visible 2 miles, was shown from the outer end of the pier. (b) Landing facilities. A landing pier extended about VIDIAITY MAP KOENDANG AND CELEBER 425 feet from shore at a point about 100 yards south of the vil- lage, to a depth of about 1-fathom. FIGURE VI 145. Koeandang and Soemalata. (c) Clearance facilities. Vessels of the K.P.M. called ev- Map showing location of ports. ery 4 weeks. (12) Boeol, Celebes Island (1° 10' N, 121° 27' E). (10) Soemalata (Sumalata), Celebes Island (0° 59' N, Boeol is on the north coast of Celebes Island, about 250 miles 122° 31' E). west of Manado (FIGURE VI 139). No landing facilities are Soemalata is on the north coast of Celebes Island, about 8 reported. Page VI 106 PORT FACILITIES (a) Harbor. The harbor is in Boeol roads an open road- (a) Harbor. Tolitoli Bay is a natural harbor. There are stead, open to the eastward. The 10-fathom contour is 570 depchs of 18 fathoms in the bay, decreasing rapidly within the yards offshore. Inside the 15-fathom curve, depths decrease 10-fathom contour which lies between 60 and 550 yards off- rapidly. During easterly winds the roadstead is unsafe. shore. The bay is about 11/3 miles in diameter. It is open to the Anchorage is available in 30 fathoms about 1/2 mile offshore. northwest. (b) Landing facilities. There were no piers. The bay affords secure anchorage in all seasons. Anchorage is (c) Clearance facilities. No data are available. available in the eastern part, 1/2 mile off Kampoengbaroe in Boeol was a port of call for the K.P.M. depths of 18 fathoms, over a mud bottom. It is advisable not to (d) Availability of supplies. Good water could be ob- anchor in less than 16 to 18 fathoms. tained from the river. A fixed red light, 14 feet above high water and visible 2 miles, was shown just westward of the pier at Laboean Dedeh (13) Kampoengbaroe, Celebes Island (1° 02' N, 120° Point. 49' E). The tide varies from 1/2 to 21/4 feet. Kampoengbaroe is on the eastern shore of Tolitoli Bay, on (b) Landing facilities. The facilities in Tolitoli Bay con- the northwest coast of Celebes Island (FIGURE VI 139). It sisted of a pier at Kampoengbaroe at the head of the bay, and was the center of trade for the surrounding country. There was another eastward of Laboean Dedeh Point, the north point of the a pier at the village and another on Laboean Dedeh Point. bay. A stone pier at Kampoengbaroe (Reference number 1, FIG- URE VI - 146) was 885 feet long and had a depth of 24 feet PREPARED BY THE BOARD OF ENGINEERS FOR RIVERS AND HARBORS, CORPS OF ENGINEERS. along the head. corol m mud A wooden pier founded on screw piles, eastward of Laboean SOUNDINGS IN FATHOMS Dedeh Point (Reference number 2, FIGURE VI 146), was 85 feet long and 42 feet wide at the head, with 30 feet of water alongside. There were no mooring bollards or buoys, but haw- sers could be made fast to the neighboring trees. With strong westerly winds it is advisable to moor with bow to the south- ao westward. There is ample swinging room. 2 NARIATION (c) Clearance facilities. Vessels of the K.P.M. called at INCREASING ARRIVALLY Leisings 1 Tolitoli Bay. Kompoengbaroa (d) Availability of supplies. Drinking water was not ob- tainable. Provisions were scarce. I A BY (14) Stadang, Celebes Island (0° 52' N, 120° 20' E). Stadang is on the west shore of Bananga Bay, an arm of Don- a do Bay, on the northwest coast of Celebes Island (FIGURE VI- 139). There was a pier at the village. m MAIN (a) Harbor. Bananga Bay, which is about 2 miles wide at its mouth and indented about 2 miles, is rocky on the east shore and sandy on its south and west shores. KAMPOENGBAROE CELEBES Sheltered anchorage is available in 38 fathoms, about 500 SCALE OF MILES yards from shore in front of town, with Banga Point bearing o 12°, a zinc roof in the village 298°, and Cape Senyangang 80°. SOURCE H.O. CHART NO.3071 APRIL 1944 (b) Landing facilities. Facilities at the port consisted of di pier of light native material. FIGURE VI 146. Kampoengbaroe. (c) Clearance facilities. Vessels of the K.P.M. called OC- Map showing location of port facilities. casionally to load copra. PORT FACILITIES Page VI. 107 63. Principal Sources 23. 1942. SAILING DIRECTIONS FOR New GUINEA AND ISLANDS EASTWARD OF CELEBES AND TIMOR. Ho 164, PP. 40-108. 1. Allied Air Forces, C.I.U. Headquarters, Directorate of Intelligence. 1943. CELEBES (MANADO RESIDENCY). Objective Folder 49, PP. 24. 1-59. 1943. NAVAL AIR PILOT. Ho 192. BORNBO, CELEBES, LESSER Is- LANDS and Supplements A-192-28 and 28A. 2. Allied Air Forces, S. W. P. A. 25. 1944. Intelligence Summary 185. Objective Data ODI. 1943. LIST OF LIGHTS AND Fog SIGNALS. Islands of the Pacific 3. Allied Geographical Section, S. W. P. A. and Indian Oceans, Australia, Asia, and the East Coast of Africa. 1943. NORTHERN MOLUKAS. Terrain Study 7, PP- 6-40. Vol. 2, pp- 178-180, 390-391. 4. Commonwealth of the Philippines, Department of Finance, Bu- 26. reau of Customs. 1944. SAILING DIRECTIONS FOR SUNDA STRAITS AND NORTHEAST 1940. ANNUAL REPORT OF THE INSULAR COLLECTOR OF Cus- COAST OF BORNBO, AND OFFLYING DANGERS. 542 PP- illus. TOMS. Manila, Philippine Islands. 422 pp. 27. U.S. Navy Department, Office of Naval Operations. 5. Government of the Philippines, Department of Agriculture and 1942. THE PHILIPPINES. ONI 93, Pt. II, pp. 10-40. Natural Resources. 28. 1928. MINDANAO AND THE SULU ARCHIPELAGO. Manila, P. 1. 18 May 1943. NAVAL ATTACHE, LONDON, INTELLIGENCE RE- Bull. 38, PP. 44-58, 78, 95. PORT. Ser. 2007, pp. 1-12. 6. Great Britain, Admiralty. 29. Mar. 1941. BRITISH CONFIDENTIAL BOOK, London. C.B. 1819A 24 Jan. 1944. TARAKAN ISLAND. Report DIO-3ND. (x). 30. U.S. War Department, Military Intelligence Division. 1942. SURVEY OF THE NETHERLANDS. S 30-652. 7. Great Britain, Admiralty, Naval Intelligence Division. 1941. NETHERLANDS (POSSESSIONS) INTELLIGENCE REPORT. 31. 1943. SURVEY OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. S 30-603, Vol. 1, PP. London. C.B. 1819A P. 63. 110-111, 54, Vol. 3. 8. Great Britain, Admiralty, Hydrographic Office. 32. 1942. EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO PILOT. Supplement 10. 1942. SURVEY OF BRITISH NORTH BORNBO, BRUNEL AND SARA- 9. Lloyd's. WAK. 30-676, illus, maps. 1939-1940. LLOYD'S REGISTER OF SHIPPING. Particulars of dry- 33. docks, pontoons, patent slipways, etc. Vol. 2, Appendix. London. 1943. NETHERLANDS EAST INDIES. E.R.O. Special Rept. No. 51, 10. Vol. 1, p. 82; Vol. 4, Pt. I, PP- 13, 121-122, Pt. III, Celebes 1941. LLOYD'S PORT RECORD. Group; Vol. 5, p. 34. New York. 11. Netherlands Ministerie van Marine, Afdeeling Hydrographie. 34. 1931. ZEEMANSGIDS VOOR NEDERLANDSCH OOST INDIE Deel II. 1944. PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. E.R.O. Special Rept. No. 45, Vols. 1 and 3. Midden Gedeere. 599 PP, illus, maps. 12. Netherlands Representatives to Combined Chiefs of Staff, Washing- 35. Various Photographs. ton. Feb. 1944. HALMAHERA. pp. 18-47. (Confidential). 13. U.S. American Embassy, Chungking. MAPS AND CHARTS June 1943. JESSELTON. Disparch 1276 (to State Department). 36. Great Britain, Admiralty. 14. U.S. Department of Commerce, Bureau of Foreign and Domestic 1942. B. A. Charts 900, 930, 2718. Commerce. 1930. TRANSPORTATION FACILITIES IN THE PHILIPPINE Is- 37. Great Britain, General Staff, Geographical Section. 1942. G. S. G. 5. Map 4204 (North A-52). LANDS. Manila. Report 53, PP. 12-39. 38. Netherlands, Hydrographic Office. 15. Netherlands HO Charts: 1937. Data on Port Work in the Philippines. pp. 6-17, 41-47. 1910, No. 342; 1927, No. 185; 1928, Nos. 387, 392; 16. 4. S. Department of Commerce, Coast and Geodetic Survey. 1933, No. 194; 1935, No. 195. 1939. UNITED STATES COAST PILOT, PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. Palau, 39. U.S. Navy Department, Hydrographic Office. Mindanao, and Sulu Archipelago, Pt. II, Ser. No. 164, 54 PP- illus. Ho Charts: Date No. 17. 1939. TIDE TABLES, PACIFIC OCEAN AND INDIAN OCEAN. pp. 1940. 1727, 3083, 3084. 1942. 3002, 3057, 3059, 3062, 3071, 3082. 272-274. (Restricted). 1943. 3054, 3058, 3060, 3061, 3080. 18. 1944. TIDE TABLES, PACIFIC OCEAN AND INDIAN OCEAN. 327 PP- 40. U.S. War Department, Army Map Service. 1942. A.M.S. T-541 Maps: 19. U. S. Maritime Commission, Division of Economics and Statis- LIROENG, SANGIHE ISLAND, SIAOE, TAHOELANDANG ISLAND, tics, Port Survey Section. TALAUD ISLAND. CONSULAR REPORTS. 41. 20. U.S. Office of Strategic Services. 1943. A.M.S. T-661 Sheets: 1943. SURVEY OF THE PHILIPPINES. R and A 760. 2, 4, 7, 8, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 16, 18, 19. 21. U. S. Navy Department, Hydrographic Office. 42. 1943. NAVAL AIR PILOT. New GUINEA AREA. Ho 276, P- 159. 1943. A.M.S. S-401 Grid Maps: N1351-2, NB51-3, NC51-5, NC51-6. 22. 1935. SAILING DIRECTIONS FOR CELEBES, SOUTHEAST BORNEO, 43. U.S. War Department, Military Intelligence Division. AND THE ISLANDS EAST OF JAVA. Ho 163, PP. 411-482. 1943. SURVEY OF PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. S30-603. Vol. 3. Map 5b. FIGURE VI 147 JANIS 155 CELEBES SEA AREA PORT FACILITIES Major Ports Minas Parts - Table of Contents-Continued Page Page (39) Naga-Naga (Chinkang), Mindanso Island VI 74 E. Northeast Borneo VI 97 (40) Bacao, Mindanao Island VI 77 (1) Usukan Bay VI 97 (41) Malangai, Mindanao Island VI 77 (2) Kudat Harbor VI 97 (42) Margosatubig, Mindanao Island VI 78 (3) Tanjong Batu VI 98 (43) Flecha Point, Mindanso Island VI 79 (4) Lahad Datu VI 99 (44) Pagadian, Mindanao Island VI 80 (45) Malabang, Mindanao Island (5) Simporna VI 99 VI 80 (46) Parang, Mindanao Island VI 80 (6) Tawao VI 99 (47) Kalamansig (Port Lebak), Mindanao Island VI 83 (7) Tanjong Selor VI 100 (48) Milbuk, Mindanao Island VI 85 (8) Tanjong Redeb VI 101 (49) Makar, Mindanao Island VI 86 (9) Benoa Baru VI 101 (50) Glan, Mindanao Island VI 86 F. Northern Celebes Sector VI 102 (51) Lawa, Mindanao Island VI 87 (1) Tomini, Celebes Island VI 102 (52) Malita, Mindanao Island VI 88 (53) Lacaron, Mindanao Island (2) Toeladenggi (Tuladenggi), Celebes Island VI 102 VI 89 (54) Daliao, Mindanao Island VI 89 (3) Tilamoeta (Tilamuta), Celebes Island VI 102 (55) Talomo, Mindanao Island VI 90 (4) Kotaboena (Kotabuna), Celebes Island VI 103 (56) Madaum, Mindanao Island VI 91 (5) Totok, Celebes Island VI 103 (57) Monserat, Mindanao Island VI 91 (6) Kema, Celebes Island VI 103 D. Sulu Archipelago VI 92 (7) Talise Island VI 104 (1) Isabela, Basilan Island VI 92 (8) Amoerang (Amunang), Celebes Island VI 104 (2) Port Holland, Basilan Island VI 93 (9) Koeandang (Kwandang), Celebes Island VI 105 (3) Kulibato Point (Lamitan), Basilan Island VI 94 (10) Soemalata (Sumalata), Celebes Island VI 105 (4) Tandu Bato, Jolo Island VI 94 (11) Tang, Celebes Island VI 105 (5) Siasi, Siasi Island VI 94 (12) Boeol, Celebes Island VI 105 (6) Bongao, Bongao Island VI 95 (13) Kampoengbaroe, Celebes Island VI 106 (7) Sitankai VI 96 (14) Stadang, Celebes Island VI 106 (8) New Batu Batu, Tawi Tawi Island VI 96 (9) Cagayan de Sulu, Sulu Island VI 96 63. PRINCIPAL SOURCES VI 107 DECLASSIFIED By Authority of JCS letter, 7-25-75 By SR Date JUL 31 1975